JP2021171175A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having new amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: reservation means capable of reserving up to a predetermined number of pieces of acquired start information; lottery means for holding a lottery by using start information under reservation when a variation start condition is satisfied; pattern control means for performing control so as to derive a lottery result by variation displaying a pattern when a variation start condition is satisfied; special game state control means capable of shifting to a special game state in which a pattern is not displayed variably when a special stop mode for showing a special result is derived; specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state that is a game state in which a pattern is displayed variably and is more advantageous than a normal game state when a specific stop mode for showing a specific result is derived; preceding determination means capable of performing preceding determination of a lottery result; and preceding performance control means for performing control so as to execute a preceding performance prior to variation display of a pattern on the basis of a result of preceding determination.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a special result is derived, a gaming machine is controlled to a special gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

As a gaming machine of this type, in addition to the special gaming state that is controlled when a special result is derived, even if the special result is not derived, the variable display of the specified number of times is performed in the high probability time shortening state. A gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability non-time saving shortening state is disclosed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-174800

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a new game property such as shifting from a high-probability time-shortening state to a high-probability non-time-shortening state to make the gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In recent years, a gaming machine having a new game property has been desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A winning random number acquisition means capable of acquiring a special lottery random number based on the game ball launched toward the game area passing through the special start area, and
Using the special lottery random number acquired by the winning random number acquisition means, a special lottery means capable of executing a special lottery related to control of a special game state that can give a profit to the player, and a special lottery means.
A special symbol random number acquisition means capable of acquiring a special symbol random number based on the game ball launched toward the game area passing through the special start area, and a special symbol random number acquisition means.
A special symbol variable control means capable of executing variable display of a special symbol based on the result of the special lottery and the special symbol random number acquired by the special symbol random number acquisition means, and
When the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the special result is derived, the special game state control means that can control the special game state and the special game state control means.
When the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the small hit result is derived, the expected value of the amount to which the game value as a prize can be given is smaller than the special game state. Game state control means and
The first specific control that can shorten the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the normal game state, and the frequency with which the game ball can or easily pass through the special starting area are increased as compared with the normal game state. Of the second specific control that can be obtained, a specific control execution means capable of executing at least one specific control, and a specific control execution means.
With
One game is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the derivation of the result of the special lottery.
The specific control execution means is
Even if the special result is not derived in the game, the specification is made until the result of the special lottery in the game is derived, or based on the result of the special lottery in the game being derived. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the execution of control can be started.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the special result is derived, it is controlled to the special gaming state, and when the small hit result is derived, the expected value of the amount that can give the gaming value as a prize is the special gaming. It is controlled to a small hit game state smaller than the state. Then, the first specific control that enables variable display of the special symbol based on the result of the special lottery and the acquired special symbol random number and can shorten the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the normal gaming state, and the normal Of the second specific control that can increase the frequency with which the game ball can pass through or facilitate the passage of the game ball to the special starting area as compared with the game state of the above, at least one of the specific controls has been executed so far. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the forward direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko machine. This is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a general game state transition. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The first pachinko gaming machine is an example of a normal symbol determination table. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process at the time of startup in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving shift determination processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the time saving counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 2nd modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving shift determination processing in the 3rd modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 3rd modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 4th modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 5th modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 6th modification of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning place detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table for a low start in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit-time look-ahead effect pattern table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern table at the time of loss in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing the process of changing the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the common hit look-ahead effect form to the big hit type look-ahead effect form in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit look-ahead effect form to the big hit type look-ahead effect form in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit look-ahead effect form to the time saving hit type look-ahead effect form in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 2nd pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 3rd pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in a 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in a 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and is (A) another example of the time chart of the specific area. It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is a 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 4010 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 4th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol in the fourth pachinko machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image is changed from a common hit look-ahead effect form to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form, and then a jackpot-type reach is performed. It is an image which shows that the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation in the 4th pachinko gaming machine has developed into the jackpot system reach. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a hold image is changed from a common hit look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then a time-saving hit system effect is performed. .. It is an image which shows that the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation in the 4th pachinko gaming machine has developed into the time saving hit system effect. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the 4th pachinko gaming machine, and is the figure which shows the mode in which the image which an egg hatches is displayed in the substantially center of a display area. This is an example of a random number determination table per ordinary symbol of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table for the fifth pachinko machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a random number determination table per ordinary symbol of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal pattern of a fifth pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a figure which shows the transition transition of the production mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. (B) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production stage notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 3 variation main notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the 1st notice production. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 2nd notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 3rd notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 4th notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect content of the notice after the icon is stopped. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the notice after the icon is stopped. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the notice after the icon is stopped. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an icon. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 1st production stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 3rd production stage. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 6th notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 6th notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 6th notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the 7th notice production. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 7th notice production. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the stage change notice production. (B) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change notice effect. (C) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section hold ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section hold ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section hold ball. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of winning the 1st start opening which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change section determination process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of the 1st special symbol change which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage count processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the sub-variation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the sub-variation pattern replacement table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. (C) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the third effect stage. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the 8th notice production. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 8th notice production. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo lamp notice effect. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the logo lamp notice effect. (C) is a figure which shows the time chart of the logo lamp notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a probability change mode. It is a flowchart which shows the drum variation effect determination process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start of the drum variation effect which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation which is currently performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the holding ball. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum variation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum variation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum variation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a big hit in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the 2nd bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the 1st bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball counter addition processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the result display processing in the bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing at the end of the 2nd bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (I) in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (II) in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (III) in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining ST number adjustment process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the display | remaining ST number update process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading effect processing of the normal drawing in the probability change mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability change mode which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. (B) is a figure which shows the pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the icon stop suggestion notice content which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect lottery process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect lottery process which concerns on the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the production block in the 6th specific super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th specific super reach content lottery processing which concerns on the 5th pachinko game machine. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect notice production for the 1st production stage. (B) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a time chart showing the effect control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time saving game state, and (A) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the first normal pattern. (B) A time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the second normal pattern. This is an example of a display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area of the display device in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is a time chart showing the effect control in the irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time saving game state, and (A) the time showing an example of the effect control performed in the first irregular pattern. The chart, (B) a time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the third irregular pattern. It is a modification of the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 136.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, a third pachinko gaming machine, a fourth pachinko gaming machine, and a fifth pachinko gaming machine are examples. It will be explained by listing in.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is in the rear direction, the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction, and the pachinko game is played. The right side when the machine is viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is clockwise. , On the contrary, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called Digipachi. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Further, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean to exclude the pachinko game machines of the 1st and 2nd kind mixers in which the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it shall mean both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" referred to in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which a symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination The result of the process (hereinafter, also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an aspect is included in the above variation display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, since the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not fixed at this point, the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine in this specification, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special). The case of (design) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like are provided. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without a reference symbol) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

The outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5, which will be described later, via the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

Further, a launching device 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and a speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap between them. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, below the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for producing a light-emitting effect or performing a light-emitting effect in various variations, but is not limited to the LED as long as such a light-emitting effect can be performed, for example, a liquid crystal display, a lamp, or the like. May be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitized version of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is a lower front portion of the base door 3 and is arranged below the glass door 4. As described above, the plate unit 5 is configured to be rotated with respect to the base door 3 so that the dish unit 5 can be opened and closed so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at the amusement park or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. The lower plate 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without a reference symbol) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower plate 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front of the base door 3 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrally formed in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launching device 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via the launch rail (not shown) for the game. It is launched into region 105 (see FIG. 4 below). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launch rail is not required, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an identification symbol for effect (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. An effect image, an effect image during a big hit game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. The board 92, the payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see the figure below). A power supply board or the like on which (see 6) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, the payout / launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs are provided on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 6), which will be described later, are separate substrates. Therefore, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. Center accessory 115, first starting port 120, general winning opening 122, passing gate unit 125, special electric accessory unit 130, second starting ports 140A, 140B, and ordinary electric combination It includes an object unit 145, a small hit unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference symbol). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, of the gaming areas 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the launching handle 62, a striking method in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left striking", and the right side region 107 is flowed down. The method of firing a game ball is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp inlet 117 on the outer peripheral edge on the left side, which allows a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 to enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 but has not entered the chance entrance 119. The mouth 120 is designed to win (pass).

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) Random values for jackpot judgment, symbol random values of the first special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the first special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, up to 4) of various data are stored. When the start condition (also referred to as "variation start condition" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random value for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first (1) The symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as the start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is referred to as holding, and the holding starting information of the first special symbol is also referred to as "holding ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the game area 105, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). .. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is configured so that the right-handed game ball can almost pass through the passing gate 126 and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) is stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate unit 125, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

Further, the passing gate 126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous operation device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126, that is, the detection of the game ball by the passing gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described later) causes the accessory continuous operating device to operate. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as a start passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, a random value for hit determination of the ordinary symbol). Etc.) is called the start information of the ordinary symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is referred to as holding, and the holding starting information of the normal symbol is also referred to as "holding ball of the normal symbol".

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a jackpot jackpot 131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 below) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the jackpot jackpot 131. , It is a unit body that integrates the special electric accessory 133. The special electric accessory unit 130 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 105 and below the passing gate unit 125.

The jackpot jack 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot jackpot 131, a jackpot jackpot that allows a left-handed game ball to win may be placed, or a center accessory 115. A big hit opening for a big hit may be arranged at the upper part of the game ball.

Further, the big hit opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball has been won in the jackpot jackpot 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the big winning opening 131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) through the big hit opening 131, and a game ball is won (passed) through the big hit opening 131. ) Is impossible or difficult to close, and the state can be transitioned to. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 131 for big hits is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot prize opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a gaming state.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 140A and the second starting port 140B are arranged in the game area 105 as the second starting port, and both of these second starting ports 140A and 140B are right-handed. A game ball can be won (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 140A and / and the second starting port 140B.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described later). Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6 described later). Regardless of which of the second starting ports 140A and 140B the game ball wins, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected by the second starting port switches 141A and 141B (see FIG. 6 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The generated start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 107a and 107b on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit right but does not win the big hit opening 131. Is formed. The game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed further toward the downstream side without winning a prize in the jackpot jack 131 is placed in the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b by, for example, the branch nail 108 shown in FIG. It is sorted.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win a prize. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a win the second starting port 140A, for example, it is a configuration in which winning the second starting port 140A can hardly be expected. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 107a may be configured to win a prize with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 107a but has not won the second starting port 140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 178.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the lower flow path 107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric shutter 147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 147. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the shutter 147 for general electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 140B or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 140B. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member composed of, for example, a pair of blade members, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. Further, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 150 has a small hit large winning opening 151 and a small hit large winning opening count switch 152 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is a unit body in which a small hit shutter 153 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction and a small hit solenoid 154 capable of operating the small hit shutter 153 are integrated.

By advancing and retreating the small hit shutter 153 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be won (passed) into the small hit large winning opening 151 or is easily opened, and the game to the small hit large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a ball.

If a game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described later). When a game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the small hit large winning opening 151 is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 150 is a downward flow path 107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 145. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146, even if the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 107b is small. Since the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side is won before reaching the winning large winning opening 151, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning large winning opening 151.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 131 and the small hit big winning opening 151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening are open. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out port 178 is any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 140A, 140B, big hit opening opening 131, general winning opening 122, etc.) fired toward the game area 105. This is for discharging the game balls that did not win the prize to the outside of the machine. The out port 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 and the small hit unit 150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a production accessory group 58 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later). The effect group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect accessory group 58 function as the effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 and is arranged outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display. A unit 165 and a second special symbol hold display unit 166 are provided.

(Normal symbol display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. NS. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 146 is operated, the shutter 147 for general electric power is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is reached. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball.

(Holding display for ordinary symbols)
When the variable display of the normal symbol is held, the hold display unit 162 for the normal symbol displays the number of the holdable variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol"). Therefore, it is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) related to the normal symbol when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected is detected. It refers to the state from the extraction until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. The start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 1, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 2, both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special symbol display)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group 163a composed of eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a composed of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (for example, eight LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is specific. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, the second special symbol display LED group 164a repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. The variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (for example, eight LEDs) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is specific. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Hold display for special symbols)
When the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). The first special symbol hold display unit 165 and the second special symbol hold display unit 166 are provided.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, and the hold display LEDs 165a, 165b for the first special symbol. To be equipped. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the first special symbol) related to the first special symbol when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected. Various disturbances such as a random value for jackpot determination, a symbol random value for the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random value for effect selection used when determining a variation pattern of the first special symbol. It refers to the state from the extraction of (numerical value, etc.) to the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol. The starting conditions for the first special symbol will be described later.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 1, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol hold display unit 166 displays the number of holds of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a, 166b. To be equipped. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the second) related to the second special symbol when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected. Random value for jackpot judgment of special symbol, symbol random value for second special symbol, random value for reach judgment of second special symbol, random value for effect selection used when determining fluctuation pattern of second special symbol, etc. It refers to the state from the extraction of various random values, etc.) to the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol. The starting conditions for the second special symbol will be described later.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the second special symbol is 1, the hold display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the second special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 166a for the second special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4, both of the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol indicating the number of hold of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, a process executed when the power is turned on, a process related to a game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be able to communicate with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, ordinary symbol hold display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, and first special symbol hold display unit 165. , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, the small hit solenoid 154, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Further, in the error notification monitor 172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting changing process is in progress and a setting confirmation process are being performed. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a first start port switch 121, a second start port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, a big hit big prize opening count switch 132, a general winning opening switch 123, and a small hit big prize. The mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I / O port 205.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used when data is transmitted to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 that is operated when changing or confirming the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 400 and the power supply circuit 450. The configuration may be as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 58 for production). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which an operation pattern is stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls and game balls. A launching device 6 capable of enabling the ball, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving the ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which the cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko machine. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a general game state transition. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, when a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like and the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. .. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game in which it is determined whether or not the starting port 140B) is opened. In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as a "game", but the "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game for production using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the “game”.

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and then controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the game is regarded as one special symbol game until the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. do.

When the stop display mode indicating the big hit in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and there is a possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot 131. Relatively enhanced.

Further, when the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 in the normal symbol game, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game, and a new game different from these may be able to be executed.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the special symbol game, the special symbol start winning process performed mainly when the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B are won (passed), and the special symbol starting winning process and This includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the special symbol start condition.

When a game ball is won in the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B, a special symbol start winning prize process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, jackpot determination random value, symbol random value, reach determination) from various counters for the special symbol (for example, a jackpot determination counter, a symbol determination counter, etc.) Random values for, and various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted (acquired), respectively. Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed by referring to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter of the special symbol. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game proceeds in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time saving game state or the high probability non-time saving game state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, for example, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32, etc. The effect control process of is performed. The effect control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state that is not a big hit is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the jackpot type, the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a small hit, a small hit game control process is performed. Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to the time saving game state.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is won in the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B (for example, the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection Various data such as various random values such as random values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the first special symbol and the starting information of the second special symbol can hold up to a total of eight special symbol starting information. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be held more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be held more than the start information of the first special symbol. It may be.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, when the game ball is won (passed) to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the extracted start information, a look-ahead determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 63 described later) is performed to determine a win (whether or not a “big hit” is won) or a fluctuation pattern prior to the hit determination process of a special symbol, and this look-ahead is performed. A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result of the determination may be provided. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B is reserved, or may be performed after the start information is reserved.

[1-3-2. Ordinary design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted (acquired) from the hit determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit judgment random value of the normal symbol extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, and whether or not to set it as "normal symbol hit" is normal. The hit determination process of the symbol is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, performs the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute the effect control process. The effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes the normal symbol hit game control process. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) is activated, and the game is played to the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, for example, the second starting port 140B (see FIG. 4)). The ball can be won (passed) or easily opened. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol hit game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special figure shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 The control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening the starting port 140B) is performed corresponds to this. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Electric support control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol", the variable display time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It is a control to make. The time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is the winning probability of "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the ordinary symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, improving the time saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball in a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)). That is, when the electric support control is executed, the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, or / and the ordinary electric accessory is increased as compared with the case where the electric support control is not executed. The winning of prizes is facilitated by 146 (increasing the number of opening times, extending the opening time, shortening the waiting time, etc.).

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

The variable display of the normal symbol is started in the order in which it is held, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information held first among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the symbol random value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random value of the second special symbol, the hit determination random value of the normal symbol, etc.) is within a predetermined range by executing the program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method that generates a random number value within the width) may be used, or a hard random number method that extracts a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-big hit game state and a big hit game state. In the non-big hit game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the big hit is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game shifts from the non-big hit game state to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the big hit game state. The description of the small hit game state will be omitted.

The non-big hit game state includes a low probability state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be roughly divided.

The high-accuracy gaming state includes a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed (high-accuracy low-base state) and a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed (high-accuracy high-base).

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed (low probability low base) and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (low probability high base).

Further, the time-saving game state includes an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that can be shifted after the end of a specific jackpot game state, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or the game is shifted to the jackpot game state, the A time-saving game state is changed. finish. When the A time saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state.

The B time saving game state is a special symbol starting from, for example, when the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (that is, the game state in which the probability change flag is off) is started. When the variable display number (for example, the ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), it is a time-saving game state that can be shifted, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or the game is shifted to the jackpot game state. , B time saving game state ends. When the B time reduction game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving game state is defined as a time-saving game state in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the low-probability state is "time-saving hit" and can be shifted when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived. When the number of special symbol games is executed or the game is shifted to the jackpot game state, the C time reduction game state ends. When the C time reduction game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the normal game state in principle.

It should be noted that the "in principle" of shifting to the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving game state is defined as the case where the time-saving game states overlap, for example, when the "time-saving hit" is won in the B time-saving game state. , The case where a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, etc. is taken into consideration. However, the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the transition condition to the time-saving game state is satisfied in the time-saving game state, or the transition condition to the plurality of time-saving game states is satisfied at the same time. This is referred to as "overlapping" time-saving game states. Then, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, operating any of the duplicated time-saving game states is referred to as "overlapping execution".

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described.

When controlled to a normal game state, a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), and a high-accuracy game state (high-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) Even if there is, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to shift to any of the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the high-accuracy game state (high-accuracy time-short-game state, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state), depending on the game specifications. .. However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state does not shift to the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, the short-time game state or the normal game state does not shift to the high-probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed.

When controlled to the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time saving gaming state unless the jackpot gaming state is passed. However, since the game shifts to the normal gaming state when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time saving game state, it is possible to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the game is controlled in the B time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state, the game shifts to the normal game state when the specified number of special symbol games are executed. Therefore, the B time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state or C time reduction It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the number of time reductions that can be executed in the A time-saving game state is set to be less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state. There is no transition to the time-saving game state. Further, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the B time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the A time-shortening game state is "time-saving hit", the transition condition to the C time-shortening game state is satisfied, so that the A time-shortening game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. .. However, there is no transition from the C time saving game state to the A time saving game state.

When controlled to the B time-shortening game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time-shortening hit", the transition condition to the C time-shortening game state is satisfied. Can overlap. Further, even when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-shortening game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time-shortening hit", the transition condition to the C time-shortening game state is satisfied. Can overlap.

The details of the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probability variation control nor time reduction control is executed, a high probability time reduction game state in which both probability variation control and time reduction control are executed, and time reduction control in which probability variation control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which is not executed, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which probability variation control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is in any of these gaming states. It is possible to advance the game in. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the game does not proceed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good. A plurality of time-saving game states are prepared for the time-saving game state, and the plurality of time-saving game states will be described later.

In the present embodiment, of the plurality of game modes (for example, launch modes), the game mode that is not most disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) (hereinafter referred to as "regular game mode") is in the normal game state. Left-handed is a normal game mode, and right-handed is a normal game mode in a high-accuracy time-shortened game state, a high-accuracy non-time-shortened game state, and a low-accuracy time-shortened game state. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying a normal game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

[1-4-1. Big hit probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are used by using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6) and the like. It can be set to any one of the set values. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-short game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1. It is 1/304, about 1/299 with setting 5, and about 1/294 with setting 6. Further, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag for which the probability change control is executed is on (for example, the high probability time saving game state and the high probability non-time saving game state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in setting 1, and setting 2 Is about 1/76, setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

Note that the time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values, unlike the big hit probability. For example, the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed is 1/160, and the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed is 1/140. There is. The time saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed and the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, but they may be the same.

However, even if the time reduction hit probability is a common probability for all the set values, the time reduction continuation rate (for example, the number of time reductions set) may be different depending on the set value. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times is set as the number of time reductions, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. You may do it.

Further, the small hit probability is a common probability for all the set values when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, but the small hit is included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. Not done. However, as a mode in which the small hit is not included in the lottery target, in addition to the mode in which the judgment itself as to whether or not the small hit is won is performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit is won even though the small hit probability is 0. It may be an embodiment.

As described above, the time saving hit probability and the small hit probability are common to all the set values, but the probability is not limited to this and may be different depending on the set value.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probabilities common to the setting 1 and the setting 2 and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different depending on a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 of FIG. 29 described later), that is, the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B are won by the game ball. It is a table referred to when determining "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the random value for big hit determination acquired at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In the present specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit judgment value data, of the large hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. NS.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 409, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the winning judgment value data is determined as the "time saving hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 41 to 614, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and wins. The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 615 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 409, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 41 to 1260, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1261 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is referred to as "time saving hit". Judgment is made, and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "small hit". The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "small hit". The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 22118 to 22966, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 22996 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the jackpot determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 409 in the case of the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is set from 0. It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving hit judgment value data) excluding the jackpot judgment value data and the loss judgment value data. Further, from the predetermined value, the tail end (for example, 615 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced) ( It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. You may. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is overlapped, so that if the "time saving hit" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is substantially changed. It will be extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit" regardless of whether the probability variation flag is on or off. .. However, when the probability change flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), the main CPU 201 controls the time saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start ports 140A and 140B and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. It is a table referred to when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S105 of FIG. 29, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a command displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol. Select "z7" as the command and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command. Select "z10" as the symbol specification command, and select "zA8" as the symbol specification command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is activated to allow or easily open the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4). The prize ball can be paid out by executing the control to be in the state.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted big hit judgment random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol determination table (FIG. 10). 11) is referred to, and a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-step lottery may be performed based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol to determine the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12, the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, a region 0 to 7. It consists of a byte control signal. Each region of 0 to 7 of the first special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. Similarly, each region 0 to 7 of the second special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (display mode per time saving) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. Will be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the above is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 includes the LED corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 1 and the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 includes the LED corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 2 and the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the second special symbol. The second special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the region 1 of the above and the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 has the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 0 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 2 and the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the LED display mode (small hit display mode) derived to the second special symbol display unit 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 1 of the second special symbol and the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the above is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the LED display mode (big hit display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the region 4 of the above and the LED corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and an area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 4 and the LED corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and an area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 5 and the LED corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 has an LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 4 and the LED corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol and the LED corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined that the unit 163 is stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 includes the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 4 and the LED corresponding to the region 5 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z12", the main CPU 201 has the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 4 and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z13", the main CPU 201 has the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the LED display mode (loss display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and other LEDs. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED of the above is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z14", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the other LEDs. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stop mode of the special symbol based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the control signal corresponding to the determined mode is transmitted to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. It outputs to each of the constituent LEDs and controls the stop mode of the special symbol led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12, the display mode of the LED led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LED led out to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. However, it is preferable that the control signal is transmitted separately by the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the winning game state and / and the mode of the subsequent gaming state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol (that is, described later). (When executing the hit type determination process in S106 of FIG. 29). The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 13 shows the mode of the big hit game state or the mode of the small hit game state. Further, the mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-shortening hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortening game state without being controlled by the hit-game state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To determine. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the time reduction hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then, after that, Without controlling the jackpot game state, the time reduction flag is set on and the determined number of time reductions is set, so that the C time reduction game state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so that the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. It is supposed to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a lottery of "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In some cases, the display mode of the time reduction hit indicating that the "time reduction hit" has been won is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the C time reduction game state is not controlled. Further, the main CPU 201 draws a "time saving hit" even if the probability change flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to a special symbol. It may be derived to the display units 163 and 164. Further, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the jackpot judgment random value, that is, the hit judgment processing may be performed so that the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result. ..

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, the game is configured so as not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-shortening hit", the state shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is opened as one mode of the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned small hit display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, and then determines a large prize for the small hit. By setting the number of times the mouth 151 is opened, it becomes possible to control the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 201 is controlled to the small hit game state without changing either the probability change flag or the time saving flag after the end of the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the flag.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state, and the probability change flag and the time reduction as the mode of the subsequent game state. It is decided to set only the probability variation flag among the flags to on, and to set the probability variation number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then after the jackpot gaming state ends, to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. Will be.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as a mode of the jackpot game state. To decide. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, in each case, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10000 times. .. In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state with high accuracy and short game time.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state, respectively. Further, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on. Further, the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state in a short time. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. The mode of time saving control in the highly accurate time saving game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “time saving performance”) is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving game state. ..

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 201 is in the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the hit game state and the subsequent mode of the hit game state and the subsequent mode. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show the hit type determination table in FIG. 13 originally. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 13.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 10, and is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B. The winning judgment value data is determined based on the random value for jackpot determination (winning determination is performed), and the winning (“short-time hit”, “small hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 11, and the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B and the above-mentioned special symbol random value. The selected symbol command is determined based on the winning determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, the type of time saving hit, the type of big hit) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning judgment and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z6”) or 300. This is the number of times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. It is 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state. In this way, by making the A time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to a disadvantage compared to the case where the "big hit" is won but the "big hit" is not won (when the "short-time hit" is won). It becomes.

Instead of making the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction game state. May be set to be higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. In FIG. 14, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are “z6” and “z13”). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"). In the case of "z2"). In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of the "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving game state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control.

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal game state).

The probability variation number and the time reduction number "10000" shown in FIG. 13 mean that the probability variation control can be continuously executed after the jackpot game state ends until it is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot).

[1-4-6. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of the special symbol for the low start of the special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 16 is an example of a variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start of the special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 15 and 16 are shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and the second special when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIGS. 15 and 16 is a table that is referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S107 of FIG. 29, which will be described later.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 15, in the main CPU 201, the effect selection random value acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 is a specific random value. If so, set the look-ahead flag. The sub CPU 301 that has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is a normal gaming mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. Will be decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start of FIG. 16, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is larger than that in the case of determination. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long variation A to C). The display is done. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, and for example, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and In the low-accuracy time-short game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of the variable display times of the special symbol per unit time are provided. The tables referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the above may be different.

Further, in the time saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 15 and the “Remarks” column of FIG. 16, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be the time saving hit (big hit). It is a reach production that shows that there is no possibility. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a short hit or a big hit.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared as the time-saving game state. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z6" or "z13". Is. That is, the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state is to win a big hit (a big hit whose selected symbol command is "z6" or "z13"). However, even if the condition for shifting to the A time-saving game state is satisfied, the state does not always shift to the A time-saving game state, but the condition for hindering the transition to the A time-saving game state is satisfied (for example, when the backup is cleared). Etc.), do not shift to the A time saving game state.

Further, the end condition of the A time saving game state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and when the selected symbol command is used. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of time reductions") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied.

In the B time saving game state, the ceiling counter is updated (added by 1) starting from, for example, when the big hit game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state is started, and the ceiling counter is set. It is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling value is reached. That is, the condition for shifting to the B time reduction game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time saving game state may be made when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is completed. Alternatively, it may be when the variable display of the next special symbol of the final fluctuation of the ceiling is started. That is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state may be between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling change is "miss", the display mode of the loss is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the game shifts to the B time saving game state. Become. Even if the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the B time-saving game state is satisfied instead of always shifting to the B time-saving game state (for example, special in the final ceiling fluctuation). When the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit, etc.), the state is not shifted to the A time saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability change flag is on, and is always counted when the probability change flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game is controlled to the B time reduction game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit". When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the B time reduction game is performed when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. The state may be started, or the B time reduction game state may be started after the end of the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state without being controlled to the B time reduction game state.

The ceiling counter has a backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). When a switch other than the above (for example, setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when the high probability of hitting a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine that can change the probability of hitting a normal symbol, etc. It is reset when the condition of is satisfied. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, if the probability change flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be set in advance as a pachinko gaming machine-specific one instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 is at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol unless the probability change flag is turned on after the end of the jackpot game state. Update the ceiling counter (+1). Also, if the probability change flag is on after the end of the jackpot game state, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if the special symbol is variablely displayed, but for example, if it is a specification for ST machine or probability change fall lottery, the probability change flag Updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of special symbols after is turned off.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications in which a probabilistic fall lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect suggesting that the probabilistic fall lottery has been won or a highly probable game. It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting a transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start time of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time reduction game state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, which is interesting. It is possible to provide a certain game quality. When it is difficult to grasp the transition timing to the B time reduction game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time reduction game state or a countdown effect of Gase is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , It will be possible to further enhance the interest.

Further, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of the special symbol after the clear process in the work area in the RAM 203. Update the ceiling counter (+1) at the hour or end.

Further, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, a setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 performs the first variable display of the special symbol after the operation of the other switch. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of.

Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state is the case where the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "big hit"). This is the case where the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for (referred to as "B time reduction specified number of times") is executed, and the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. "When the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions is executed", which is one of the end conditions of the B time reduction game state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions (hereinafter, "B time reduction final variation"). It may be when (referred to as) is started, or when the B time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time reduction game state may be from the start of the B time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the B time reduction final variation.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time-saving hit”. That is, the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is that the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is the time saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z8" or "z9") is won, and the display mode of the time saving hit is a special symbol. It is derived (confirmed display) to the display units 163 and 164. Even if the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the state does not always shift to the C time saving game state, but the condition for hindering the transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied (for example, the B time saving game state). If the specification is such that the C time-saving game state is not executed at the same time (details will be described later) and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), the C time-saving game Do not move to the state. If the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied but the condition for hindering the transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 hits the time saving even though the transition to the C time saving game state is not satisfied. Control is executed to derive the display mode of the above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

Further, the end condition of the C time saving game state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and when the selected symbol command is used. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. As for the C time reduction specified number of times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, the variable display of the special symbol of the time reduction number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction final variation") starts. It may be when the C time reduction is completed, or when the C time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time reduction game state may be from the start of the C time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the C time reduction final variation.

The time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. Further, of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the two time-saving game states is the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving game states and the other one time-saving game state It may be different from the time saving performance. Further, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

Further, in addition to the above, for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times as the end condition of the A time reduction game state, the end condition of the B time reduction game state, and the end condition of the C time reduction game state. Even if it is included that the number of small hits has reached the specified number of times, that the ordinary electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, and that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146. good.

[1-4-8. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The hit judgment table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit judgment process of the normal symbol, that is, the type of time saving and the hit of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when determining "per ordinary symbol" or "loss" by lottery based on the random value for determination (that is, when executing the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 described later).

As described above, the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol is a random value used in the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a hit determination random value of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol hit" or "miss" based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value. In the hit judgment table of the normal symbol, the range (width) of the random value for hit judgment of the normal symbol determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding judgment value data of the normal symbol are displayed in the hit judgment table of the normal symbol. The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state), when the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 is set to " It is determined as "normal symbol hit", and the winning judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". Further, in the non-time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". Determined as "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the A time saving game state, when the hit determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines “loss” and determines the determination value data as “loss determination value data”.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". Determined as "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". Determined as "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

As described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 17). Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest. Therefore, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the non-time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is "big hit", and after the end of the big hit gaming state based on this "big hit", the A time saving game state When controlled to (for example, the selected symbol commands "z6" and "z13"), the winning probability of the normal symbol is changed to a higher probability.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 17) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 17) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

The winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to make the ratio of the types of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, different for each state without changing the winning probability per ordinary symbol.

[1-4-9. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The ordinary symbol determination table is based on the type of time reduction, the above-mentioned winning determination value data, and the symbol random value of the ordinary symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol is selected. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a normal symbol hit symbol that is determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random value of the ordinary symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. NS.

For example, in the non-time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 does not matter whether the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 0 to 99. , Normal symbol hit selection Select "fz0" as the symbol command.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz2" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz4" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz5" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, and the symbol of the normal symbol is disturbed. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz7" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz8" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, and the symbol of the normal symbol is disturbed. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first determines the winning determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value by referring to the hit determination table of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 17). After that, the so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol by referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 18). Not limited to. For example, based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value and the normal symbol symbol random value, a so-called one-step lottery is performed, such as determining the winning of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of hitting the normal symbol. You may.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per ordinary symbol]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets the open pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 in FIG. 54, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 1000 msec and no wait time. It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, it is determined to be an opening pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 2000 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 2500 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 3000 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is decided that 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is not. Among the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140B when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination processing of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, and the B time saving. Among the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

Further, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the hit determination of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state. The degree of advantage is the same as that of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "per ordinary symbol", but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 20 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol executes the variation pattern determination process of the ordinary symbol which is executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 of FIG. 54 described later when determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. When) is referred to. The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and is normal based on the game state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the variation pattern of the symbol. The random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the non-time saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is the longest among the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 90 to 99. In the case of any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. NS.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. NS.

As described above, the variable display time of the normal symbol per one variable display is A among the variable display times of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. The expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to the time-saving game state]
[1-5-1. Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction]
In the above description, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, not limited to this, the number of time reductions set when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the hit determination processing of the special symbol is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include "time saving hit". In this case, although the main CPU derives the display mode of the time saving hit to the special symbol display unit, it does not execute the control to shift to the time saving gaming state, but continuously controls to the high probability gaming state. By the way, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, which are so-called ST machines, that turn the probability change flag from on to off when the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the final game as the high probability gaming state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is later, the main CPU may control the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Overlapping time-saving game states]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state overlap. When the time-saving game states are duplicated in this way, the time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (that is, the overlap of the time-saving game states is ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. It is stipulated.

When the time-saving game states overlap, the case where the time-saving game states are overlapped and the case where the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. When executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
When the time-saving game states are overlapped and the time-saving game states are executed repeatedly, the time-saving game is won in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Occasionally, there are cases where the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and there are cases where the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. When executing the C time saving game state by superimposing the C time saving game state on the one time saving game state]
When the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Derivation of display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts the one having a large number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied while maintaining the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state as the time-saving number of times.

For example, if the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state is larger than the time reduction number that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 is A time reduction. While maintaining the time saving performance of the game state, unless a "big hit" is derived, the time saving game state is controlled until the remaining time saving number of times in the A time saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 200 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, although the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the time reduction number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. 200 times. Therefore, even if the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, the appearance of the time saving number and the time saving performance is still apparent. , It is the same as the case where the A time saving game state is continued without winning the "time saving hit".

On the other hand, for example, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is less than the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 is A. While maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state, unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving game state is controlled until the time saving number of times set based on the "time saving hit" is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 20, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, the number of time reductions from this point is 50 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 30 times of the difference between the two while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. When executing the B time saving game state by superimposing the C time saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit" or "loss" in the final ceiling variation will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining time saving number in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. Unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the B time reduction specified number of times is 200 times, the C time reduction game state While maintaining the time saving performance, the number of time saving times from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the time saving number and the time saving performance is the same as in the case where the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value and the C time saving game state is continued. Is.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction specified number of times is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the C time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. However, unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state until the specified number of times of time-saving B is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time reductions that can be executed in the B time reduction game state is 300 times. , C The number of time reductions from this point is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state, the special symbol is 280 times the difference between the two. The variable display of is further executed.

When the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss", the loss display mode is derived. .. When the small hit display mode is derived, it is controlled to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final change, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final change, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are The case where it is satisfied will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts the control of the B time saving game state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is led out to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different control can be executed depending on the case where the control of the B time saving game state is started after being derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

First, when the control of the B time saving game state is started before the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is led out to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is already controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving number of the B time saving specified number and the time saving number of the C time saving game state is digested. It is controlled to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time saving game state is started after the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is not yet controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the C time saving game state, and unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving number of the B time saving specified number and the time saving number of the C time saving game state is digested. It is controlled to the time-saving game state.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state. It is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled.

[1-5-3. When the time saving game state is not executed repeatedly]
If the time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly even though the time-saving game states are duplicated, the time-saving game state is one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Even if it is won, it is ignored and the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not executed repeatedly. There is.

[1-5-3-1. When the C time saving game state is not executed by overlapping the one time saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, as described above, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. , Derivation of the display mode per time reduction. However, unless the main CPU 201 has a variable display of the last special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving final variation"), the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving game state based on "time-saving hit", and one It is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining time-saving number of times in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the time-saving final fluctuation) is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the time reduction final fluctuation in the time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 changes the time reduction game state to one before the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different controls can be executed depending on whether the time saving game state ends when the time saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, when one time-saving game state ends before the time-saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the time-saving hit display mode and then states the C time-saving game state. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving game state ends when the time-saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving hit display mode and the end of one time-saving game state are determined. When the interrupt processing is performed within the same interrupt processing, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the C time saving game state according to the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode per time saving is performed before the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time saving hit before the ending process of one time saving game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode of the time saving hit is performed after the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance in the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. That is, at the time when the display mode of the time saving hit is derived, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state if the end processing of the one time saving game state is not processed. If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. When the B time saving game state is not executed by overlapping the C time saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “short hit”, “small hit” or “miss” in the final ceiling variation will be described.

In the C time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "loss", the main CPU 201 consumes the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state. Until it is played, it is controlled to the C time saving game state.

However, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 0 in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the B time reduction game state according to the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed before the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state and controls the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed after the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state without controlling the B time reduction game state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving game state, if the end processing of the C time saving game state is not processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state, and C time saving. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, the B time reduction game state is controlled. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time reduction game state after the start processing of the B time reduction game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the B time reduction game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and starts controlling the big hit game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 63.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main process (main control main process) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. 21 to 24 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at the High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 on / off state and the setting key 174 on / off state are saved. That is, the on / off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. In this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start waiting on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation on the sub-control circuit 300 side, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (when the determination in S14 is YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. The checksum value of the area is collated (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, normal (when the determination in S17 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (when the determination in S17 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, a NO determination is made, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176. If either one is off, a YES judgment is made.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (when the determination in S18 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). In this process, data for error display is set in the output port of the I / O port 205 where the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 enters an endless loop after executing the process of S20.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the start control flag stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a process of clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) is performed. Note that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power failure process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial value random number. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) is updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to the process of S26 and performs the process after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S26 to S35) is performed before execution of various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later. Is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission / reception process. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, a process related to a normal symbol game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process. In this process, display data to be output to each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is set. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup state flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

[1-6-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 when executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is held for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect. The main special symbol will be described in the sub control process described later.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

When it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S72 is NO), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 processes. To S73. For example, NO is determined in S72 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

When it is determined in S75 that the timing of the variable display start is not the first special symbol (when the determination in S75 is NO), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 processes. To S76. For example, NO is determined in S75 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S75 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

When it is determined in S78 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S78), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that the second special symbol is the timing to start the variable display (when the determination in S78 is YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

When it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 21 to 21). (See FIG. 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is the timing to start the variable display (when the determination in S81 is YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S82) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When no processing is executed and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, the special symbol management processing described later is performed in the order of priority. Is being executed.

[1-6-5. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S76 or S76 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S82, the first special symbol is processed.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 28 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S93 based on the control state number read in the processing of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S93 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S94 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S95 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S96 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S98 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

After completing the processes of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). The main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 when the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 when it is called in S76, and is called in S79. If so, the process is returned to S80, and if it is called in S82, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S93 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S93 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 29, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

When it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S101 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S101 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is a YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (S102 is a NO determination). If), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S102 is NO), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S102 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the small hit, the big hit, and the loss. Further, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a small hit. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, set the big hit flag to on. After executing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S105. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the start of the C time saving game state, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit game state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit game state.

In the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that it is not a big hit by this process, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed. When it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in this process, a process for determining whether or not the hit is a time saving hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S104) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is loss. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, small hit, or big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of hits, but there may be one type of big hit and one type of time saving hit. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. good. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S104) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value or / and the effect selection random value, etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined accordingly. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 15 (A)). In a gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which right-handed hitting is determined as a normal gaming mode, a variation pattern table of special symbols for high start (for example, (See FIG. 15B)), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S107) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15). After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 28). S94) will be performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a parameter update process related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and prohibits interrupts from the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S111) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S112)). It is preferable to do it within the section.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. 30 and 31 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S94 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S94 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the person to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol of the person not to be processed is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S122.

When it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S123 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S123 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 28) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 of FIG. 29) is a small hit.

In S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is not a small hit (when S127 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

On the other hand, in S127, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 29) is determined to be a small hit (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small hit game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 of FIG. 29) is a big hit.

In S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is not a big hit (when S129 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in S129, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 29) is determined to be a big hit (when the determination in S129 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in variable display (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is in the variable display (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs the transmission reservation process of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. NS. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 29). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in the variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

When it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 28). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S142, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S142 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S143. On the other hand, in S142, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S142 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S143, when it is determined that the special symbol that is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss (when S143 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in S143, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating the small hit (when the determination in S143 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal plate 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After performing the processing of S145, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S146. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal plate 184 will be described later.

Further, in the jackpot game control process of S145, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 is subjected to, for example, a process (S147) of setting an upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening for opening (for example, the large winning opening 131 for big hits or the large winning opening 151 for small hits) is opened (S147), and the external terminal plate 184. Big hit signal set processing (S148), special symbol control state number set to "3" (S149), game state specification parameter setting processing (S150), and big hit start display command transmission reservation processing (S151). ) Etc. are performed. By performing the process (S149) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 28). (See S96) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 32 and 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving management process (S161). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S164) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S164, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing and the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of the loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S161 during the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S171). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S171, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing (S172). Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S171 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 35) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time reduction counter update process (S181). The details of the time reduction counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process (S182). Details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the special management process (see FIG. 51).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a process in which a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner when a plurality of time saving game states are overlapped.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191). In this process, YES is determined when both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO is determined if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to on when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. The probability change flag is set to on when shifting to the high probability game state.

The time reduction counter indicates the number of time reductions executed in each of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state.

When the transition condition to the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state or / and the C time reduction game state is satisfied, the time reduction counter for the time reduction game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time reduction counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter becomes 0, but this is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which the time reduction counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter is set.

In S191, when it is determined that both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S191), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and performs the process. Return to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is determined to be larger than 0 in S191 (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S192). After executing the process of S192, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S193 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S194.

The time saving mode is a flag set when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. In this embodiment, when the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and the C time saving game state is executed in combination with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 3" is set. Further, when the B time saving game state is executed in combination with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 2" is set.

In S193, when the time saving mode = 3 (when the determination in S193 is NO), that is, when the C time saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S195, when the time saving mode = 2 (when the determination in S195 is NO), that is, when the B time saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process, and the process is changed to the counter update process. Return to (see FIG. 36).

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 36).

Although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S194 or the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S196, the main CPU 201 has a time reduction. Set the mode to off (= 0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, not only the two time-saving gaming states may be overlapped, but also three or more time-saving gaming states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, since the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time-saving game states overlap is the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time saving game states overlap, and the case where three or more C time saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S201). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variation flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is predetermined as a value peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for shifting to the B time reduction gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, the backup clear process is performed, the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, or the like. The processing may be performed.

In S201, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (when S201 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and performs the counter update process (counter update process). (See FIG. 36). When the ceiling counter update process is completed, the counter update process is also completed, so that the main CPU 201 returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 35).

In S201, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process, and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 36) and the time saving management process (see FIG. 35).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S172 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 35) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition determination process (S211). The details of this time saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. The main CPU 201 executes the process of S211 and then shifts the process to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition process (S212). The details of this time saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is smaller than 1.

In S213, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S213), that is, when the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S215.

On the other hand, in S213, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S213), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs the transmission reservation process (S216) of the time saving transition command. The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S216, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 35). When the counter determination process is completed, the time saving management process is also completed, so that the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34).

[1-6-15. Time saving transition judgment processing]
Next, the time saving shift determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time reduction game state is performed. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S211 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 39) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is off (S221).

In S221, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S221 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process, and performs the process as a counter determination process (counter determination process). (See FIG. 39). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from shifting to the B time saving game state.

On the other hand, in S221, when it is determined that the probability change flag is off (when S221 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter has a ceiling value.

When it is determined in S222 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S222), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, in S222, when the ceiling counter is determined to be the ceiling value (YES in S222), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S223, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S224, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S226, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

[1-6-16. Time saving transition processing]
Next, the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S212 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 39) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is off (S232).

In S232, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S232 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and performs the process as a counter determination process (FIG. FIG. 39). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (S232 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S233, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (when S233 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is on (S233 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 executes the B time reduction control mode determination process as the process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 2, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S235, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

The number of time reductions set in the B time reduction counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the hit determination table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 17). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening patterns (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 are shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 18) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 19). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table (FIG. 20) of the normal symbol.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is on.

In S236, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (when S236 is NO determination), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition process and performs the process as a counter determination process. Return to (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, in S236, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is ON (S236 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the C time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 3, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

The number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 14). Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the hit determination table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 17). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening patterns (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 are shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 18) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 19). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table (FIG. 20) of the normal symbol.

In S238, the main CPU 201 performs the time saving setting process. The details of this time reduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting process]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S238 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 41) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S241).

When it is determined in S241 that the time saving flag is on (when the determination in S241 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S242.

When S241 is determined to be YES, the probability change flag is off, and for example, when the C time saving game state is executed first and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed (ceiling counter = ceiling value). Case), or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed (when the "time saving hit" is won) is equivalent. do.

Although not shown, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and is determined in S235. B Set the time reduction counter. Further, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time reduction counter determined in S237 is set.

In S241, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (S241 is determined to be NO), that is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S244.

In S242, the main CPU 201 compares the current time reduction counter (the number of time reduction remaining in the previously executed time reduction game state) with the new time reduction number (the number of time reductions determined in S235 or S237), and compares the current time reduction counter (the number of time reductions determined in S235 or S237). Determine if the time reduction counter is less than the new number of time reductions.

In S242, when it is determined that the current time saving counter is not smaller than the new time saving number (NO in S242), that is, when the current time saving counter is larger than the new time saving number, the main CPU 201 is set to the time saving. The setting process is completed, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 41).

On the other hand, in S242, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number (YES in S242), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs the time reduction counter resetting process. In this process, when the C time saving game state is executed first and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first. When the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the present state, the larger time saving number of the current time saving counter value (that is, the remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number is reset as a new time saving counter. .. However, even if the time reduction counter resetting process (S243) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction count.

In addition, when the C time saving game state is executed first and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier. That is, the time saving performance in the time saving game state that was executed earlier can be changed to the time saving performance in the new time saving game state, or the time saving game corresponding to the larger time saving number of the current time saving counter and the new time saving number of times. It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

As described above, the time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball into the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is "normal". It refers to the winning probability of "per symbol", the variable display time of a normal symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is performed when S241 is determined to be NO, that is, when the non-time saving game state is changed to the B time saving game state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. This is the process that is performed when the game is transferred to and executed (when the "time saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time reductions and the time reduction performance determined in the B time reduction control mode determination process (S235) or the C time reduction control mode determination process (S237) are set. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag on. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, when the main CPU 201 finishes the process of shifting to the B time saving game state and the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. I'm going to. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation. There may be a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to the B time reduction game state based on the end of the small hit game state. Good to do.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time reduction game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the B time reduction game is based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. It is preferable to perform the transition process to the state. This is because, if the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the game shifts to the B time reduction game state, and the other special symbol is variable during the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final variation of the ceiling. This is because when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbol cannot receive the benefit of the B time reduction game state, and the interest may be reduced. By performing the transition process to the B time saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final variation of the ceiling, the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, is changed for a long time (for example, in FIG. 15). Even in the case of the long fluctuations A to C) shown, it is possible to avoid the delay in the start of the B time saving game state.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, when the ceiling flag is on, the game shifts to the B time saving game state, and when the time saving hit flag is on, the C time saving game state is set. However, the transition is not limited to this, and it is determined that the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made by using a flag common to the case of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state. May be good.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) as the process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is shifted to the C time saving game state. The process is prioritized over the C time saving control mode determination process (S237) as the process related to the above (see S233 to S237 in FIG. 41), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S237) as a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state has priority over the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state. You may do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 38, the ceiling counter is not updated when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (S201 in FIG. 38 is NO determination), but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko gaming machine that performs a probability change fall lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed even when the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it does not shift to the B time reduction game state, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter reaches the ceiling value, it may shift to the B time reduction game state. .. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time reduction game state only when "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time reduction game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter becomes the ceiling value. Processing will be performed.

Further, the ceiling value, which is a condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, since the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), the ceiling value is 319 × 2.5 to 319. It is preferably in the range of × 3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time reduction, which is the end condition of the B time reduction game state, is a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, regarding the upper limit of the C time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time reduction game state, up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (Up to 8 times) is preferable. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), the B time reduction specified number of times and the C time saving specified number of times are both approximately 1212 (319 × 319 ×). It is preferable that the upper limit is 3.8). It is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C time reduction are the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine such as the first pachinko gaming machine, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above. , The time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for shifting to the B time reduction game state, is set to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the set value. If this is the case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set set value will be detected by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number. It is preferable to set the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modification example related to time saving management processing]
In the above-mentioned time saving management process (hereinafter referred to as “time saving management process of this embodiment”) described in the first pachinko gaming machine with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 38) is performed. It is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is prioritized over the process related to the transition to the C time saving game state. However, the time saving management process can be performed in various variations without being limited to these. An example of modification related to the time saving management process will be described below.

In the modification described below, the execution timing of the ceiling counter update process, the process at the time of transition such as the priority order between the transition to the B time reduction game state and the transition to the C time reduction game state, and the transition to the B time reduction game state A variation of whether or not the transition flag of the above and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are commonly used as a common flag will be described. The execution timing of the ceiling counter update process in the time saving management process of this embodiment described above is as follows.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: When fluctuation is stopped-Processing at transition: B time saving game state priority-Transition flag to B time saving game state and C time saving game state transition flag: Separate

Further, in the following, a typical example among various modified examples related to the time saving management process will be described, and the time saving management process will be described in the examples described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 and below. It is not limited to the modified example.

[1-6-18-1. First modification]
The first modification is as follows. Hereinafter, a process different from the time saving management process of this embodiment will be described.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation-Processing at the time of transition: B time reduction game state priority-Transition flag to B time reduction game state and C time reduction game state transition flag: Separate

In the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started), and the B time reduction control mode determination, which is the process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state, is determined. This is an example in which the process (see S235 in FIG. 41) is prioritized over the C time reduction control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state. Since the other processes in the first modification are the same as the time saving management process in this embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the first modification. In FIG. 44, the same step number as the time saving management process of this embodiment is assigned even if the processing timing is different from that of the time saving management process of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this first modification, the main CPU 201 performs the ceiling counter update process (S182), for example, the variable display time setting process (S108) of the special symbol, and the control state number of the special symbol. It is performed with the process (S109) set to 1.

The ceiling counter processing of S182 performed between S108 and S109 is the same as the ceiling counter processing described above with reference to FIG. 38, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the main CPU 201 also performs a time saving shift determination process (S211) after the ceiling counter update process (S182) is completed.

The time saving shift determination process (S211) performed after the ceiling counter update process (S182) is completed is the same as the ceiling counter process described above with reference to FIG. 40, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this first modification, the B time saving control mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state, is a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state, C time saving. The control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41) is prioritized, but the process for this is the same as in FIG. 41, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Of the time saving management processing of this embodiment, other processing other than the ceiling counter processing (S182) and the time saving transition determination processing (S211) can be executed in the special symbol game end processing (see FIG. 34). .. In this case, among the time saving transition processing (see FIG. 41), the processing related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state (for example, S235 and the accompanying S238) is shown in the special symbol variable display start processing (for example, FIG. 44). It is performed in the time saving transition determination processing (S211)), and the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state (for example, S236 and the accompanying S238) is executed in the special symbol game ending processing (FIG. 34). You may.

Further, in this first modification, the ceiling counter update process (S182) is performed between the variable display time setting process (S108) of the special symbol and the process (S109) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to 1. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be performed at any timing as long as the special symbol variable display start processing is in progress. However, as shown in FIG. 44, the ceiling counter update process (S182) may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination process (S104), or the special symbol hit determination process (S104) may be executed first. ) May be executed later.

Further, in this first modification, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied (when S222 in FIG. 46 is a YES determination) and when the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied (special symbol). In addition to the hit determination process (for example, when the result of the hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 44) is a time saving hit), the main CPU 201 is common to the case of shifting to the B time saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the C time saving gaming state. Set the time saving transition flag used in the above to on.

[1-6-18-2. Second variant]
The second modification is as follows.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation-Processing at the time of transition: C time-saving game state priority-Transition flag to B time-saving game state and transition flag of C time-saving game state: Separate

In the second modification, as in the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started). However, in this second modification, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state, is changed to the B time reduction control process, which is a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. It differs from the first modification in that it is performed with priority over the mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). Since the other processes in the second modification are the same as the time saving management process in this embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process in the second modification. In FIG. 45, the same step number as the time saving management process of this embodiment is assigned even if the processing timing is different from that of the time saving management process of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the time saving transition process of the second modification, when S232 is a YES determination, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the processes of S236 and S237 over the processes of S233 and S235. By doing so, it goes without saying that only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, and the B time reduction game state. Even if both the transition condition to the C time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied, the transition to the C time reduction game state should be prioritized over the transition to the B time reduction game state. Is possible.

[1-6-18-3. Third variant]
The third modification is as follows.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation-Processing at the time of transition: B time reduction game state priority-Transition flag to B time reduction game state and C time reduction game state transition flag: common

In the third modification, as in the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started). However, in the third modification, the time saving transition process is performed by using the flag common to the case of shifting to the B time saving game state and the case of shifting to the C time saving gaming state. different. In this third modification, the B time reduction control mode determination process (S235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state, is changed to the C time reduction control process, which is a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state. The mode determination process (see S237 in FIG. 41) is prioritized, and this point is the same as that of the first modification. Since the other processes in the third modification are the same as the time saving management process in this embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process in the third modification. Further, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process in the third modification. In addition, in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment even if the processing timing is different from that of the time saving management process of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the time saving transition determination processing of the third modification, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving transition flag to ON after performing the processing of S224 (S225). As described above, the time saving shift flag is a flag commonly used in the case of shifting to the B time saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the C time saving gaming state. Therefore, in this third modification, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving transition flag to ON even when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol (see, for example, S104 of FIG. 44) is the time saving hit.

After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

Since the processing of S224 and the processing of S226 are the same as the processing of S224 and the processing of S226 described above with reference to FIG. 40, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the time saving transition process of the third modification, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving transition flag is on (S231).

In S231, when it is determined that the time reduction transition flag is not on (when S231 is NO determination), that is, when the time reduction transition flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition processing, and the processing is counter determination processing. Return to (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S231 that the time saving shift flag is ON (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is off.

In S232, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S232 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (S232 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S233, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (when S233 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 performs processing without going through the processing of S236 shown in FIG. , S237. It is not necessary to go through the process of S236 shown in FIG. 41 when the time saving shift flag is on (S231 is a YES judgment) and the ceiling flag is not on (when S233 is a NO judgment), the C time saving transition is not necessary. This is to show that the condition is satisfied (that is, the time saving hit flag is on).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is ON (when the determination in S233 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235 as in FIG. 41.

Since the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) and the C time saving control mode determination process (S237) are the same as the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) and the C time saving control mode determination process (S237) of FIG. 41. , The description is omitted.

After executing the process of S235, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238. Similarly, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S238 even after executing the processing of S237.

Since the time reduction setting process of S238 is the same as the time reduction setting process of S238 of FIG. 41, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239.

In S239, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving transition flag. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 39).

As described above, in the third modification, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied (when S222 in FIG. 46 is a YES determination) and when the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied (special symbol). (For example, when the result of the hit determination process of FIG. 44 is a time saving hit), it is commonly used in the case of shifting to the B time saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the C time saving gaming state. The time saving transition flag is set to on. Therefore, the main CPU 201 can execute the C time saving control mode determination process (S237), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state, without executing the process of S236 shown in FIG. 41.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, in the time saving transition process of the third modification, when S232 is a YES determination, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the process of S235 over the process of S237. By doing so, it goes without saying that only the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, and the B time reduction game state. Even if both the transition condition to the C time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied, the transition to the B time reduction game state should be prioritized over the transition to the C time reduction game state. Is possible.

[1-6-18-4. Fourth variant]
The fourth modification is as follows.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation-Processing at the time of transition: C time-saving game state priority-Transition flag to B time-saving game state and transition flag of C time-saving game state: Common

In the fourth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started), and the transition to the B time reduction game state and the C time reduction game state. It is the same as the third modification in that the time saving transition processing is performed by using the flag common to the case of shifting to. However, in this fourth modification, the C time saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state, is changed to the B time saving control, which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state. It differs from the third modification in that the mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41) is prioritized. Since the other processes in the fourth modification are the same as the time saving management process in this embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process in the fourth modification. In FIG. 48, the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment is assigned the same step number even if the processing timing is different from that of the time saving management process of this embodiment. Further, in the following, the points different from those in FIG. 47 will be mainly described.

Further, since the time saving transition determination process is the same process as in FIG. 46, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the time saving transition process of the fourth modification, when it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (S232 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON. As described above, the time saving hit flag is set to on when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the time saving hit. NS.

In S236, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (when S236 is NO determination), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235.

On the other hand, in S236, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is ON (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S237.

As described above, in the time saving transition process of the fourth modification, when S232 is a YES determination, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the process of S237 over the process of S235. By doing so, it goes without saying that only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, and the B time reduction game state. Even if both the transition condition to the C time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied, the transition to the C time reduction game state should be prioritized over the transition to the B time reduction game state. Is possible.

[1-6-18-5. Fifth variant]
The fifth modification is as follows.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: When fluctuation is stopped-Processing at transition: C time saving game state priority-Transition flag to B time saving game state and transition flag of C time saving game state: Separate

The fifth modification is similar to the time saving management process of this embodiment in that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed). However, in this fifth modification, the C time saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state, is changed to the B time saving control, which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state. It differs from the time saving management process of this embodiment in that it is performed with priority over the mode determination process (see S235 of FIG. 41). Since the other processes in the fifth modification are the same as the time saving management process in this embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process in the fifth modification. In FIG. 49, the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment is assigned the same step number even if the processing timing is different from that of the time saving management process of this embodiment. Further, in the following, the points different from those in FIG. 41 will be described, and the other points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the time saving transition process of the fifth modification, when it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (S232 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON. As described above, the time saving hit flag is set to on when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the time saving hit. NS.

In S236, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (when S236 is NO determination), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

On the other hand, in S236, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is ON (S236 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S237.

As described above, in the time saving transition process of the fifth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started), and when S232 is YES, the main CPU 201 Priority is given to the processing of S236 and S237 over the processing of S233 and S235. By doing so, it goes without saying that only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, and the B time reduction game state. Even if both the transition condition to the C time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied, the transition to the C time reduction game state should be prioritized over the transition to the B time reduction game state. Is possible.

[1-6-18-6. 6th variant]
The sixth modification is as follows. Hereinafter, a process different from the time saving management process of this embodiment will be described.
-Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: When fluctuation stops-Processing at the time of transition: After confirming that "time reduction hit" is not won, the game shifts to the B time reduction game state.

The sixth modification is similar to the time saving management process of this embodiment in that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed). However, in this sixth modification, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 confirms that the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is not satisfied, and then the B time reduction game. It differs from the time saving management process of this embodiment in that the B time saving control mode determination process (see 235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the state, is executed. Hereinafter, the points different from those in FIG. 41 will be mainly described, and since the other points are the same as the time saving management process of this embodiment, the description will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process in the sixth modification. In FIG. 50, the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment is assigned the same step number even if the processing timing is different from that of the time saving management process of this embodiment. Further, the points different from those in FIG. 41 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the time saving transition process of the sixth modification, when it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (S232 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process. The process returns to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

When it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is on (when the determination in S233 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves to processing S234.

On the other hand, in S233, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (when S233 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

In S234, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is off. As described above, the time saving hit flag is set to on when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the time saving hit. NS.

In 234, when the time saving hit flag is off (S234 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is on.

When it is determined in S236 that the time reduction hit flag is not on (S236 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition processing and returns the processing to the counter determination processing (FIG. 39).

On the other hand, in S236, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is ON (S236 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S237.

As described above, in the time saving transition processing of the sixth modification, the ceiling counter update processing is executed in the special symbol variable display start processing (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), and the main CPU 201 enters the B time saving gaming state. Even if the transition condition of (S233 is a YES judgment) is satisfied (even if S233 is a YES judgment), after confirming that the transition condition to the C time saving game state is not satisfied (S234 is a YES judgment). , B The time saving control mode determination process (S235) is executed.

[1-6-18-7. 7th variant]
In addition, in the time saving counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 37, and the first modification to the sixth modification described above, when the time saving game states overlap, a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. The processing of was explained. However, when the time-saving game states overlap, it is not always necessary to execute a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner. When the plurality of time-saving game states are not executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 201 may execute the process shown in FIG. 43.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 43, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the time reduction counter update process of FIG. 53.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191). In this process, YES is determined when both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO is determined if either one is not satisfied.

In S191, when it is determined that both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S191), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and performs the process. Return to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the time reduction flag is on and the time reduction counter is greater than 0 (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time reduction counter (S192). After executing the process of S192, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

[1-7. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening preparatory process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the large winning opening opening count counter value. The jackpot opening count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening counter (the large winning opening opening counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 131 for big hits or the large winning opening 151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot 131 opened in the jackpot game state is opened, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened in the small hit game state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S254) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 28) is completed after the end of the big winning opening preparatory process. S98) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28).

Returning to S253, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big hit opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (the big winning opening 131 for the big hit, the big winning opening 151 for the small hit) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, and the big winning opening winning The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. NS. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to a maximum of 5, for example, when the small hit game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large winning opening is set to 10, for example, for both the large winning opening 131 for big hits and the large winning opening 151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S260, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S261) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (S261) (See S97 in FIG. 28) will be performed. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S263, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

[1-7-1. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined in S271 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening count switch 132 for big hits and the large winning opening count switch 152 for small hits (see FIG. 6)). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is not the maximum winning number (when S272 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 Moves the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning openings (large winning opening 131 for big hits, large winning opening 151 for small hits) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S272 is a YES determination). ), The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S259 in FIG. 51) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has not passed (when S273 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 has a large winning prize. The mouth opening control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has elapsed (when S273 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 is set to The process is transferred to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 closes the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, big winning opening 151 for small hit). After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. The process (see S96 in FIG. 28) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28).

[1-7-2. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end processing is called in S98 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end processing is called in S98 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined in S281 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S281 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S281 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time reduction flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability change counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, number of times the large winning opening is opened) are set or reset. The process of setting or resetting the value of the counter, the large winning opening winning counter, the ceiling counter, etc. is performed. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S282). When the probability variation flag is set to on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to on. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high probability game state in which the probability change flag is on. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 34 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 54 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S292). After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display start processing of the normal symbol. The process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 is a normal electric accessory when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the variation pattern determination process of the normal symbol, and the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit. The opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, waiting time) of 146 is set. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display end processing of the normal symbol. The process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when terminating the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. The process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, the determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, hitting or losing the normal symbol) is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 normally performs the electric accessory opening process. The process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. The process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In this embodiment, a random number for hit determination of a normal symbol is generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and for example, 0 to 255 is used as the hit determination value data of the normal symbol. Since the normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit judgment value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 255/256 in this embodiment. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is the same or almost the same when the time saving control is executed and when the time saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600 sec, in the game state where the time reduction control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example 1 sec, in the game state where the time reduction control is executed. Only executed. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-7-4. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port is set with, for example, states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. The input port to be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S303 that the power failure is not detected (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the power failure is detected (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a restoration process of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masqueradable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when the power failure is detected) (when the determination in S312 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S312 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of on / off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, the power is restored, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO in S315), the main CPU 201 performs the setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. The details of the setting control process (S316) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

When the game is not permitted (when the determination in S315 is NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits the launch of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), and a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the interrupt in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs the switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs the winning information command setting process. In this process, the winning information command (payout information) is set. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs the effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration process of the protection register saved in S311 and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (when the determination in S333 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting confirmation process (S334). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (when S333 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337. ..

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs the effect control command transmission process. In this process, the commands (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (S25) are subordinates. It is transmitted to the control circuit 300. After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WDT clear process, and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 57) will be described. Note that FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (when the determination in S341 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs the update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176. However, in place of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to use this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operating.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

When it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S343 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57). On the other hand, when it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S343 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. As described above, when the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 57).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the setting confirmation process performed in S333 during the setting control process (see FIG. 57) will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 58) described above.

When it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S352). Details of this second normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 58) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as an initial setting process when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clear process (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) of an area (hereinafter, referred to as a “backup area”) in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored at the time of power failure is performed. The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 56). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 57). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When the first normal pre-game process is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S371). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above-mentioned data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game state information, on / off state of hit flags of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process (S371) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is not on (when the determination in S372 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is ON (when the determination in S372 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 57). When the process of S374 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 201 executes the start opening winning detection process (step S381). After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374. The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S382). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S383). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning a prize in the large winning opening 131 for big hits and the large winning opening 151 for small hits is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (step S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values (random values for hit determination of ordinary symbols, etc.) for the ordinary symbol are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127. .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 63, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (step S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in step S391 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in step S391 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol. Various random values such as random values for selecting the effect of the above) are extracted, and the payout information according to the first start opening prize is set. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 120 is less than four. The main RAM 203 holds the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 until the start condition is satisfied. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit is 4, (when the determination in step S393 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when the determination in step S393 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of the special symbol, performing a hit determination process, or the like using the random number value acquired in S392 prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 of FIG. 29). It also determines whether the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the acquisition of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the hit determination process of the special symbol, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. In view of performing the look-ahead effect by the sub-control circuit 300, it is preferable to perform the pre-reading effect, for example, before and after the processing of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the winning command of the first special symbol (step S397). The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information for increasing the number of reserved first special symbols by one, fluctuation pattern information of the first special symbol, and the like, and is a command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

In step S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switches 141A and 141B (step S398).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switches 141A and 141B (when the determination in step S398 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is switched input detection. Return to processing (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second start port switches 141A and 141B (when the determination in step S398 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random value of the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a second special symbol. Various random values such as random values for selecting the effect of the above) are extracted, and the payout information according to the second start opening prize is set. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols acquired based on the winning of the second starting ports 140A and 140B is less than four.

The main RAM 203 holds the various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B until the starting conditions are satisfied, and the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to the second. It has a special symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). NS. The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of the second special symbols held is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit is 4, (when the determination in step S400 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is switched input detection. Return to processing (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (when the determination in step S400 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls in the second starting ports 140A and 140B in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the winning command of the second special symbol (step S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, information on fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol, and the like, and is a command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 62).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

The initialization process (S501) described above is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes S502 to S508 described later are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes the command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead effect mode") is determined, or the special symbol variation this time (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable effect pattern (an effect mode performed by 301 with a variable display of a special symbol) corresponding to (referred to as) is determined.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed on the display device 7. The hold image is an image showing the current hold status. The look-ahead effect mode includes a jackpot look-ahead effect mode that indicates that a jackpot may have been won, a time-saving hit look-ahead mode that indicates that a time-saving hit may have been won, and a jackpot and a time-saving hit. It includes a common look-ahead effect mode in which the winning type (big hit or short-time hit) is not specified although there is a possibility that one of them has been won. A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described later.

The determination of the effect mode of the variation is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. The process of determining the suggested production mode is performed. Furthermore, for example, the effect mode of the countdown effect suggesting that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the effect process of the B time saving game state transition effect suggesting that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, etc. Performs determination processing of various production modes related to the progress.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, a drawing request). , Sound request, lamp request, and animation request, etc.). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes the voice control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the voice control circuit 305. The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 is based on a message (accessory request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, and is composed of all or a part of the accessory groups 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6). Drive control is performed to operate the effect drive motor (not shown). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is the main special symbol and the other is the sub-special symbol, and the effect control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which the left-handed hit is the normal game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-handed game is the normal game mode (high accuracy time-short game state, high). The second special symbol is the main special symbol in the non-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state). Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol for the main special symbol, display effect of the character and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the gaming states in which right-handed striking is a normal gaming mode, in the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, other effects are performed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of counting down the remaining number of time reductions until the end of the time reduction game state) may be displayed.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub CPU 301) performs the effect mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 64) based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process, the sub CPU 301 includes, for example, an effect pattern of a display effect (hereinafter referred to as "sub-variation effect pattern") associated with variable display of a special symbol, or a look-ahead effect pattern. Etc. are decided.

The sub-variable effect pattern is an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is maintained or increased as the time elapses from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol. The pattern includes, for example, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern, a character effect, and the like.

In the look-ahead effect pattern, after winning a prize in the starting port 120, starting information such as various random numbers acquired based on this winning is used for the hit determination process of the special symbol (that is, the variable display of the special symbol is started. This is an effect pattern that maintains or changes the look-ahead effect mode represented in the form of a hold image indicating that the start information is held, for example.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation effect pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table for low start stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation effect pattern determination table for high start, but description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in the low start sub-variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 301 uses the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200. , The sub-variation effect pattern displayed on the display device 7 (shown as “variation pattern” in FIG. 65) is determined.

In this embodiment, as the sub-variation effect pattern, a time-saving hit type reach, a big hit type reach, and a common reach are prepared.

The time-saving hit system reach is a reach effect indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 29), and there is a possibility of time-saving hit in appearance. It is a reach production mode that can grasp. As the time-saving hit system reach, for example, a time-saving hit system reach A, a time-saving hit system reach B, and a time-saving hit system reach C are prepared. The time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit confirmed reach that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, and is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). ). The time-saving hit system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern to be read ahead, but may be a sub-variation effect pattern in the look-ahead mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, the time-saving hit system reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, whereas the time-saving hit system reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (see the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The jackpot-type reach is a reach effect that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and is a reach effect mode that can grasp that there is a possibility of a jackpot in terms of appearance. As the jackpot reach, for example, a jackpot reach A, a jackpot reach B, and a jackpot reach C are prepared. The jackpot reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", and is displayed only when the result is a "time saving hit" (FIG. 15). reference). This jackpot system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The jackpot reach B and the jackpot reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, the jackpot reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, whereas the jackpot reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (see the “look-ahead flag” column in FIG. 15).

The common reach is a reach effect that indicates that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short-time hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and in appearance, there is a possibility of a big hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not there is. As the common reach, for example, a common reach A, a common reach B, a common reach C, a common reach D, and a common reach E are prepared. The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. Further, the common reach D is a production that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Further, the common reach E is a production that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. The common reach A and the common reach B are not the sub-variation effect patterns to be read ahead, while the common reach C, the common reach D, and the common reach E are the sub-variation effect patterns to be read ahead (“look-ahead” in FIG. 15). See the "Flags" column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 65), and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls so that the determined sub-variation effect pattern is displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process will be described.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes a first special symbol start storage area (0), a first special symbol start storage area (1), a first special symbol start storage area (2), and a first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), and the first sub are the areas corresponding to each of the 1 special symbol start storage area (3) and the first special symbol start storage area (4). A holding area (2), a first sub-holding area (3), and a first sub-holding area (4) are provided. In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), various types related to the acquired random number values are used. Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-holding area (0). By receiving the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 stores the information corresponding to the information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning.

Further, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. The second sub-holding area (0), the second sub-holding area (1), and the second sub-holding area (2nd sub-holding area (1)) correspond to the start storage area (3) and the second special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. 2), a second sub-holding area (3), and a second sub-holding area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal gaming state, but the pre-reading effect is not limited to this, and other gaming states (for example, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) ) May be used.

The look-ahead effect is performed using the reserved image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In the display area of the display device 7, as an area for displaying the reserved image, a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first A second holding area corresponding to the sub-holding area (2), a third holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (3), and a fourth holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (4) are provided. There is.

The form of the hold image on which the look-ahead effect is executed includes a big hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit, a big hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit, and a big hit and a time saving hit. A common hit look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for any of the above is included.

In addition, the look-ahead effect type pattern is a pre-reading effect type pattern that changes the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time saving hit or a big hit) of the special symbol hit determination process, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit. It includes a look-ahead effect pattern that changes the expected value for being a (big hit or short-time hit).

The look-ahead effect type pattern is an effect pattern that changes the form of the reserved image from, for example, the common hit look-ahead effect form to the jackpot type look-ahead effect form.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect pattern is an effect pattern that changes the form of the reserved image from a form having a relatively low expected value to a form having a relatively high expected value.

[1-9-2-1. Various tables used for look-ahead effect pattern determination processing]
First, various tables used in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. 66 to 69 are examples of tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is a process executed by the sub CPU 301 as one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process.

FIG. 66 is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table. Further, FIG. 67 is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern determination table for low start.

In this embodiment, since the look-ahead effect is performed only in the normal game state in which the left-handed hit is a normal game mode, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table of FIG. 66 and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table of FIG. Is not stored in the program ROM 302. However, when the look-ahead effect is performed in a game state in which right-handed strike is a normal game mode, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table for high start and the look-ahead effect type determination table for high start are also stored in the program ROM 302. Be remembered.

As shown in the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table of FIG. 66, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is based on, for example, the change pattern and the number of holds when the sub CPU 301 receives the change pattern in which the look-ahead flag is set. Will be decided. The number of holds here includes start information to be read ahead. That is, when the start information acquired based on the winning of the first start port 120 is held, the number of holds after the hold corresponds to the number of holds shown in FIG. 66.

The look-ahead effect type pattern number is determined to be "3" when the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3". For example, the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2". In the case, it is determined to be "22".

When the sub-variable effect pattern number is determined, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is determined with reference to the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table of FIG.

Next, the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined based on, for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern number and the effect selection random value 1 as shown in the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table for low start in FIG. .. In FIG. 67, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is shown as a “table number” for convenience. The effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value acquired by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command is received.

The look-ahead effect type pattern is determined to be "08H" when, for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is "3" and the acquired effect selection random number value 1 is "77". For example, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is "7". If the acquired random number value 1 for effect selection is "77", it is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 67 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

Further, "A" shown in each column of the remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 67 is a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit, and the appearance. The above is also a production form that allows you to grasp the possibility of a short working hours.

In addition, "B" shown in each column of the remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 67 is a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot, and is also in appearance. , It is a production form that can grasp the possibility of a big hit.

In addition, "C" shown in each column of the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 67 indicates that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be both a time saving hit and a big hit. Therefore, from the appearance, it is a production form in which it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a short-time hit or a big hit.

For example, when the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common look-ahead effect form is displayed in the third hold area, the common look-ahead effect form is displayed in the second hold area, and the second hold area is displayed. When shifting to the first hold area, the common system look-ahead effect mode is changed to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode is displayed in the first hold area.

Further, when the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common look-ahead effect form is displayed in the third hold area, and the common look-ahead effect form is displayed when shifting from the third hold area to the second hold area. The jackpot system look-ahead effect mode is changed from to the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode, and the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode is displayed in the first holding area.

That is, as shown in FIG. 67, the look-ahead effect type pattern includes the following patterns (a) to (d). The pattern that changes from the big hit type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form and the pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form to the large-short hit type look-ahead effect form are not included in the look-ahead effect type pattern.
B) The time-saving hit system look-ahead effect pattern is displayed at the time of holding, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect pattern continues without changing the effect form (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern "09H". ").
B) The jackpot look-ahead effect pattern is displayed when it is put on hold, and the jackpot look-ahead effect pattern continues without changing the effect form (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern "17H"). ..
C) A common hit-type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect type pattern "24H") that displays the common-type look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form.
D) A common hit-type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect type pattern "12H") that is displayed in the common-type look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form.

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 66), and determines the look-ahead effect type pattern number based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations. Then, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead effect type pattern based on the determined look-ahead effect type pattern number and the effect selection random value 1.

Further, FIG. 68 is an example of a hit-time look-ahead effect pattern table when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “short-time hit” or “big hit”. Further, FIG. 69 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern table at the time of loss when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss.

By the way, for example, the look-ahead effect form represented by the form of the reserved image differs depending on the expected value for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

For example, with regard to "time saving hit", for example, the expected value can be changed by changing the shape of the reserved image, which is usually represented by a triangle, such as "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star". Can be represented. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is a rectangle, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a star.

As for the jackpot, for example, the expected value can be expressed by changing the color of the reserved image such as "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow" for the reserved image which is usually expressed in white. .. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is blue, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, for the common hit look-ahead effect mode showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit, the reserved image is, for example, the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the time saving hit. It may be represented by both the shape indicating the expected value level, or it may be represented by a dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form.

The reserved image as the look-ahead effect can be changed from the effect form in which the expected value is relatively low to the effect form in which the expected value is relatively high, but the expected value is relative from the effect form in which the expected value is relatively high. It is preferable that the production form does not change to a low level. In addition, when changing the production form of the reserved image, it is not always necessary to change one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star" or "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". For example, it may be changed to "pentagon-> circle" or "yellow-> rainbow". Further, the form of the reserved image does not necessarily have to start from the quadrangle or blue having the lowest expected value, and may start from, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 68 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively, as in FIG. 66.

“0” to “5” shown as data in the remarks (holding correspondence) column and / and the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. It shows that. For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "quadrangle" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". Corresponds to.

Hereinafter, "1" to "5" shown as data in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 68 and / and the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 69 are referred to as expected value levels "1" to "5". Refer to.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit" or "big hit", the look-ahead effect pattern is, for example, the number of holds and the effect selection as shown in the hit-time look-ahead effect pattern table of FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the look-ahead effect pattern is, for example, the number of holds and the random number value 2 for effect selection, as shown in the loss-time look-ahead effect pattern table of FIG. 69. It is decided based on. The effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value acquired by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command is received. Note that, in FIGS. 68 and 69, the look-ahead effect pattern is shown as a “look-ahead effect pattern command” for convenience. Further, in FIGS. 68 and 69, only the case where the number of holds is “1” to “3” is shown, and the case where the number of holds is “4” is omitted for convenience.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be "43H". When the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, and the expected value level is changed from "2" to "2" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area. It changes to "3", and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". .. When the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and the second reserved area is changed to the first reserved area. The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting.

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the hit-time look-ahead effect pattern table (see FIG. 68) or the lost-time look-ahead effect pattern table (see FIG. 69) based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and refers to the number of holds and the look-ahead. The look-ahead effect pattern is determined based on the effect pattern. Then, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead effect type pattern based on the determined look-ahead effect type pattern number and the effect selection random value 1.

The look-ahead effect type pattern shown in FIG. 67 is a pattern in which the hit type can be changed by changing the form of the reserved image when the hold shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the fluctuation ends). The timing at which the form of the hold image changes is not limited to the time when the hold shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In this way, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect is a big hit look-ahead effect showing the expected value for the big hit, a time-saving hit look-ahead effect showing the expected value for the time-saving hit, and a hit (big hit or time-saving hit). ) Is configured to be feasible to execute one of the common look-ahead effects indicating the expected value. Then, when the common hit look-ahead effect form is executed, it is possible to give the player an interesting idea of whether to change to the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It becomes possible to increase.

Further, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 is a hit (big hit or time saving hit) due to a change in the form of the hold image when the hold shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the fluctuation ends). This is a pattern in which the expected value level can change. However, the timing at which the look-ahead effect mode changes is not limited to when the hold shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, regarding the form of the reserved image performed as the look-ahead effect (that is, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the second sub-reserved area (4) to the second sub-reserved area (1)), the starting ports 410 and 140A , 140B may be determined at the time of winning, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the variable special symbol may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined by the fluctuation pattern in which the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect is executed (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 65) and the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 65). Comparing with the probability determined by "06H" and "11H"), the probability of being determined by the fluctuation pattern in which the time saving hit system look-ahead effect is executed is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect is higher than the execution rate of the jackpot-type look-ahead effect. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko gaming machine in which only the big hit type look-ahead effect is performed among the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect and the big hit type look-ahead effect, the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect can be increased, and the interest can be enhanced. It will be possible.

Instead of making the execution rate of the time-saving look-ahead effect higher than the execution rate of the jackpot-type look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the jackpot-type look-ahead effect is higher than the execution rate of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect. You may. When the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big hit is higher than the expected value for the time saving hit, so even in such a case, it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, in both the normal gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", when the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed with the A time-saving game state, and for the A time-saving game state. It is unlikely that the number of time reductions will increase in any case where the C time reduction game states are not executed repeatedly. Therefore, by making it as little as possible for the player to know that there is a possibility of winning the "time saving hit" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving hit" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential that the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and the look-ahead effect may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-short game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-variation effect pattern, a time-saving hit system reach, a big hit system reach, or a common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 15, 65 to 67, when the sub CPU 301 executes the time saving hit system look-ahead effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the time saving hit system reach as the sub variation effect pattern. Do not perform jackpot reach. Further, when the big hit system look-ahead effect pattern is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the big hit system reach as the sub fluctuation effect pattern, and does not execute the time saving system reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the time saving hit system look-ahead effect pattern or the common hit system look-ahead effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 can execute the time saving hit system reach as the sub-variation effect pattern. However, when the big hit system look-ahead effect pattern is executed, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time saving system reach as the sub variation effect pattern.

Further, a jackpot type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect type pattern "37H"), a time-saving hit type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect type pattern "29H"), and a common hit type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect). Regardless of which of the patterns "27H") is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes a common reach (for example, sub-variation effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH") as the sub-variation effect pattern. May be good.

Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the time-saving hit system reach is executed, the loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving hit system reach, and then the big hit system reach is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end whether or not the jackpot reach with a high profit margin is executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E, which is a common effect, is executed in the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “target fluctuation”) for the start information for which the look-ahead effect is executed, it is common. After the same effect as the reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the same effect as the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no common effect is executed, the game does not shift to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E, which is a common effect, is executed in the target variation, after the same effect as the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the same effect as the time saving hit system reach C. On the other hand, if no common effect is executed, the process does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 65 to 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed is a normal gaming mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 has been received (S3001).

When the winning command has not been received (when the determination in S3001 is NO), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (when the determination in S3001 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the hold of the look-ahead target is not at the present time, that is, whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed for the current hold. When there are a plurality of holds, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of hold images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only on one hold image.

When the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is NO), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target.

When the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not the look-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is NO), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than, for example, the upper limit number that can be held (for example, 4 or 8). This process is for avoiding the transition to the B time saving game state before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the hold for which the pre-reading effect is performed, even though the pre-reading effect is performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the maximum number that can be held, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target. In a certain case (when the determination in S3003 is YES), it may be determined whether or not the number is larger than the number of reserved items including the read-ahead target. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect type pattern number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is determined with reference to the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined with reference to the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table (FIG. 67). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit". In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if this result is a "time saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "time saving hit" or the "big hit" may be determined by transmitting the winning information of the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (S3007 is NO determination), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a hit-time look-ahead effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined with reference to the hit-time look-ahead effect pattern table (FIG. 68).

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect pattern determination process at the time of loss. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined with reference to the look-ahead effect pattern table (FIG. 69) at the time of loss.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when the look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “big hit look-ahead effect”) indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 is new. Do not execute look-ahead effect. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed on a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to execute a new look-ahead effect when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed.

For example, there are a plurality of holds including a first hold and a second hold in which the variable display of the special symbol is started after the first hold, and the jackpot look-ahead effect pattern ( For example, when the look-ahead effect type pattern “17H” in FIG. 67) is executed, even if the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold, the look-ahead effect in the second hold becomes meaningless. there is a possibility. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and controlled to the jackpot gaming state and controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of this jackpot gaming state, for example, "time saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefits of this "time saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that is digested after the hold on which the jackpot look-ahead effect is executed.

Even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It may or may not be executed.

Further, even when the jackpot look-ahead effect of Gase (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern “53H” in FIG. 67) is executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, when the time saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern “05H” in FIG. 67) is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving hit look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. May be good. This is because even if a time saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player than that.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, even if the small hit look-ahead effect is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving hit look-ahead is performed in the second hold. You may perform the production. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, a look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead effect"). ) Is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a small hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, as a sub-variation effect pattern, if, for example, the first start port 120 is won and the start information is reserved during the execution of the jackpot system reach, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this hold.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is suspended (this). In the paragraph, this hold is referred to as "specific hold"), and regardless of whether the look-ahead effect is executed or the look-ahead effect is not executed for this specific hold, the sub CPU 301 is subjected to the jackpot game state after the end. , If it is not in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even if it is in the normal game state after the end of the big hit game state. Furthermore, even if the pachinko gaming machine executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the jackpot display mode If there is a specific hold when is derived, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is suspended (this). This hold is referred to as "specific hold" in the paragraph), and even if this specific hold is a "time saving hit" hold, the main CPU 201 will perform a C time saving game based on the "time saving hit" after the end of the jackpot game state. It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification does not execute a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner when the time-saving game states overlap, and the time-saving game state is controlled to the A time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit". The main CPU 201 does not execute the C time saving game state based on the "time saving hit".

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute the look-ahead effect using the reserved image based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example of jackpot look-ahead production form]
71 (a) to 71 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit changes. It is a figure which shows the process. In FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “1CH”, “3CH”, “58H”, or “78H” in FIG. 67. The look-ahead effect pattern is not shown in FIG. 68.

As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (f), the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are areas indicating whether or not the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area indicating that the information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the 1st sub-holding area (0).

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in any of the first sub hold areas (1) to (4), the sub CPU 301 holds the hold corresponding to the first sub hold area in which the hold information is stored. The areas 411 to 414 are displayed as a hold image (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “hold image”) represented by a triangle. Further, when the hold information is not stored in the sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the hold image and displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 71A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to (3), and the reserved information is not stored in the first sub-reserved area (4).

In FIG. 71 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 71 (a). This indicates that the hold information is newly stored in the first sub hold area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color except for the rainbow.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 71B, the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white, and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue ( Expected value level "1").

FIG. 71 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 71 (b) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 71 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71 (c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 71 (c) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reserved area 412.

FIG. 71 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71 (d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 71 (d) is , Is an image showing that the color has changed from green to red (expected value level “4”) when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 71 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71 (e), and the color of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 71 (e) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410.

Further, the color (expected value level) of the hold image indicating the expected value for the jackpot does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the fluctuation ends). It may be changed during the variable display of the variable special symbol.

[1-10-2. Specific example of time-saving hit system look-ahead production form]
72 (a) to 72 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit is provided. It is a figure which shows the changing process. In FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “0EH”, “2EH”, “4AH”, or “6AH” in FIG. 67. The look-ahead effect pattern is not shown in FIG. 68.

In FIG. 72A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 72 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big hit is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for the time saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 72B, the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle, and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a quadrangle. Expected value level "1").

FIG. 72 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 72 (b) is , Is an image showing that the quadrangle has changed to a pentagon (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 72 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72 (c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 72 (c) is , It is an image which shows that it changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it was shifted to the second reserved area 412.

FIG. 72 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72 (d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 72 (d) is , Is an image showing that the hexagon has changed to a circle (expected value level “4”) when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 72 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72 (e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 72 (e) is , This is an image showing that the circle has changed to a star (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410.

The shape of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star", for example, it changes to "pentagon → circle". You may let me.

Further, the shape (expected value level) of the hold image indicating the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the fluctuation ends), for example. It may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the fluctuation.

[1-10-3. Specific example of common look-ahead production form]
73 (a) to 73 (f) are examples of pre-reading effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the look-ahead effect form to the jackpot type look-ahead effect form. The change in the common hit look-ahead effect form includes a change in the expected value of the hit and a change in which the type of hit is a big hit or a short-time hit. In FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern is shown in FIG. 68. Corresponds to "43H".

In this embodiment, as a common hit look-ahead effect mode showing that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit, both a color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and a shape showing the expected value level for the time saving hit are used. It represents.

In FIG. 73A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 show the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 73 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). .. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or the expected value for the hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow". The expected value for short hits increases in the order of "stars".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 73B, the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 412 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle, and the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is Is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 73 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 73 (b) is , Is an image showing that the yellow pentagon changed to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 73 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 73 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 73 (c) is , From the green hexagon (common system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "5") when shifting to the first reserved area 411. It is an image showing that it has changed.

That is, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 3 (c), it is determined whether the form of the reserved image is a form showing an expected value for a big hit or a form showing an expected value for a time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 73 (d), the form of the reserved image indicates the expected value for the jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level “5”). It is possible to grasp that there is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is a big hit look-ahead effect showing the expected value for the big hit, a time-saving hit look-ahead effect showing the expected value for the time-saving hit, and a hit, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. It is configured to be able to execute one of the common look-ahead effects that indicate the expected value for (big hit or short-time hit). Then, when the common hit look-ahead effect form is executed, it is possible to give the player an interesting idea of whether to change to the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It becomes possible to increase.

It is necessary to change the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit one by one in the order of "blue square <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow star". Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit look-ahead effect form)-> red triangle (big hit look-ahead effect form)", or "green hexagon (common hit look-ahead effect form)-> triangle". It may be changed to "star (time saving hit system look-ahead effect form)". Further, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue quadrangle having the lowest expected value, and may be started from, for example, the red circle.

Further, the form of the hold image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the change ends), for example, the special symbol of the change. It may be changed during the variable display.

[1-10-4. Modification example of common look-ahead production form]
In addition, the common hit look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit is not necessarily a form showing both a color showing an expected value for a big hit and a shape showing an expected value for a time saving hit. Not limited. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit look-ahead effect mode may be provided. If a dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form is provided, it will be possible to have a sense of expectation for both the big hit and the time saving hit, and since the expected values of each are unknown, expectations are expected for future changes in the effect mode. You will be able to play games with a sense of humor, and you will be able to improve your interests.

74 (a) to 74 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the reserved image is changed from the dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form to the jackpot type look-ahead effect form. It is a figure which shows the changing process. In FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern is shown in FIG. 68. Corresponds to "31H".

Further, FIGS. 75A to 75F are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from the dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is a figure which shows the process of changing a hold image. In FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “07H”, “27H”, “43H”, or “63H” in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern is FIG. 68 or Corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 69.

In FIGS. 74A and 75A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the third reserved area 413 and FIG. 4 The reserved image is not displayed in the reserved area 414, and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 74 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 74 (a).

Similarly, in FIG. 75 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 75 (a).

In both of FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), the form of the hold image shown in the third hold area 413 is a dedicated common system look-ahead effect form, for example, a brilliant form. The expected value level can be changed by changing the degree of light brightness.

FIG. 74 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), and is a dedicated common system look-ahead displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 74 (b). It is an image which shows that the production form is shifted to the 2nd holding area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 75 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 75 (b), and is a dedicated image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 75 (b). It is an image which shows that the common system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

FIG. 74 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 74 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 74 (c) is It is an image showing that when the first reserved area 411 is shifted, the dedicated common system look-ahead effect mode is changed to a red triangle (expected value level “4” of a jackpot).

On the other hand, FIG. 75 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 75 (c), and is a hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 75 (c). It is an image which shows that when the form was shifted to the 1st hold area 411, it changed from the exclusive common system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level "4" per time reduction).

In this way, even when the look-ahead effect form is represented by the dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form, the dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form can be changed to either the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to give the player the fun of changing, and to enhance the interest.

[1-11. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the first pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, so that the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is mainly executed. Further, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed is a normal gaming mode, so that the game is played to the second starting ports 140A and 140B. The second special symbol game based on the winning of the ball is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the first special symbol is in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 is in another game state (for example, normal game state, high-accuracy time-short game state, low-accuracy time-short game state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the right-handed game ball almost passes through the passing gate 126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit winning opening 131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second starting port 140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition. Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 151 is open, the game ball that is right-handed and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win the small hit large winning opening 151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball that is hit right and is distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win a prize in the second starting port 140A. When a game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and 140B, for example, as shown in the hit determination table (see FIG. 10) of a special symbol, a stop showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of one-third (approximate). Not only is the display mode derived, but the ultra-fast variation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 15B), so that the display mode is small. The winning frequency of the game ball into the winning large winning opening 151 is increased as compared with other gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state, and a low-probability short-time gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state and the low accuracy time reduction game state), the second start port 140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and is hit right. Most of the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b win the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit right and is distributed to the upper flow path 107a wins a prize in the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 140A is hit right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the route 107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win a prize. In this way, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, but if right-handed is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 126 and has a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit. When it is derived, the ordinary electric accessory 146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small hit large winning opening 151 will be opened by winning a game ball in the second starting opening 140B. However, in the normal game state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 15 (A)), the game is tentatively set in the second starting ports 140A and 140B. Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and of course, is smaller than the game state in which the time saving control is executed. ..

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may be made in a high-accuracy time-shortening game state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[1-12. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, the output is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal plate 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting a signal to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal plate 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8". , "Prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 76 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 76, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, the signal of "door / frame opening" is output from CH2, and the signal of "external information 1" to CH10 is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively. Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The signal output conditions from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 76.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 77 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “Prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 77, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big winning opening (the big winning opening 131 for big hits or the big winning opening 151 for small hits (see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes are awarded. When the ball is paid out and the game ball wins at the starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140A (see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out and the general winning opening When a game ball wins in 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1", for example, for 120 msec, the "prize ball". The signal of "Information 1" is output. Note that the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output only at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. For example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. Further, it is only an example that the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out or output for 120 msec, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "Prize ball information 1". Can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 78 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). It is a table showing the output time and remarks of the release trigger in, the signal of "security" (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 78).

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 78 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 78 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Examples of errors not shown in FIG. 78 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and a big winning opening (big hit big hit). If there is an undischarged game ball inside the winning opening 131 or the large winning opening 151 for small hits (see Fig. 4), or if there is a prize in the large winning opening when the large winning opening is not opened, the large winning opening is entered. An abnormal discharge error, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, and the like correspond. Further, for example, a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control 131, and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific zone during the execution of the jackpot game control. In some cases, it is judged as an error even if the passage to a specific area is abnormal, or if the game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening 131 for big hits. It is preferable to configure it so as to do so.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) transmits a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection-related execution executes notification control according to the content of the error.

Hereinafter, control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both refer to FIG. 6) will be briefly described by taking as an example the case where an abnormal winning error of the big winning opening for big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 78, for example, if one winning detection is performed after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) Determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot for jackpot, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot for jackpot is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of the error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "a large winning opening abnormal winning error" from a speaker (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via a voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (all of which, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, when the sub CPU 301 receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error during execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 79, the output signal is indicated by ◯, and the non-output signal is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal game state (other than the big hit / small hit, other than the probability change / time reduction), and during the low probability time / short game state (other than the big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "external information 7" are output, and the signals of "external information 3", "external information 5" and "external information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). It is output, and the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit).

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (for example) that can receive the signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (see FIG. 6). (Not shown)) makes it possible to grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is transmitted.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). It is the same as the signal output to (other than). Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). The signal output during the small hit game control process (during the high accuracy time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the high accuracy time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is the same as the signal output during the small hit game. The signal output during the control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving signals (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small hit game control process on a pachinko gaming machine to which external information is transmitted. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko game machine of the external information transmission destination has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. 79. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine called a digi-pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. .. Therefore, the gaming board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 81) (for example). , Functions, shapes, placement positions, etc. are common to the first pachinko machine, such as signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 81) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island. The explanation of the above shall be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will use the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed. When the variable display of is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. There are pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially fluctuating machines") in which starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning, including the first starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, the jackpot game state, etc., and the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as not being, and the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is established when all of the certain requirements are satisfied, such as that none of the above is in the variable display, that the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended.

Further, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. , The earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the start condition of the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied. It is established when at least all of the conditions that the variable display is not in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG. 80. The gaming board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 80 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 1010 so that the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 80, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 1110, and a substantially center of the game area 1105. The center accessory 1115, the first starting port 1120, the general winning opening 1122, the passing gate unit 1125, the special electric accessory unit 1130, the second starting port 1140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes 1145, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without a reference symbol) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 81 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 1120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 81 described later). It should be noted that the right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 1120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 81 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize movement)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 81 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 81 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 1122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 1122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the right-handed game ball to pass through, and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 81 described later), is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured so that a right-handed game ball almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The various reserved data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate unit 1125, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 integrates the large winning opening 1131, the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 81 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the large winning opening 1131, and the special electric accessory 1133. It is a unit body that has been transformed. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.

The large winning opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 1131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is arranged, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 1115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Is. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 81 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large prize opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 81 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, can win (pass) the game ball to the large winning opening 1131 or is easily opened, and cannot win (pass) the game ball to the large winning opening 1131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 1131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a state.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 1140 is located in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120). However, in the second starting port 1140, it is difficult or impossible to win a left-handed game ball due to, for example, a game nail, and the right-handed game ball can be won. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 1140 has such a configuration, and for example, it may be provided in the right side region 1107 so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 81 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 81 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win (pass). It is a unit body in which a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147, which is a so-called electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 81 described later) that operates the general electric movable member 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the movable member 1147 for general electric power, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 1140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 1140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. Instead of the so-called electric chew, which is a movable member for general electric power 1147, for example, a shutter capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction may be adopted.

(Out mouth)
Although the out port 1178 is launched toward the game area 1105, it wins a prize in any of various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 1120, the second starting opening 1140, the large winning opening 1131, the general winning opening 1122, etc.). This is to discharge the missing game ball to the outside of the machine. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 1105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. It may be.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 like the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, and includes a production accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 1300. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect accessory group 1058 function as the effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko gaming machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko gaming machine, they will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 81, the second pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 1200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 1300, a payout / launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the I / O port 1205 which is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and the command output port 1206 which is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 1300 and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, in the main control circuit 1200, the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol hold display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol hold display unit 1165, and the first 2 The hold display unit 1166 for special symbols, the solenoid 1148 for general electric power, the solenoid 1135 for special electric power, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switch 1141, the pass gate switch 1127, the count switch 1132, the general winning port switch 1123, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 1200 via the I / O port 1205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 1184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 and / and backs up. It also includes those configured to come into contact with the clear switch 1176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a voice control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 81, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores the image data, and a D / A that converts the image data as an image signal. It is equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 1058 for production). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 for paying out the game balls and a game ball. A launching device 1006 for launching a ball, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is adjusted according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving game state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and a time saving control in which probabilistic change control is not executed but time saving control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 1201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states.

In this embodiment, left-handed is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state. The sub CPU 1301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a display area of the display device 1007, which is a normal game mode.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 82 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random value acquired when the game ball wins the starting ports 1120 and 1140. , "Big hit" or "miss" is a table referred to when determining by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving hit", "big hit" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small hit) are not included, but the first starting port 1120 or / and When the game ball wins the second starting port 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random number in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the special symbol, the range of the random value for jackpot judgment determined as "time saving hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The relationship between (width) and the corresponding time-saving hit judgment value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and " The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 Determines as "time saving hit" and determines the judgment value data as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 is "big hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 is "lost". Is determined, and the determination value data is determined as "loss determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 409, the main CPU 1201 is set to ". It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 41 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 is "big hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 is "lost". Is determined, and the determination value data is determined as "loss determination value data".

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 83 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins at the start ports 1120 and 1140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 83, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA9" as the symbol specification command.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12) is stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200, as in the first pachinko gaming machine. .. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 81) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command. Further, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol display units 163 and 164 have a display mode of time saving hit, a display mode of big hit, or a display mode of loss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Derived.

[2-3-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 84 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or / and the mode of the subsequent game state, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when deciding. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-shortening hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortening game state without being controlled to the big-hit game state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To determine. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time reduction hit described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then, after that, Without controlling the jackpot game state, the time reduction flag is set on and the determined number of time reductions is set, so that the C time reduction game state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", the mode of the big hit game state is not determined because it is not controlled to the big hit game state.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 1201 draws a lottery for "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 82, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In some cases, the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" has been won is derived to the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164, but the high probability gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C time saving gaming state. You may do so. Further, the main CPU 1201 draws a lottery for "time saving hit" even if the probability change flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination processing is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to a special symbol. It may be derived to the display units 1163 and 1164. Further, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the jackpot judgment random value, that is, the hit judgment processing may be performed so that the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result. ..

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state, and the probability change flag and the time reduction as the mode of the subsequent game state. Decide to set both with the flag on and set the probability variation to 10000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the high-accuracy time-short game state after the jackpot game state ends after the above-mentioned jackpot display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163, and can control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy time-short game state after the jackpot game state ends. It becomes.

When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on. In addition, it is determined that the number of time reductions to be set is set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163, and can control the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on. In addition, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and can control the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

The time saving performance in the high-accuracy time saving game state is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 1201 has the mode of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 1201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent mode. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show the hit type determination table in FIG. 84. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 84.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 82, and the jackpot determination acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140. The winning judgment value data is determined based on the random value for use (the winning judgment is performed), and the winning (“short-time hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 83, and the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140 and the above-mentioned winning determination. The selected symbol command is determined based on the value data, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or type of jackpot) derived to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning judgment and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z5”) or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. The number of times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state. In this way, by making the A time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to a disadvantage compared to the case where the "big hit" is won but the "big hit" is not won (when the "short-time hit" is won). It becomes.

Instead of setting the expected value of the time reduction number in the A time reduction game state to be higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction game state, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction game state is the time reduction number in the A time reduction game state. It may be higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of the "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving game state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 85 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the second pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 85 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 85, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, although it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, the determination is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 1201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

The time-saving hit system reaches A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 85 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a short hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 has a hit determination table of a normal symbol (see FIG. 012-3) and a normal symbol. A determination table (see FIG. 18), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 19), and a variation pattern table of a normal symbol (see FIG. 20) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 81) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 53 and 94), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 86, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine is used. There is no.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1002 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S1003 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (when the determination in S1004 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S1004 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process, S1005. Move to.

Returning to S1003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S1003 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process. Move to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 1120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 1140.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The processing target of the special symbol management processing is the second special symbol when the determination in S1003 of the special symbol control processing is YES, and the processing target of the first special symbol when the determination in S1004 of the special symbol control processing is YES. It is a processing target.

The numerical values (“0” to “5”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 87 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S1011).

When it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1011 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1011 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1013. The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1013 based on the control state number read in the processing of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S1015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S1016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S1017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S1018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

After completing the processes of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 88, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 82) is referred to, and the hit determination of the special symbol is performed using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the hit determination process of the special symbol, first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, big hit or loss) of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special symbol. In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 83) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 84). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of hits, but there may be one type of big hit and one type of time saving hit. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value and / and the effect selection random value, etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined accordingly. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85). After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 87). S1014) will be performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1030, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S1031)) within the interrupt prohibition section. It is preferable to carry out with.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

When it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S1041 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S1041 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 87) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the remaining number of times. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 87). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a big hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1052 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 80) via the external terminal plate 1184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S1053, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened (S1055), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal plate 1184 (S1056), and a control state number of the special symbol "3". Processing (S1057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S1058), transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S1059), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S1057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 87). S1016) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

Returning to S1052, when it is determined in this S1052 that the special symbol that has stopped is not the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1052 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 performs a time saving management process (S1061). Since the details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko gaming machine, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process (S1064) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87) as described above.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S1071 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 87) is completed after the end of the big winning opening preparatory process. (See S1018) will be performed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S1077, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 1131, the number of winning balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 1131, and the like are set. .. The number of rounds is equivalent to the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process of S1079, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1080) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (S1080) (See S1017 in FIG. 87) will be performed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

When it is determined in S1091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S1091 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S1091 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 80) or the like for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

When it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO in S1092), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

On the other hand, in S1092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S1092 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 92) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has not elapsed (NO in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. (See FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has elapsed (when the determination in S1093 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 1131. After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1095) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. The process (see S1016 in FIG. 87) will be performed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S1101 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 91 is performed. After executing the process of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87), and returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-kind 2-kind mixer, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot game state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "the character opening hit", and the game ball that has entered the opened V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a sequentially variable machine that does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but executes variable display in the order of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned priority variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 96) (for example). , Functions, shapes, placement positions, etc. are common to the first pachinko machine, such as signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island. The explanation of the above shall be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will use the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG. 95. The gaming board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 95 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front side surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 95, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially center of the game area 2105. The center accessory 2115, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, the passing gate unit 2125, the special electric accessory unit 2130, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without a reference symbol) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 96 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 96 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 2120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 96 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 96 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize movement)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 96 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 96 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2122 is replaced with the above-mentioned general winning opening 2122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the right-handed game ball to pass through, and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 96 described later), is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured so that a right-handed game ball can almost pass through. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The various reserved data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate unit 2125, the prize ball will not be paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left side region 2106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is arranged, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Is. When the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 96 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) through the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be closed and transitionable to. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the jackpot game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win (pass), a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls in the winning opening, and ordinary electric. It is a unit body in which the accessory 2146 is integrated, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a general electric shutter 2147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 96 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 2140 or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passage gate 2126 in the right region 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the V attacker 2152. The V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning opening 2155 through which the game ball that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and the game ball that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 are V. The V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed) into the winning opening 2155, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the open / close winning opening 2151 did not enter the V winning opening 2155. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning It is provided with a locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided on the upstream side of the passing gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is composed of members along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of FIG. 96, which will be described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 opens, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode of opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the opening of 900 msec may be performed twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on entering the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and functions of the main CPU 2201. The value of the V attacker winning counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open / close the winning even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the opening / closing winning opening 2151 has not passed. The mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers the control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 96) detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 96) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152. That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is changed from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the player is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a big prize opening. A round game may be performed that shifts the 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning opening and the big hit game The attackers released in the state may be one by one. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that "the accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When the player enters, it is controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot game state after passing through the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). The game ball that has passed through the loss opening 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 96 described later), and the game to the V winning opening 2155. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode and the opening mode in which the ball can pass (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed from the operation of the V-attacker 2152, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The unlocked game ball in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) in the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2160.

(Out mouth)
The out port 2178 is of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, general winning opening 2122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 2105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that have not won or entered any of them to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 like the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these production accessory group 2058, at least one accessory or the effect accessory component constituting the accessory functions as an operation accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko gaming machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko gaming machine, they will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 96, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I / O port 2205 connected so as to be able to communicate with various devices and the like, a command output port 2206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, in the main control circuit 2200, the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol hold display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol hold display unit 2165, and the first 2 A special symbol hold display unit 2166, a general electric solenoid 2148, a special electric solenoid 2135, a V attacker solenoid 2154, a V shutter solenoid 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121, a second start port switch 2141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and general. The winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko game machines in the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 2176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. The configuration may be as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a voice control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 96, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores the image data, and a D / A that converts the image data as an image signal. It is equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 2058 for production). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out the game balls and a game ball. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is adjusted according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal game state in which the time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the short-time game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a display area of the display device 2007, which is a normal game mode.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 97 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 97, when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the jackpot determination random value of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery result is determined as "short time hit", "big hit" or "miss". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the lottery result based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the big hit determination random value of the second special symbol. , "Time saving hit", "Big hit" or "Character opening hit" is decided.

It is not essential that the "winning of the character opening" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined as the "winning of the character opening". , It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "winning the character opening". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "time saving hit" and "big hit" are used as data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting port 2120. The range (width) of the random value for jackpot judgment determined as "or" loss "and the corresponding judgment value data ("short-time hit judgment value data "," jackpot judgment value data "," loss judgment value data ") The relationship with is stipulated. In addition, as the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the big hit determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "feature opening hit". The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "feature opening hit judgment value data") is defined. There is.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability or / and the accessory opening hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. You may. However, even if the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all settings.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening the time may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time is shortened. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 98 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins at the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 98, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 99 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table shows the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol). It is referred to when determining the time saving flag and the time saving end condition). The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the reduced working hours, it is controlled to the C reduced working hours state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state. “L” shown in the column in the time saving end condition of FIG. 99 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol, and "N" indicates the number of times per accessory opening. The remarks column in FIG. 99 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and decides the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 6, N = 3. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to L = 30, M = 3, and N = 3. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine N = 2. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine N = 1. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be four and does not set the time saving flag to on. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine N = 2.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , The number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time reduction flag is determined to be set on, and the time reduction end conditions are determined to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. However, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory", the main CPU 2201 executes the big hit game state if it is not controlled to the big hit game state through the second route. Not only does it not, but the time reduction flag is not set to on, and after performing control based on the character opening hit, the game is returned to the game state immediately before the character opening hit.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state. Neither is set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 2201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state as described above. Since it is not set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 99. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 99.

Further, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column in the time saving end condition of FIG. 99 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, and depending on the gaming state. The conditions may be different. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B It may be different only in one of the time-saving game states and the time-saving game state C. Further, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. , A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state may be different only in one of the time-saving game states. That is, the end condition of at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to the end condition of at least one of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. It may be different in the game state.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 100 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 100 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 100, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the effect selection random value acquired at the time of (passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 acquires the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. Determined based on the effect selection random value.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol by the value of the time saving flag and the first starting port 2120. ) Is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired at the time of. It is considered that the game ball rarely wins a prize at the first starting port 2120 because right-handed hitting is a normal game mode in the short-time game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the acquired random value for effect selection.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 acquires the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second starting port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired when the game ball wins 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "per opening of the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol for the fluctuation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect of, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way so as to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

Further, the time-saving hit system reaches A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 100 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a short hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a hit determination table for ordinary symbols (see FIG. 17) and an ordinary symbol determination table. (See FIG. 18), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 19), and a variation pattern table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 20) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 95) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 53, 111), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 101, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine is used. There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The processing target of the special symbol management processing is the second special symbol when the determination in S2003 of the special symbol control processing is YES, and the processing target of the first special symbol when the determination in S2004 of the special symbol control processing is YES. It is a processing target.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 102 are control state numbers of special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2011 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2011 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2012, and then shifts the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 103. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 104. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening preparation process. This process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S2020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 97) is referred to, and the hit determination of the special symbol is performed using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or an accessory opening hit. In the hit determination process of the first special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss. Similarly, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in this process, it is determined that the accessory is an open hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of an accessory or a loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 98) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit (time saving hit, big hit, hit by opening the accessory). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 99). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the opening of the accessory is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the types of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory opening hit are all set to a plurality of types, but the type of the time saving hit, the big hit, and / and the accessory opening hit may be one. .. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of time saving hits, big hits, and / and accessory opening hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 100) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination and / and the effect selection. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 100). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 102) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibition section. It is preferable to carry out with.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is the processing called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 102) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. It becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is the process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 102). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S2052 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a big hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), the process of setting the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and the control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing (S2057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058), transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S2059), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped, that is, the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of the accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened, which is set in this process, is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and a game state specification parameter setting process (S2065). ), And processing such as transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the start display command per opening of the accessory is performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 of FIG. 102) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 performs a time saving management process (S2071). Since the third pachinko gaming machine, which is called the 1st and 2nd kind mixer, is not controlled to the highly accurate gaming state, it is not exactly the same as the processing described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko gaming machine. .. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko gaming machine of No. 3, it is not controlled to the highly accurate gaming state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on instead of being set to on, and it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Is different. Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 40), after determining whether or not the probability variation flag is off (see S221), the process of S221 is performed. The pachinko gaming machine of No. 3 is different in that the processing of S222 is performed without the processing of S221 because the pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to the high probability gaming state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2074) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102) as described above.

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of times of opening, and the like as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time may be opened, for example, up to 600 msec, and the second time may be opened, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". By performing the process (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" in this way, after the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 102). Will be done. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 96), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. Will be done. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or more than the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 107) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. (See FIG. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined that the V winning detection has been detected in S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a V-per signal) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V-hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round games are executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 99), so that the player has executed the jackpot game control process. As in the case, a large number of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control can also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory is processed as the first round game. That is, the game control per V executed when it is determined that the V winning detection has been detected (S2095 is determined to be YES) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and the V-per-V signal setting process (S2100) to the external terminal board 2184. , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state specification parameter setting process (S2102), the transmission reservation process of the start display command per V (S2103), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". By performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" in this way, the big hit end process (see S2020 of FIG. 102) is performed after the end of the large winning opening preparation process. It will be. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 105 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 105 is determined to be YES), and the V prize is detected (FIG. FIG. In the case of the game control per V started by (S2095 of 108 is determined to be YES), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened a plurality of times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". By performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 102). Will be done. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96) for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 2131 or the V attacker count switch for counting the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 96) is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES), the main CPU 2201 processes the process in S2134. Transfer.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 109) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 closes the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed again. See) will be done. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "7" (when the determination in S2141 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This fourth pachinko gaming machine is a gaming machine equipped with a small hit rush, and like the first pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Is. However, the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called ST machine that shifts to the normal gaming state even if it is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state when it is controlled to the high probability gaming state for a specified number of times (for example, 120 times). be.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the description of the points in common with the first pachinko gaming machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[4-1. Game board unit configuration]
FIG. 116 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 4010 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 117 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that, in FIGS. 116 and 117, not only the description but also the illustration of the reference numerals will be omitted for the configuration common to the first pachinko gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 6.

As shown in FIG. 116, the first starting port 4120 has a first starting port 4120A and a first starting port 4120B, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine has a first start port switch 4121A (see FIG. 117) that detects the passage of the game ball through the first start port 4120A, and a second pachinko gaming machine that detects the passage of the game ball through the first start port 4120B. It has one start port switch 4121B (see FIG. 117).

When the game ball passes through the first starting port 4120A, for example, three game balls are paid out. When the game ball passes through the first starting port 4120B, for example, one game ball is paid out.

The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing.

The first starting port 4120B is arranged below, for example, the first starting port 4120A, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is arranged below, for example, the first starting port 4120A. The ordinary electric accessory 4146 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) to the first starting port 4120B by operating a movable member 4147, which is a so-called electric chew, and to the first starting port 4120B. It is configured so that the game ball can be changed to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a prize. In the ordinary electric accessory 4146 in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the placement position is below the first starting port 4120A, and the winning opening for which the ease of winning is changed by changing the state is the first starting port 4120B. Although it differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects, other configurations and functions are the same as those of the first pachinko gaming machine, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 116, the open state of the movable member 4147 is indicated by a long-dotted chain line, and the closed state of the movable member 4147 is indicated by a solid line.

The passing gate 4126 included in the passing gate unit 4125 is not arranged in the right side area 4107, but is arranged in the left side area 4106 so that the left-handed game ball can pass through.

It should be noted that the passing gate 4126 may function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous operating device in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, but apart from the passing gate 4126, the accessory continuous operating device may be operated. The gate that triggers the operation may be arranged in the right side region 4107.

The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the ordinary electric accessory 4146, and the game ball can be won regardless of whether the left-handed or right-handed hit is performed. The special electric accessory unit 4130 has a big hit opening 4131 and an opening / closing member 4134 that can be opened / closed in the front-rear direction. , The right-handed game ball can win the big hit opening 4131.

In the right side region 4107, for example, two flow paths 4107a and 4107b are formed vertically as the flow paths of the right-handed game ball. In this embodiment, of the right-handed game balls, the ball is distributed to the upper flow path 4107a with a probability of about one-third, and is distributed to the lower flow path 4107b with a probability of about two-thirds. Has been done.

The second starting port 4140 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 4107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a can win a prize. The passage of the game ball through the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 117). It is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a win the second starting port 4140.

Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit unit 4150 has a small hit large winning opening 4151 arranged in the right side region 4107. The small hit large winning opening 4151 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 4107b can win a prize. By operating on, the ease of winning is configured to be changeable. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large winning opening 4151 for small hits is, for example, 10, but is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 4131 and the small hit big winning opening 4151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening are open. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 117, the fourth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, has a main control circuit 4200 that controls the game and a sub-control that controls the effect according to the progress of the game. The circuit 4300 and the like are provided.

[4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various random numbers acquired based on winning the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B are displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, the first special). Up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4) can be held until the symbol is subjected to the hit determination process. Similarly, various random numbers acquired based on winning the second starting port 4140 are used until the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed). Up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4) can be reserved.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a jackpot determination random that is acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 4120A, 4120B or the second start opening 4140. It is a table referred to when determining "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the numerical value. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "small hit", "big hit", and "miss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, or "time saving hit" may be included in the lottery mode in the hit determination process of the second special symbol. ..

The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used for the hit determination process of the special symbol, as in the case of the first pachinko gaming machine. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

Further, the main CPU 4201 determines "small hit", "big hit", or "miss" based on the extracted random value for big hit determination in the hit determination process of the second special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "small hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding small hit judgment value The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in both the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the probability (big hit probability) that the jackpot judgment value data is extracted when the probability variation flag is off is 201. It is 1/200, and the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is on is 1/200.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 can determine "time saving hit" even if the probability variation flag is on, but instead, when the value of the probability variation flag is on, "time saving hit". May be excluded from the lottery target so that it is not determined as a "time saving hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is on, the game is configured so as not to shift to the C time saving game state. In the case of specifications that shift to the base state, by not providing "time saving hit" in the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, it becomes practically "time saving hit" in the high accuracy and low base state. You can avoid winning.

[4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 (see FIG. 117) included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening 4120A, 4120B or the second start opening 4140 and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. It is a table that is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and the "symbol specification command" that determine. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a command displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 119, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 responds to the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , For example, one of "z0", "z1" and "z2" is selected as the selected symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 uses, for example, "z3" or "z4" as the selected symbol command according to the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , And select "zA2" or "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 uses, for example, "z5" as the selection symbol command regardless of the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , And select "zA4" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 may use, for example, as a selection symbol command, regardless of the symbol random value of the second special symbol. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 uses, for example, "z7" or "z8" as the selected symbol command according to the symbol random value of the second special symbol. , And select "zA6" or "zA7" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 uses, for example, "z9" as the selection symbol command regardless of the symbol random value of the second special symbol. , And select "zA8" as the symbol specification command.

Although the description is omitted in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol is displayed on the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, as in the first pachinko gaming machine. Special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12) referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the unit 4163 or the second special symbol display unit 4164 (see FIG. 117) according to the selected symbol command. Is remembered.

[4-4. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 120 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming states are low-accuracy low-base state (normal gaming state), low-accuracy high-base state (low-accuracy time-short game state), high-accuracy high-base state (high-accuracy time-short game state), and It is controlled to either a high-accuracy low-base state (high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). Of these game states, left-handed is the normal game mode in the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state, and the game ball is awarded to the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. The game progresses based on this. In the high accuracy and low base state, right-handed is a normal game mode, and the game proceeds based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4140.

The hit type determination table shows the mode of the hit game state or / depending on the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol and the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. And the mode of the subsequent gaming state, which is referred to in determining. The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 120 shows the mode of the big hit game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) or the mode of the small hit game state (more specifically, the number of times of opening). Further, the mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-shortening hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortening game state without being controlled by the hit-game state. The aspect is shown.

(In the case of a short time hit)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction game state is determined as follows.

When the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit" in the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, for example, the main CPU 4201 turns on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Decide to set to. Also, the number of time reductions is set to 1 (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 6 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 12 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). Decide to do. When the display mode for hitting the time reduction is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163, it is possible to shift to the C time reduction game state.

In the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", it is not controlled to the C time reduction game state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy low-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 does not shift to the C time reduction game state and is high. Continue the low probability base state. In the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may not include "time saving hit".

(When the result of the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the A time saving game state are determined as follows.

In the low-accuracy low-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high-accuracy big hit), the main CPU 4201 As a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variation number is 120. Decide to set to times. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and can control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy and low base state after the jackpot game state ends. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high accuracy big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines that the number of rounds is set to 4 as the mode of the winning game state, and determines that both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set on as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time reduction number to 50 times. The main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and can control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot game state ends.

Further, in the low probability low base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 is in the hit game state. As an aspect, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set on. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and can control the jackpot game state to the low accuracy and low base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low accuracy). In the case of a big hit), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time saving flag of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to on as the mode of the subsequent gaming state. To determine. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and can control the jackpot game state to the low accuracy and high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Become.

(When the result of the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is a big hit)
In the low-accuracy low-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high-accuracy big hit), the main CPU 4201 As a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variation number is 120. Decide to set to times. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and can control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy and low base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high accuracy big hit), the main The CPU 4201 decides that the number of rounds is set to 10 as the mode of the winning game state, and decides to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to on as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time reduction number to 50 times. The main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and can control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot game state ends.

Further, in the low probability low base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 is in the hit game state. As an aspect, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set on. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and can control the jackpot game state to the low accuracy and low base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low accuracy). In the case of a big hit), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as a mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time saving flag of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to on as the mode of the subsequent gaming state. To determine. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and can control the jackpot game state to the low accuracy and high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Become.

(In the case of a small hit)
When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "small hit" (selected symbol command is "z6"), low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low In any of the base states, the main CPU 4201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 116) is opened as one mode of the small hit game state. In this case, the main CPU 4201 controls the small hit game state after deriving the above-mentioned small hit display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and controls the small hit game state after the small hit game state ends. Return to the game state just before the game.

(In case of loss)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z9"), the main CPU 4201 determines the mode of the hit game state and the subsequent game state. Do not set any of the aspects of. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 4201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 120. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 120.

[4-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 4201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start or the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 15, the description thereof will be omitted. Similarly, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 16, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state in which left-handed is a normal game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state in which right-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the main CPU 4201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start.

That is, in the low accuracy and high base state and the high accuracy and high base state, the operation frequency of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is increased, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the first starting port 4120B is increased. However, even in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 4140 by hitting right in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 15). ), The second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long time of approximately 600,000 msec. In this regard, in the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140B is increased, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 16) shows. This is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in an extremely short time of, for example, 1000 msec.

[4-6. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 121 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The hit judgment table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit judgment process of the normal symbol, that is, a random value for hit judgment of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126 (see FIG. 116). It is a table that is referred to when determining "normal symbol hit" or "loss" by lottery based on it.

As described above, the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol is a random value used in the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 extracts a random value for hit determination of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 4201 determines “normal symbol hit” or “miss” based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value. In the hit judgment table of the normal symbol, the range (width) of the hit judgment random value of the normal symbol determined as "normal symbol hit" for each state (on / off) of the time saving flag and the corresponding normal symbol The relationship with the hit judgment value data and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit judgment random value of the ordinary symbol determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined.

For example, in the low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state) in which the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 4201 has a hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol of any of 0 to 94. In that case, it is determined as "normal symbol hit", and the winning judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". Further, when the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is any of 95 to 98, the main CPU 4201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) in which the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 4201 has a random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol of 0 to 98. If is, it is determined as "normal symbol hit", and the winning judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". Further, when the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 4201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

[4-7. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 122 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126 (see FIG. 4) and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. It is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" to be attached. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a normal symbol hit symbol that is determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random value of the ordinary symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In this embodiment, there is usually one type per symbol, but a plurality of types may be provided.

According to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 122, when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. NS.

For example, in the low base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 may perform the normal symbol hit determination value regardless of whether the normal symbol symbol random value is 0 to 99. Select "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the high base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 will perform the main CPU 4201 regardless of whether the normal symbol symbol random value is 0 to 99. Select "fz1" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

[4-8. Type determination table per ordinary symbol]
FIG. 123 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets the open pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Referenced when deciding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), with the first opening time of 1000 msec and no wait time. It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined so that the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), with the first opening time of 2000 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is two patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, more opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 may be provided, and for example, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state. Further, a plurality of types of normal symbol hit selection symbol commands may be further provided, and for example, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Further, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the time-saving game state and the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

[4-9. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 124 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 4201 fluctuates the normal symbol based on the state of the time saving flag (on / off) and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126 (see FIG. 116). Determine the pattern. The random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the low base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500,000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99.

Further, in the high base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99.

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol is two patterns, but the variable display time is not limited to this. For example, more patterns of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be provided, and for example, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state. Further, a plurality of types of normal symbol hit selection symbol commands may be provided, and for example, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined according to the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Further, the variable display time pattern of the normal symbol may be determined according to the type of the time-saving game state and the type of the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command.
[4-10. Game flow]
FIG. 125 is an example of a gaming state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the initial state at the time of shipment or after the RAM is cleared is a low accuracy and low base state. The flow of the game will be described assuming that the game has started in this low probability and low base state.

[4-10-1. Game in low accuracy and low base state]
In the low probability low base state, as described above, left-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the low probability and low base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Since the electric support control is not executed in the low accuracy and low base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first starting port 4120A. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process of the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time reduction hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then ends the low probability low base state. Then, shift to the low accuracy and high base state. The winning probability of "time reduction hit" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. 118, and the variable display number (that is, the time reduction number) of the special symbol that can be executed in the low accuracy and high base state is shown in FIG. 120. 1 time, 6 times, or 12 times so as to be done.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selected symbol command is "z3") and 13% is low-accuracy, as shown in FIG. 119. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is high accuracy big hit, the main CPU 201 controls the big hit game state for 4 rounds, and after the end of the big hit game state, Shift to a high-accuracy low-base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 201 controls the big hit game state for 4 rounds and ends the big hit game state. After that, control to low accuracy and low base again.

As described above, in the low accuracy and low base state, it is configured so as not to shift to the high accuracy and high base state based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[4-10-2. Game in low accuracy and high base state]
In the low accuracy and high base state, as described above, left-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the low accuracy and high base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. In particular, since the electric support control is executed in the low accuracy and high base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first starting port 4120B. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process of the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time reduction hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then continues the low accuracy and high base state. do. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low-accuracy high-base state is C time-saving gaming state. In addition, the winning probability of "time saving hit" is about 1/6 as shown in FIG. 118. If the "time saving hit" is won in the low accuracy and high base state, the time saving game states will be duplicated unless the time saving final fluctuation is made. In this case, the concept of the variable display number (that is, the time reduction number of times) of the special symbol that can be executed in the low accuracy and high base state is as described above in the column of "duplication of time reduction game states". For example, in the case of executing the time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 4201 has a larger number of time-saving remaining times in the low-accuracy high-base state and the time-saving number of times set based on the "time-saving hit". The low accuracy and high base state is maintained until the number of time reductions of the person is exhausted. On the other hand, if the time-saving game states are not overlapped, the main CPU 4201 continues the low-accuracy high-base state until the time-saving remaining number of times in the low-accuracy high-base state is exhausted.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selected symbol command is "z3") and 13% is low-accuracy, as shown in FIG. 119. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is high accuracy big hit, the main CPU 201 controls the big hit game state for 4 rounds, and after the end of the big hit game state, Shift to a high accuracy and high base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 201 controls the big hit game state for 4 rounds and ends the big hit game state. After that, it is controlled again to a low accuracy and high base. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low-accuracy high-base state is A time-saving gaming state.

If the set number of time reductions is exhausted without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the low-accuracy high-base state and shifts to the low-accuracy low-base state.

Obtained based on the winning probability of "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the number of time savings set when "time saving hit" is won, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Considering the number of various random numbers that can be reserved, the stay rate in the low-probability high-base state is the highest among the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, the high-probability high-base state, and the high-probability low-base state. It gets higher.

[4-10-3. Game in high accuracy and high base state]
In the high-accuracy high-base state, as described above, left-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. In particular, since the electric support control is executed in the high accuracy and high base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first starting port 4120B. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process of the first special symbol.

In the high accuracy and high base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163. The previous high-accuracy and high-base state is continued without activating the new C-short game state. Therefore, the time saving game states do not overlap. When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 forcibly makes the "time saving hit" lost, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. It may be done.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 119, 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selection symbol command is "z3") and 13% is a low-accuracy jackpot ("z3"). The selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is a high-accuracy big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit game state for four rounds, and after the end of the big hit game state, Control to high accuracy and high base state again. The type of time-saving gaming state in this high-accuracy high-base state is A time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit game state for 4 rounds and ends the big hit game state. After that, it shifts to the low accuracy and high base state. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low-accuracy high-base state is A time-saving gaming state.

If the set number of time reductions is exhausted without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the high-accuracy high-base state and shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state. In this embodiment, when the high-accuracy jackpot is won in the low-accuracy high-base state and when the high-accuracy jackpot is won in the high-accuracy high-base state, the high-accuracy high-base state is controlled. In this case, the number of time reductions set is 50 times. On the other hand, the number of probability variations set is 120. Therefore, the probability variation number (for example, 70 times in this embodiment) remaining after the time reduction number is digested is controlled to the high probability and low base state.

[4-10-4. Game in high accuracy and low base state]
In the high-accuracy low-base state, as described above, right-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the high accuracy and low base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the second starting port 4140. When the game ball wins the second starting port 4140, the main CPU 4201 performs the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

In the hit determination process of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 118, the "time saving hit" is not won. Further, it is assumed that the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed due to the winning of the game ball in the first start ports 4120A and 4120B, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit". However, although the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, the high accuracy and low base state up to now is continued without operating the C time saving game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 forcibly makes the "time saving hit" lost, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. It may be done.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selected symbol command is "z7") and 13% is low-accuracy, as shown in FIG. 119. It is a big hit (the selected symbol command is "z8").

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is high accuracy big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit game state for 10 rounds, and after the end of the big hit game state, Control to high accuracy and low base state again. That is, it loops in a high-accuracy low-base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit game state for 10 rounds and ends the big hit game state. After that, shift to a low accuracy and high base.

By the way, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "small hit", as shown in FIG. 119, the small hit large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 116) is opened once. As shown in FIG. 118, the winning probability of "small hit" is, for example, approximately 1 / 1.1. Although not shown, the opening time of the small hit large winning opening 4151 in this case is, for example, 1800 msec.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, as described above, the main CPU 4201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start. Therefore, considering the probability of being distributed to the upper flow path 4107a (see FIG. 116) and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 116), etc., it is high. If you hit right in the low probability base state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value can exceed 1. That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the so-called holding ball of the player can increase according to the progress of the game. As described above, if the specification shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state when the "time-saving hit" is won in the high-accuracy low-base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time-saving hit". By not providing "", it is possible to substantially prevent the "time saving hit" from being won in the high accuracy and low base state.

On the other hand, in the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state, in which left-handed is a normal game mode, the game value paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time (for example, a prize). The expected value of (number of balls, etc.) is less than 1. That is, in these gaming states (low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the so-called holding ball of the player decreases as the game progresses. In these game states, even if the game is played in an irregular game mode (for example, right-handed) and the game ball wins in the second start opening 4140, refer to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. Since the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined, there is no actual benefit for the player.

In this embodiment, a so-called ST machine that shifts to a normal gaming state when controlled to a high-probability gaming state over a specified number of times (for example, 120 times) has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol is used. By controlling the game to a high-probability gaming state until the result of the hit determination process becomes a big hit, it may be possible to further increase the number of balls to be ejected during the small hit rush.

[4-11. Control by sub-control circuit]
The sub CPU 4301 included in the sub control circuit 4300 controls the effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 via the display control circuit 4304. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 4301 displays the same or almost the same effect image in the display area of the display device 4007 in the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state. Control to be done. By doing so, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 whether it is controlled by the control by the main CPU 4201 in the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy high base state. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the appearance from the production image.

In particular, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is on (for example, 1/200) and the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off (for example, 201 minutes) are almost the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to realize the difference in the winning probability of the big hit.

According to such a fourth pachinko gaming machine, the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state are regarded as relatively disadvantageous game states for the player, and the high-accuracy low-base state is defined as the high-accuracy low-base state. It is possible to make the gaming state relatively advantageous for the player. In particular, in the high-accuracy and low-base state, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's so-called ball holding is increased by the small hit rush.

Further, in the case of a conventional pachinko gaming machine, the stay rate in the most unfavorable gaming state among the plurality of gaming states is the highest. On the other hand, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation flag is off and the electric support control is performed among the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state. Although the low-accuracy low-base state, which is not executed, is the most disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to realize a new game property that has never been seen before, such as the highest stay rate in the low-accuracy high-base state.

Further, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit in the low accuracy low base state and the type of the big hit is a high accuracy big hit, the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state , And, among the high-accuracy and low-base states, always shift to the most advantageous high-accuracy and low-base state. Moreover, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the probability that the type of the big hit will be a high probability big hit is as high as 87%, so that it is a case where it is controlled to a low probability low base state. However, it is possible to enhance the interest.

Furthermore, in the low-accuracy low-base state, the "time-saving hit" is won in about 1/6, and the number of time-savings set in that case is in the range of 1 to 12, so the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy The main game is to go back and forth between the high base state. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a high-accuracy jackpot, the game can be advanced with the expectation that it will shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, and it will be possible to enhance the interest. Become.

Also in the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 also performs a look-ahead effect. An example of the effect of the look-ahead effect performed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described later in association with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation.

As the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel has been described as an example. Not limited to. For example, as with the second pachinko machine, it may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. , The same as the third pachinko gaming machine, it may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-kind 2-kind mixer.

[4-12. Look-ahead effect and variable pattern effect example]
Next, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, an example of the look-ahead effect performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 will be described in relation to the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. The look-ahead effect performed in the display area 7a and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation are controlled by the sub CPU 301 via the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).

FIG. 126 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from a common hit look-ahead effect mode to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect mode showing that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes to, and then the big hit system reach is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern is FIG. 68 or Corresponds to "48H" in FIG. 69. Further, as can be seen by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12), the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66), and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table (see FIG. 67). The look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of a big hit are "15H" and "35H", and the look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of a loss are "51H" and "71H".

In FIG. 126 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 show the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the reserved image is represented by an egg image imitating an egg in order to associate it with the fluctuation effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation. Then, the color of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the big hit, and the density of the pattern of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the time saving.

In FIG. 126 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 126 (a). The reserved image newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 is a common hit look-ahead effect mode, and has an expected value level of “2”.

FIG. 126 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 126 (b) is , When shifting to the second reserved area 412, the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while keeping the common system look-ahead effect form.

FIG. 126 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 126 (c) is This is an image showing that when the image is shifted to the first reserved area 411, the common system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level “3” is changed to the jackpot system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level “4”.

FIG. 126 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126 (d), and the form of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 126 (d) is It is an image which shows that it was shifted to the 0th region 410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 126 (f) is an image showing that the egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 126 (f), when the egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 hatches, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a jackpot system reach. On the other hand, if the egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into reach, and the lost image is displayed.

FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (e) show that the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation has developed into a jackpot system reach due to the hatching of the egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 of FIG. 126 (f). It is an image which shows.

FIG. 127 (a) is an image showing that the decorative symbol corresponding to the main special symbol (here, the first special symbol) is variably displayed. FIG. 127 (b) is an image showing that the decorative symbol has stopped at the reach symbol. FIG. 127 (c) is a reach effect displayed as an image showing that a bird hatched from an egg grows and flaps in the sky in the 0th region 410 of FIG. 126 (f). In this embodiment, the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (c) is a reach effect in which the expected value for the jackpot is relatively high among the plurality of reach effects. Therefore, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (c) is performed, the player's interest is enhanced. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (d), when a jackpot image indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot is displayed, the jackpot game state is controlled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (e), when the lost image indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost is confirmed and displayed, the current special symbol game ends.

FIG. 128 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and shows that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes to the form, and then the time saving hit system effect is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to “07H”, “27H”, “43H”, or “63H” in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern is FIG. 68 or Corresponds to "42H" in FIG. 69. Further, as can be seen by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12), the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66), and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table (see FIG. 67). The look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of a time saving hit are "07H" and "27H", and the look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of loss are "43H" and "63H".

In FIG. 128 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 show the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 128 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 128 (a). The reserved image newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 is a common hit look-ahead effect mode, and has an expected value level of “2”.

FIG. 128 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 128 (b) is , When shifting to the second reserved area 412, the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while keeping the common system look-ahead effect form.

FIG. 128 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 128 (c) is This is an image showing that when the image is shifted to the first reserved area 411, the common system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level “3” is changed to the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level “4”. The egg image shown in FIG. 128 (d) is an egg image of a crocodile.

FIG. 128 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128 (d), and the form of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 128 (d) is It is an image which shows that it was shifted to the 0th region 410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 128 (f) is an image showing that the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 128 (f), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 hatches, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving hit system effect. On the other hand, if the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into the time saving hit system effect, and the lost image is displayed.

In the explanation with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (FIG. 12), it was explained that the time saving hit system reach is performed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the time saving hit. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, instead of the time-saving hit system reach, a time-saving hit effect is performed in which the reach is not displayed but the expected value of the time-saving hit is high so that it can be easily distinguished from the big hit.

In FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (e), the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 410 of FIG. It is an image showing that it was done.

FIG. 129 (a) is an image showing that the decorative symbol corresponding to the main special symbol (here, the first special symbol) is variably displayed, and shows an image of three crocodiles walking. FIG. 129 (b) is an image showing that the decorative symbol on the left stopped at "5". In this embodiment, the decorative symbols normally stop in the order of left, right, and middle (other than the time-saving hit-type production), but when the time-saving hit-type production develops, the decorative symbols stop in the order of left, middle, and right. It shall be. FIG. 129 (c) is a diagram showing that the decorative symbol inside has stopped at “0”. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (d), when the decorative symbol on the right stops at "G", it is clearly shown that the game shifts to the C time saving game state of 50 games. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129 (e), when the decorative symbol on the right stops at "X", it is confirmed that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, and this special symbol game ends. do.

The images in which the eggs hatch in FIGS. 126 (f) and 128 (f) are both displayed in the 0th region 410, but instead of this, as shown in FIG. 130, for example, the eggs If the image in which the egg hatches is displayed in the substantially center of the display area 7a of the display device 7, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation may develop into a big hit system reach or a time saving system effect. It is possible to clearly inform the player and enhance the interest.

[5. Fifth pachinko machine]
Like the first pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the time saving management process of S161 described in the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIGS. 34 to 42) is also performed. The description of the same configuration and functions as the first pachinko machine will be omitted. However, in explaining the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same reference numerals as those of the first pachinko gaming machine will be used.

In addition, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed until a predetermined number of times (50 times) of variable display of the special symbol is performed, and the result of the special lottery is "big hit". This is a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine, which is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined number of times (50 times) of variable display of a special symbol is performed without becoming. Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the probability change flag is set to ON from the so-called first hit until the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times), and the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a pachinko game machine with a so-called limiter in which the probability change flag is set to OFF when it is done.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine includes a gaming board unit 10 (see FIG. 4) similar to the first pachinko gaming machine. As a result, if the opening drive of the special electric accessory 133 (shutter 134 for special electric power) enables (or easily) the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening 131 for big hits, the right region 107 flows down. Almost all of the game balls win the big hit opening 131. If it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the jackpot jackpot 131, the game ball flowing down the right area 107 does not win the jackpot jackpot 131 and is further downstream. It flows down toward the ordinary electric accessory 146 on the side and thus toward the second starting port 140B.

If the game ball is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the big hit opening 131, and the game ball is open (or easily) in the second starting port 140B. Approximately all of the game balls flowing down the right area 107 win the second starting port 140B. When both the big hit opening 131 and the second starting port 140B are closed, the game ball flowing down the right side region 107 is a small hit big prize if the small hit big winning opening 151 is open. Win a prize in mouth 151. If all of the big hit opening 131, the second starting opening 140B, and the small hit big winning opening 151 are closed, most (at least half or more) of the game balls flowing down the right area 107 are second. It is configured to win a prize at the starting port 140A.

Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, the main CPU 201 holds up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number value and normal symbol variation pattern determination random number). Further, the main CPU 201, of course, holds up to four start information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 120, and of course, the second Even when a game ball wins in the starting port 140A or the second starting port 140B, up to four starting information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the second special symbol is retained.

[5-1. Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machines related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 136. Each table shown in FIGS. 131 to 136 is stored in the main ROM 202.

[5-1-1. Random number judgment table]
FIG. 131 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the first special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss". If the second special lottery is held, it will be decided as "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 202, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or For each "1 (= on)"), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "loss judgment" The relationship with "value data") is specified. Further, as the data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 140A or the second starting port 140B, the value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)". ) ”) For each, the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ loss ”, and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit” The relationship with "judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data") is defined.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the total random number for the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 131.

Although not shown in FIG. 131, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-1-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 132 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 132, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 140A, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z2". The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA4".

[5-1-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 133 is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 133, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag) based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the probability variation flag is determined to be ON.

Regardless of whether the hit selection symbol command is "z0" to "z2", if the jackpot game state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability changes after the jackpot game state ends. The flag is set to ON. However, after the first big hit game state is over, the game is played by right-handed, so the second special lottery is held, but in this second special lottery, when the big hit is won, there is a 10% probability of 10 rounds. It will be decided in 2 rounds with a 90% probability.

Further, even if the hit selection symbol command is any of "z0" to "z2", the electric support control is not executed (the number of electric support is 0). That is, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a gaming machine in which electric support control is not executed, but is not limited to this. The electric support control is a control that enables (or facilitates) a prize for the game ball to the second starting port 140B. For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (the shutter 147 for general electric power is driven). As a result, the time during which the game ball can be opened (or easily) to the second starting port 140B), the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol are at least one of them. It is a control that changes one or more so that the second starting port 140B can be won (or easily). Therefore, when the electric support control is executed, the frequency of enabling (or easily) winning the game ball in the second starting port 140B is increased.

[5-1-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 134 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 120, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start ports 140A and 140B. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 134, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. If the result of the first special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag, the reach determination random number extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 120, and the effect. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the game balls at the second starting ports 140A and 140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the prize is won. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec. It is decided to be one of the productions D to F.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins at the second starting ports 140A and 140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the fluctuation time is determined. It is determined to be an ultra-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

When the result of the second special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and when the game ball wins the second starting ports 140A and 140B. It is determined based on the reach determination random number (only when the probability variation flag is ON) and the effect selection random number extracted in. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change is in progress. Although it may be determined to be a reach effect, in most cases, it is determined to be an ultra-fast variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec.

Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 201 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 7 (for example, the liquid crystal display device) by the sub control circuit 300 (sub CPU301).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 134 is shown for convenience for easy understanding, and the effect image displayed on the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 via the display control circuit 304 (for example, a decorative symbol). The content of the variation mode) and the sound output from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305 by the sub CPU 301 (for example, the variation sound of the decorative pattern) are shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 134, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 134 is an example, and as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, an arbitrary fluctuation time can be appropriately set according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is lost and the probability variation flag is ON, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is lost and the probability variation flag is ON. And may be configured to have the same fluctuation time (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is OFF. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be set to be short (for example, 2000 ms). Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, 4500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, and the result of the second special lottery is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The fluctuation time of the special symbol in a certain case (for example, 29500 ms) is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, 2000 ms) when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON. You may. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be the shortest (for example, 500 ms).

[5-1-5. Random number judgment table per ordinary symbol]
FIG. 135 is an example of a random number determination table per ordinary symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the ordinary lottery is performed, it is determined to be "per ordinary symbol" or "missing". In the random number determination table per ordinary symbol stored in the main ROM 202, "per ordinary symbol" or "miss" is determined as the data used for the ordinary lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the corresponding judgment value data (“normal symbol hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number is 1024. That is, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is determined by the number of judgment value data per hit of a normal symbol with respect to the range of random numbers for determining the hit of a normal symbol. The range (width) of the random number for normal symbol hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is shown as a selectivity in FIG. 135. That is, in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of about once every 43 times. It goes without saying that the selection rate shown in FIG. 135 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of about 30 to 50 times.

[5-1-6. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 136 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol using, for example, the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 136.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the result of the ordinary lottery is per ordinary symbol, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the variation pattern (01H) with a variation time of 500 msec.

Further, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing", the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol has a different variation time based on the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126. It is determined to be one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns (02H to 05H). In particular, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" and the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern is a specific random number (98,99), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec. Determined by the pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 136, the probability that the above specific pattern is determined is higher in the high setting than in the low setting by changing the random number range for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern for each set value. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined for each set value may be different.

[5-2. Game flow]
The flow of the subsequent game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF will be described. In the normal game state, as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 134), the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation time is extremely long. It is determined to be one of the fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 105 may win the first start port 120 instead of the second start ports 140A and 140B.

When the game ball wins the first start port 120 in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 131).

Even when the player hits the right side in the normal game state, when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 126 and the result of hitting the normal symbol is obtained, the normal electric accessory 146 is released. There is a possibility that the game ball will be awarded to the second starting port 140B after opening, but only one prize ball will be paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 140B. Further, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 140A without opening the ordinary electric accessory 146, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 140A. Further, when the game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and 140B, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time, so that the small hit large winning opening 151 is used. The frequency of opening is extremely low. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and B. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 120 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a normal symbol hit (the opening probability of the normal electric accessory 146) is high (see FIG. 135), and the normal lottery result will be a normal symbol hit. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is relatively short (see FIG. 136), when the player strikes right, the ordinary electric accessory 146 is in a state of being considerably opened. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 126 is likely to win the second starting port 140B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, it is distributed downstream from the second starting port 140B. It is unlikely that a game ball will flow into the large winning opening 151 for small hits. Further, even if the result of the normal lottery is lost in the normal game state and the normal electric accessory 146 is not opened, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. Is extremely long, so it is still difficult to get a ball from a small hit.

The large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be different large winning openings or may be the same large winning opening. Further, the arrangement position of the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit can be appropriately designed. For example, the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 146, and the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit may be provided upstream of the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, both the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream from the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, a large winning opening (combined large winning opening) that opens at the time of a big hit or a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, in this embodiment, a game ball that does not win the big winning opening that opens at the time of a small hit, a game ball that does not win the big winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit, and a second starting opening 140B are won. A second starting port 140A (a starting port for special drawing 2 in which an ordinary electric accessory is not provided) is provided so that a game ball or the like that did not exist can win a prize. The second starting port 140A is arranged downstream from the normal electric accessory 146 and downstream from the large winning opening that opens at the time of a small hit, or opens at the time of a small hit with the ordinary electric accessory 146. It is possible to assume the distance between the winning opening and the winning opening. Even when such a second starting port 140A is arranged, the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be used in combination. In addition, in a mode in which the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit is provided downstream from the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit, the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit and the opening at the time of a big hit are opened. It is possible to assume a case where the second starting port 140A is arranged between the large winning opening and the large winning opening, or a case where the second starting port 140A is arranged downstream from the large winning opening that is opened at the time of a big hit. Is. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the starting port for special drawing 2 (second starting port 140B) is provided as the starting port provided with the ordinary electric accessory is described, but the ordinary electric accessory is provided. As the starting port provided with the above, the starting port for FIG. 1 may be provided. For example, separately from the first starting port 120A (starting port for special figure 1 in which the ordinary electric accessory is not provided), the first starting port 120B (starting for special figure 1 in which the ordinary electric accessory is provided) The mouth) may be arranged.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 201 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 132). After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 133), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined hit time selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, since the big hit opening 131 is arranged in the right side area 107, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit game state.

Next, the game state after the big hit game state based on the so-called first hit is completed will be described.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the electric support control is not executed, and the probability change flag is set to ON whenever the so-called first hit-based jackpot game state ends, so that the first hit-based jackpot game state ends. After that, the main CPU 201 controls the high accuracy and low base state. In this high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec. (See Fig. 134), the game is played by hitting right.

In the high-accuracy low-base state after the big hit game state based on the first hit is completed, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be super-fast fluctuation with a high probability and the small hit is derived, so the big prize for the small hit The mouth 151 is repeatedly opened at an extremely high frequency as compared with the normal gaming state. However, when the result of the ordinary lottery is per ordinary symbol, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the variation pattern of the variation time of 500 msec. Further, since most of the right-handed game balls pass through the passing gate 126 and continuously hit the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 and the normal electric shutter 147 are almost fully opened. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is a normal symbol hit, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls win the second starting port 140B, so even if it is a small hit large winning opening. Even if 151 is opened frequently, the winning of the small hit large winning opening 151 is hindered. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the second starting port 140B is one.

On the other hand, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10000 msec, 20000 msec, 30000 msec and 600,000 msec. Since the main CPU 201 stops the variable display of the normal symbol and opens the normal electric accessory 146 and thus the normal electric shutter 147 based on the derivation of the mode indicating the normal symbol hit, the normal symbol is variablely displayed. During this period, or when the normal symbol hit is not derived even if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, the normal electric accessory 146 is not released. Therefore, while the ordinary electric accessory 146 is closed, the winning of the small hit large winning opening 151 is not hindered, and most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 151. Become. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit large prize opening 151 is 10 as described above. Therefore, in a high-accuracy low-base state in which the result of the normal lottery can be determined to be a normal loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the ball output increase speed increases as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol increases.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time is longer until the jackpot game state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is a game-like nature such as whether or not it is possible to draw a fluctuation pattern of.

In such a fifth pachinko machine, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never lost during one high-accuracy low-base state, or the result of the normal lottery is only once. Even so, there are various patterns such as when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 10000 msec, or when the result of the normal lottery is twice normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec both times. Can occur.

Therefore, according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, a simple configuration is provided in which a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times of the normal symbols are provided, which is different from the jackpot game state. To provide an unprecedented new gameplay that has made it possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (high accuracy and low base state) in various ball output increase patterns as a high accuracy and low base state that is advantageous to the player. Is possible, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, when the result of the normal lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is the normal loss, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 that has received the normal symbol variation pattern command executes the effect based on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. That is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10,000 msec, when it is 20000 msec, and when it is 30,000 msec, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained differs depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Then, an effect that can grasp the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained) may be executed. For example, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10000 msec, an effect such as "per round!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 20000 msec, the effect such as "per 2 rounds!" Is executed. When the fluctuation time of the pattern is 30,000 msec, an effect such as "per 3 rounds!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 600,000 msec, an effect such as "super hit" is executed. In this way, when an advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1 is executed, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , It becomes possible to enhance the interest.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 301 include a display effect displayed on the display device 7 via the display control circuit 304, a sound effect output from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305, and an LED control circuit 306. At least one or more of the light emitting effect of the LED group 46 executed via the effect and the operation effect of the effect group 58 executed via the accessory control circuit 307 correspond.

By the way, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, for example, before the fluctuation of the normal symbol is completed, for example, in the second special lottery. It is possible that the result will be a "big hit" and the game will be controlled to a big hit game state. Furthermore, since the time controlled to the jackpot gaming state is approximately 180,000 to 300,000 msec, even after the jackpot gaming state ends, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with a fluctuation time of 600,000 msec continues without ending. Can occur. As described above, since the ordinary electric accessory 146 is not opened while the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 146 does not hinder the winning of the small hit large winning opening 151 and is hit right. Most of the game balls will win the big prize opening 151 for small hits. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even if the jackpot game state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbol ends, it is normal when the jackpot game state ends. If the fluctuation display of the symbol continues without stopping, even if the result of the normal lottery does not become "normal loss" in the game state after the jackpot game state ends, the advantageous game state immediately after the jackpot game state ends. It is possible to enhance the game interest while being controlled to the jackpot game state. For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot gaming state of, for example, 300,000 msec is started after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, approximately 300,000 msec after the end of the jackpot gaming state is for small hits. You can win as many prizes as you like in the large prize opening 151, and you will be able to enhance your interest.

In this embodiment, it is described that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is consumed even in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, but in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is not digested (the lapse of the fluctuation time is stopped). For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot game state starts when 300,000 msec has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the jackpot game state ends and then reaches 300,000 msec. It is also possible to continue the fluctuation of the normal symbol (during the big hit game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuation does not decrease).

Although the electric support control is not executed in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the present invention is also applied to the pachinko gaming machine in which the electric support control is executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed. be able to. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even though the electric support control is executed in the game state after the jackpot game state ends, It is possible to cause that most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 151.

<Transition flow of production mode>
FIG. 137 (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of the effect mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 137 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect mode (sub-game state) as shown in FIG. 137 (a) is managed by the sub-control circuit 300. As the production mode, a normal mode, a first hit mode, a probability variation mode, and a bonus mode are provided.

More specifically with reference to FIGS. 137 (a) and 137 (b), when the big hit game state starts in the normal mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the normal mode to the first hit mode. (See migration condition (1)).

When the big hit game state ends in the first hit mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the first hit mode to the probability variation mode (see the transition condition (2)). When the variation display (special symbol variation) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the probability variation mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the probability variation mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)). ..

When the jackpot gaming state starts in the probabilistic mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the probabilistic mode to the bonus mode (see the transition condition (4)). Further, in the probability variation mode, when the variation display of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol loss length variation) by the variation pattern “05H” (see FIG. 136) starts, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the probability variation mode to the bonus mode. (Refer to the transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is completed in the bonus mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (see transition condition (5)). Further, when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot game states executed from the first hit is less than a predetermined number of times (5 times) (if the limiter has not been reached), the sub control circuit 300 , Shift the production mode from the bonus mode to the probability variation mode (see transition condition (5)). In addition, if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being executed when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, the bonus mode is maintained, and when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation ends in the bonus mode, the jackpot game state is in progress. If there is, you may keep the bonus mode.

When the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot game states executed from the first hit is a predetermined number (5 times) (if the limiter is reached), the sub control circuit 300 is in the bonus mode. Shifts the production mode from to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

The normal mode is an effect mode controlled in the normal gaming state. In the normal mode, the effect stage is managed by the sub control circuit 300. As the production stage, a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage are provided. Each production stage will be described in detail later.

Further, although not shown, a special effect mode may be provided as a normal mode (effect mode controlled in a normal game state). The special effect mode can be an effect mode in which the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is controlled a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the bonus mode ends.

<Lottery process for the first production stage notice>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a first production stage notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the lottery process for the first effect stage notice shown in FIG. 138, after the game ball wins the first start port 120 in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)), the special symbol change related to the start prize is generated. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) at the time of starting. The sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the first production stage notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo continuous stage production outline lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the outline of the effect performed during the special symbol variation related to the first start opening winning based on the sub variation pattern by performing a lottery based on the random number value. Although the details will be described later, the sub CPU 301 performs a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation related to the first start opening winning before the first production stage notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 138 is started. I have decided. The sub-variation pattern contains information about the pseudo-continuous production.

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped) between the time when the special symbol is changed and displayed based on one start memory and the time when the special symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. .. The state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbol is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the display is completely stopped. In the present specification, the pseudo-ream effect may be simply referred to as "pseudo-ream", and the effect in which the pseudo-ream does not occur may be referred to as "no pseudo-ream". As the pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display is generated once and a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display is generated twice are provided. The pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs once is referred to as "pseudo 2", and the pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs twice is referred to as "pseudo 3".

In "pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol occurs once, the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the decoration is performed. The symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In "pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol occurs once, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the second time. Temporary stop display is generated, and the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the third pseudo variable display is performed). The stage from the start of the first temporary stop display to the occurrence of the second temporary stop display is called "pseudo 1", and the stage from the start of the second pseudo variable display to the occurrence of the second temporary stop display is "pseudo 1". It is called "2", and the stage after the start of the third pseudo fluctuation display may be called "pseudo 3". Further, in the effect of "no pseudo", the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as "pseudo 1".

The sub-variation pattern includes information indicating whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, information indicating the number of occurrences of the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol (how far the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and information regarding the pseudo-continuous effect. , Contains information that indicates the outline of the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, a sub-variation pattern that includes information that "pseudo 1" is a 20-second production, "pseudo 2" is a 16-second production, and "pseudo 3" develops after the reach is established and leads to the latter half of the super reach. When is determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 301 uses what kind of effect (while the decorative icon is fluctuating over 20 seconds) in "pseudo 1" to be described later as "bell". An overview of the effect, such as whether to stop the icon or what kind of effect to stop the "watermelon" icon, which will be described later, in "Pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern is changing for 16 seconds). decide. As a result, the outline of the production at each stage and the final variation in the pseudo-ream is determined.

As the outline of the production performed at each stage in the pseudo continuous production, for example, a [24] 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, a [24] 6-second production (bonus) pattern, and the like are provided. [24] In the 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, after 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, the tempai has been reached, and then 24 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol 22 seconds. The icon is displayed over a time point, and then a notice is generated after the icon is stopped for 4 seconds (see, for example, the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 144). [24] In the 6-second effect (bonus) pattern, after 6 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, the effect is successful and 22 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The icon is displayed for 24 seconds from the elapsed time, and then a notice is generated after the icon is stopped for 4 seconds (see, for example, the effect number "76" shown in FIG. 150).

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect intensity lottery process (step S9002). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect intensity at each stage of the pseudo-ream based on the sub-variation pattern by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Specifically, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo-less" is determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and determines the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 2". If so, the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and the effect intensity for pseudo 2 are determined, and if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 3" is determined, the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and pseudo are determined. The effect strength for 2 and the effect intensity for pseudo 3 are determined. The effect intensity is an index showing the degree of expectation of the effect performed at each stage of the pseudo-ream. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the effect intensity, and the higher the level, the easier it is to perform an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2 is set to be equal to or higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 1, and the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 3 is equal to or higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2. Is set to.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9003). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9004). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9005). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

When it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9005 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (step S9006). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

When it is determined in step S9003 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9006 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (step S9007). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. After executing the process of step S9007, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-three variable main notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 139 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 3 variation main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 3 variation main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 138 (step S9011). ). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the jackpot advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot notice effects that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3", a plurality of types of jackpot notice effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, fourth notice effect, etc.) ) Is provided. In addition, a plurality of production contents are provided as the contents of each jackpot notice production. For example, as the contents of the first notice effect, the first notice effect content A, the first notice effect content B, the first notice effect content C, the first notice effect content D, and the like are provided. The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described in detail later.

In the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 301 determines one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of big hit notice effects as the pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content, and also determines the big hit notice effect. As the content, one production content (for example, the first notice production content A) is determined. After that, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 138), prior to performing the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 139, a process of determining the outline of the reach effect is performed. May be good. In the reach effect, the decorative design is displayed in the reach mode (decorative design located on the left side (left decorative design), decorative design located on the right side (right decorative design), and decorative design located in the center (medium decorative design). ), Two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the remaining one decorative symbol is variablely displayed). In this case, in the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 301 may determine the effect content whose effect time is shorter than the time from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the establishment of the reach. For example, when there is an effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds and an effect content that takes 10 seconds or more to complete, from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the reach is established. When the reach effect is determined so that the time is 10 seconds, the pseudo 3 variable main notice content may be configured so that the effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds can be determined. ..

<Pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 2 variation main notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 140 is a process performed in the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 2 variation main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 sets the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 2 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 138. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the type of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the jackpot advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot advance notice production that can be performed at the "pseudo 2" stage, the same type of jackpot advance notice effect as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage (first notice effect, second notice effect, The third notice production, the fourth notice production, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, the same content as the content of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 301 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from a plurality of types of big hit notice effects (for example, the first notice effect) as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional), and the big hit. One effect content (for example, the first advance notice effect content B) is selected as the content of the advance notice effect. The pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) selected here is tentative, and the pseudo 2 variable main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect (step S9022). The specific jackpot notice production is a big hit notice production in which the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-ren has a story, and a predetermined story is developed as the stages of the pseudo-ren progress. be. For example, the first notice effect, which is one of the specific jackpot notice effects, is an effect in which the characters have a conversation, and the lines of the characters emitted at each stage in the pseudo-ren are associated with each other. For example, the conversation content in "pseudo 3" is based on the conversation content in "pseudo 2", so that the conversation progresses as the stage of the pseudo-ream progresses. ing. The conversation content is set as an index showing the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this embodiment, as a specific jackpot notice effect, a fifth notice effect is provided in addition to the first notice effect. On the other hand, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect do not correspond to the specific jackpot advance notice effect.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 301 performs the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of the effect is the same as the type of the jackpot advance notice effect (see step S9011 in FIG. 139) determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content are both in the first notice effect. In some cases, the sub CPU 301 considers these types to be the same. On the other hand, one of the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional) is the first notice effect. If the other is the fifth notice effect, the sub CPU 301 considers that these types are different. If the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 is selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined that the type of is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the jackpot notice effect is the same as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content. The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo-2 variable main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each production content (conversation content) before replacement, the production content after replacement (already) with respect to the conversation content (pseudo 3 variable main notice content) that has already been determined. Conversational content that can be selected for the determined pseudo-3 variable main notice content) is specified. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first notice effect is determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional), when the first notice effect is selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional), the "pseudo 2" is performed. The conversation content should be comfortable with the conversation content in "Pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation of the conversation content in "Pseudo 2" should be higher than the expectation of the conversation content in "Pseudo 3". It is possible to make adjustments. In the process of step S9024, the sub CPU 301 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9022 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9023. When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) selected in step S9021. ) Is determined as the formal pseudo-2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 141 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 sets the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 1 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 138. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby performing a type of jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "pseudo-less" effect, and the jackpot advance notice. Determine the content of the production. In this embodiment, as the jackpot advance notice production that can be performed at the "pseudo 1" stage, the same type of jackpot advance notice effect as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage (first notice effect, second notice effect, The third notice production, the fourth notice production, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, the same content as the content of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9031, the sub CPU 301 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from a plurality of types of big hit notice effects (for example, the first notice effect) as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content (provisional), and the big hit. One effect content (for example, the first advance notice effect content C) is selected as the content of the advance notice effect. The pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) selected here is tentative, and the pseudo 1 variable main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9034 and step S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect (step S9032). As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect and the fifth notice effect are provided as specific jackpot notice effects.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 301 performs the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of the effect is the same as the type of the jackpot advance notice effect (see steps S9024 and S9025 in FIG. 140) determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (step S9033). In this process, when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur (when the process of step S9006 of FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 has the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional). , Pseudo 2 It is judged that it is not the same as the type of big hit notice effect determined as the main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 The change main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 change main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, as the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the conversation content that has already been determined is the pseudo-2 variable main notice content. In the process of step S9034, the sub CPU 301 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined in step S9033 that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 301 determines. Whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 139). Is determined (step S9035). In this process, when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur or the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 uses the pseudo 1 variable main notice content. It is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as (tentative) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, as the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the conversation content already determined is the pseudo-3 variable main notice content. In the process of step S9036, the sub CPU 301 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9032 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9035. When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional 1 variable main notice content) selected in step S9031. ) Is determined as the formal pseudo-2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the process of step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Big hit notice production (only for the first production stage)>
As described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", respectively. Can occur in. For example, the first notice effect is generated at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", the second notice effect is generated at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", or "pseudo". The third notice effect occurs at all stages of "1" to "pseudo 3", the fourth notice effect occurs at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and "pseudo 1" and "pseudo 3" The first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2" and the second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3", or the second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1" and "pseudo 2" and the third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3". An effect is generated, a first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1", a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", and a first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1". A second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2", and a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3".

As described above, the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed in each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3" is determined regardless of the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed in the other stages. However, when the first notice effect is performed over a plurality of stages, the degree of expectation decreases as the pseudo-ren stage progresses so that the conversation content generated in these first notice effects does not feel strange. Predetermined control is being performed (see step S9024 in FIG. 140 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 141).

Here, in this embodiment, an icon may be displayed as the stage in the pseudo-continuous production progresses. For example, when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", it shifts to "pseudo 2", when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3", or "pseudo 3". When the "cherry" icon is displayed in "3", it shifts to super reach (the one with a relatively high expectation of a big hit among the reach). Based on the above, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described below.

<First notice production>
FIG. 142A is a diagram showing a flow of the first notice effect. FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect.

The first notice effect shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)).

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "1", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed. After being displayed in 7, it is a production that fades out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "2", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed. It is displayed on the display device 7, and the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the second stage from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed. , It is a production that becomes a fade-out. The effect corresponding to the effect number "3" is a display device in which the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed. It is displayed on the display device 7, and the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the second stage from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the symbol to the time when 13.5 seconds have passed, the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 as the conversation for the third stage, and then the fading out is performed. be.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "4", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. After being displayed on 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and then, from the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol to the time when 13.5 seconds have passed, the conversation for the second stage or As a conversation for the third stage, the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7, and the effect is faded out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 54. The button effective time is set from the time when 8 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. When the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, a predetermined character is used as a conversation for the second stage or a conversation for the third stage for 3.5 seconds from the time when the effect button 54 is operated. May be displayed on the display device 7. Further, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button effective time, the dialogue of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the display device 7.

In the production corresponding to the production number "5", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. After being displayed on the display device 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from 10 seconds to 13 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. It is a production. The button effective time is set from the time when 8 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. When the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 7 from the time when the effect button 54 is operated. At this time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 7 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed, regardless of the timing when the effect button 54 is operated. Further, even if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button effective time, the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 12 seconds have passed. You may do so. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

A plurality of conversation contents (lines) are provided for each of the conversation for the first stage, the conversation for the second stage, and the conversation for the third stage, and one conversation content is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined character color, and is displayed on the display device 7 in the corresponding character color. The character color is associated with the jackpot expectation. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when a pseudo-ream does not occur, and the conversation content is displayed in purple, suggesting that a pseudo-ream occurs. .. In addition, when super reach (SP) occurs, the expectation of big hits is higher than when super reach does not occur, but when the conversation content is displayed in red, super reach occurs (than purple). Is also highly expected). In addition, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in gold suggests that the probability of being a big hit is very high (higher expectations than red). In addition, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in rainbow color suggests that it has been confirmed that it is a big hit (premier SP will occur) (higher expectations than gold). The conversation content is displayed in any of the default colors, purple, red, and gold for the first-stage conversation, and the default color, purple, and red for the second-stage conversation. , And, the conversation content is displayed in any of the colors of gold, and as the conversation for the third stage, the conversation content is displayed in any of the colors of red, gold, and rainbow.

As the icons that can be displayed in the first notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon ("premium" icon), and a second specific icon are provided. In this embodiment, the "bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 1", and when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", it shifts to "pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second notice production>
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a flow of the second notice effect. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second notice effect. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The second notice effect shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "11" is performed after the cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 1.5 seconds have passed to the time when 3 seconds have passed. It is a production that becomes a fade-out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a manner as if the screen of the display device 7 is rotated counterclockwise from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of This is an effect in which the item is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when .5 seconds have passed to the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. Items that can be displayed here include at least items that suggest that reach will occur, at least items that suggest that super reach will occur, items that at least suggest that specific super reach will occur, and items that are not good. Can be mentioned.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point in which 8 seconds have passed, and the mission The image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 7, and the image corresponding to the failure of the mission result is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. It is an effect that is displayed on the device 7 and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a manner as if the screen of the display device 7 is rotated counterclockwise from the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point in which 8 seconds have passed, and the mission The image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 7, and the image corresponding to the success of the mission result is displayed from the time when 19 seconds have passed to the time when 22 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. It is an effect that is displayed on the display device 7 and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 22 seconds have passed since the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 24 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later. In addition, during the execution of the mission, the reward (icon) given when the mission is successful is suggested, and the icon will be definitively displayed when the mission is successful.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "15", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of This is an effect in which reliability items are displayed on the display device 7 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variablely displayed from the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed. As reliability items, a plurality of items having different jackpot expectations (for example, a first item with a low jackpot expectation, a second item with a medium jackpot expectation, and a third item with a high jackpot expectation). Etc.) are provided. For example, in the case of loss, the first item is easily selected, and in the case of a big hit, the third item is easily selected. By displaying one of these items, the jackpot expectation is suggested.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "16", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the The icon suggestion type item is displayed on the display device 7 as a result of the roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variablely displayed from the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, and then from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is an effect in which the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 10 seconds have passed to the time when 12 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

Icon suggestion items include "bell" icon stop suggestion item, "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item, "cherry" icon stop suggestion item, first specific icon stop suggestion item, and second specific icon stop suggestion item. Has been done. When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately after. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately after. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately after.

The icons that can be displayed in the second notice effect include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon. .. The "bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon are icons that can be displayed even in the first notice production, and these icons are as described above. Is. In the second notice effect, in addition to these icons, a third specific icon can be displayed. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the process shifts to the third specific super reach.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated clockwise from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (resumes) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. This is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated clockwise from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (resumes) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "19", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, an image related to the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, 12 This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the failure of the result of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 7 over the elapsed seconds.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, an image related to the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, 12 An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 7 over a period of seconds, and then from 12 seconds to 14 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is an effect in which the above-mentioned reliability items are displayed on the display device 7.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "21", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, an image related to the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, 12 An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 7 over the time of seconds, and from the time of 12 seconds to the time of 14 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. , The above-mentioned icon suggestion item is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon corresponding to the icon suggestion item is displayed on the display device from 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is the effect displayed in 7. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated upward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated upward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "24", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 9 seconds have passed, the image related to the start of the continuous striking effect is displayed on the display device 7, and when 9 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern and 15 seconds have passed (effect button). The button image is displayed on the display device 7 for 54 consecutive hits), and the result of the repeated hits effect fails from 15 seconds to 18 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. An image corresponding to the situation is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "25", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 9 seconds have passed, the image related to the start of the continuous striking effect is displayed on the display device 7, and when 9 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern and 15 seconds have passed (effect button). The button image is displayed on the display device 7 for 54 consecutive hits), and the result of the repeated hits effect is successful from 15 seconds to 18 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The image corresponding to the change is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 18 seconds have passed and 20 seconds have passed. be. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous striking effect, a reward (icon) given when the continuous striking effect is successful is suggested, and the icon is definitively displayed when the continuous striking effect is successful.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated downward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated downward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

FIG. 145 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “24” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 145 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, and then 2 seconds. It stops over and the design is confirmed. As a result, from the player's point of view, when the second notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, each decorative symbol appears to be stopped. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "24".

FIG. 145 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “25” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. Figure 145
In the example shown in (b), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 20 seconds have elapsed. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "25".

FIG. 145 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “13”, “17”, “22”, and “26” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 145 (c), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 22 seconds have elapsed, and then 2 seconds. It stops over and the design is confirmed. As a result, from the player's point of view, when the second notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, each decorative symbol appears to be stopped. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26".

FIG. 145 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “14”, “18”, “23”, and “27” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 145 (d), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 24 seconds have elapsed. .. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27".

<Third notice production>
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a flow of the third notice effect. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third notice effect. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The third notice effect shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)).

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "pseudo 2". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". As the icons that can be displayed in the third notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. In the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

In "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", an enemy attack effect is performed. In the enemy attack effect, the three numerical symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped, and each time the continuous roll is stopped and displayed, the ally character attacks the enemy character. As continuous rolls (combination of three number symbols), "1 ・ 2 ・ 2", "2 ・ 3 ・ 3", "3 ・ 4 ・ 4", "4 ・ 5 ・ 5", "5.6"・ 6 ”,“ 6 ・ 7 ・ 7 ”, and“ 7 ・ 1 ・ 1 ”are provided. When a friendly character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's health gauge decreases. The health gauge suggests the possibility of acquiring the icon. If the enemy character collapses in conjunction with whether or not the icon stops (icon stop fanning), situations such as icon acquisition and tempai (expansion to SP) will be given to the player. .. In addition, when the enemy character is defeated, a predetermined character may be displayed, and the color of the character suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "41" is an effect that fades out after the image related to the title completion fanning of the third notice effect is displayed on the display device 7. In the production corresponding to the production number "42", after the image related to the title completion fan of the third notice production is displayed on the display device 7, the image corresponding to the success of the title completion fan is displayed on the display device 7. After that, the "bell" icon is definitively displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

There are four timings at which the title completion can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1 second has passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), the title completion fanning is started from the time when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. When the image related to the title is displayed on the display device 7 (timing 2), and when the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 9 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 3). The case where the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the display device 7 (timing 4) is provided from the time when 13 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. The title completion fanning occurs at one of these four timings.

In the production corresponding to the production number "43", after the enemy attack production is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the "watermelon" icon is confirmed on the display device 7. It is an effect that is displayed (stopped). If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "44", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, the image corresponding to the failure of the icon stop fanning is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 displays the wipe. It is a production that returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "45", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the "watermelon" icon is definitively displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "46", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. An image displayed on the device 7 and corresponding to the failure of the icon stop fanning is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "47", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. This is an effect that is displayed on the device 7 and then the "watermelon" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "48", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. It is an effect that is displayed on the device 7, and then a numerical symbol is displayed on the display device 7 in a tempai manner, and develops into a third specific super reach (first half) through a predetermined connecting effect.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "49", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the "cherry" icon is confirmed on the display device 7. It is an effect that is displayed (stopped). If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "50", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the "cherry" icon is definitively displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "51", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. This is an effect that is displayed on the device 7 and then the "cherry" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "52", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 7. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. It is an effect that is displayed on the device 7, and then a numerical symbol is displayed on the display device 7 in a tempai manner, and develops into a third specific super reach (second half) through a predetermined connecting effect.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "49" to "52", the image related to the icon stop fan (first time), the icon stop fan (second time), or the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed on the display device 7. When displayed in, the button image is also displayed on the display device 7. As a result, the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted. When the button image is displayed, a predetermined button effective time (for example, 2 seconds in which the image related to the icon stop fanning is displayed ... See FIG. 147) is set. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, the display following the icon stop fanning is displayed at the time when the effect button 54 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation). (Display of "cherry" icon, display of continuous rolls, or display of tempai with number pattern) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), the display following the icon stop fanning (icon display, continuation) Display of the outcome or tempai display of the number pattern) is performed. Such a button image is not displayed in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "43" to "48", even if the production button 54 is operated while the image related to the icon stop fanning is displayed, the operation is triggered (icon). Before the expiration of 2 seconds when the image related to the stop fan is displayed), the display following the icon stop fan (display of "cherry" icon, display of continuous roll, or tempai display of number pattern) is performed. There is no. In addition, when the enemy attack effect starts, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by operating a predetermined movable accessory. The relationship between the operation mode of the movable accessory and the jackpot expectation is the same as the notice after the icon is stopped, which will be described later.

FIG. 148 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 2 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1).

FIG. 148 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 16 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (b), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2).

FIG. 148 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 3) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (c), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 10.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3).

FIG. 148 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 4) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (d), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 14.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4).

The "stop" of the decorative symbol in FIG. 148 means a temporary stop display. As described above, the state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbol is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the display is completely stopped.

<4th notice production>
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a flow of the fourth notice effect. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth notice effect. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The fourth notice effect shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)).

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "77" can occur in "pseudo 2" or "pseudo 3". As the icons that can be displayed in the fourth notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. In the fourth notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "71", the image related to whether or not the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol and the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) is displayed. After being displayed on the display device 7, an image corresponding to the failure of the four symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the production corresponding to the production number "72", the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol, and the image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 7. After being displayed, the image corresponding to the success of the four symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 7, the image that becomes normal reach in the dedicated background state after the success is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7. This is the effect displayed in 7. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

4 There are two timings as the timings at which the symbol tempai fanning can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the 4 symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and from the time when 7 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative design. 4 A case where an image related to the symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 7 (timing 2) is provided. The four-symbol tempai tenpai occurs at one of these two timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "73" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The effect corresponding to the effect number "74" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 7, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed. Is an effect displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "75" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 7, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" is displayed. An image related to whether or not the symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and a fanning whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning). This is an effect in which an image related to (7 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "76" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 7, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" is displayed. An image related to whether or not the symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) is displayed. An image related to (7 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "7" symbol slips are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to fanning which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol becomes the tempai. Is displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "77" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 7, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" is displayed. An image related to whether or not the symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and a fanning whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning). An image related to (7 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "7" symbol slips are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to fanning which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol becomes the tempai. Is displayed on the display device 7, and then any one of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol is displayed on the display device 7 in a tempai manner, and develops into the third specific super reach through a predetermined connecting effect. It is a production to do.

In "Pseudo 1", after the notice is given after the icon is stopped via the production corresponding to the production number "72", the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" is performed in "Pseudo 2". In this case, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" in "pseudo 2", the "4" symbol became a tempai as a result of the production in "pseudo 1" before the dedicated background state was set. The background behind is displayed. In addition, after a notice is given after the icon is stopped via any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "76" in "pseudo 2", the effect number "73" is used in "pseudo 3". When the production corresponding to "pseudo 3" is performed, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" in "pseudo 3", the production in "pseudo 2" is performed before the dedicated background state is set. As a result, the background after the "4" symbol becomes a tempai is displayed.

FIG. 151 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “71” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (a), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then further. It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. As a result, the player determines the sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds after the fourth advance notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, which is the same as the default variation. Each decorative pattern will appear to fluctuate depending on the aspect. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1). The default fluctuation will be described later.

FIG. 151 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “71” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and then shakes for 9 seconds. Further, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 22 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have passed, sways for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, and stops for 1 second. After shaking for 2 seconds, it fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2).

FIG. 151 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (c), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 14 seconds have elapsed, then operates at a speed of one frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1).

FIG. 151 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (d), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and lasts for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, then operates at a speed of one frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2).

<Notice after icon stop>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the effect content of the notice after the icon is stopped. FIGS. 153 and 154 are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is an effect performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the first mode. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is an effect performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the second mode.

The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" is an effect performed after the "cherry" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94" is an effect performed after the first specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94", a third connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95" is an effect performed after the second specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96" is an effect performed after the third specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth connecting effect is performed. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect numbers "93" to "96", the predetermined movable accessory does not operate.

Note that "the icon has stopped (confirmedly displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative design. As explained in detail in this embodiment, the icon serves as a mark indicating that the next stage in the pseudo-ream or super reach is developed. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot determination has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol changes. It is in the displayed state. In addition, when one icon is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that the icon is temporarily displayed before the display is confirmed. Therefore, in the above, the expression "confirmedly displayed" is used. It is clarified that it is not such a provisional display. "Temporary display" means that the icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that one icon will be confirmed and displayed (an effect that encourages the icon to be stopped and displayed). Is done).

FIG. 153 (a) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “91” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights are turned on for 1 second and the predetermined movement is performed for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first aspect, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. Become. In addition, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated by displaying the "watermelon" icon in "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3" is 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ". That is, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo-ream.

FIG. 153 (b) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “92” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights are turned on for 1 second, and the predetermined one is set for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second aspect, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. Become. In addition, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "watermelon" icon in "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3" is 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ". That is, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo-ream.

A predetermined movable accessory is configured to be capable of being displaced between a first state, a second state and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, the predetermined movable accessory goes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state by being displaced from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state. It is possible. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (one-step displacement). On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (two-step displacement). The first state is a state in which the predetermined movable accessory is stored in the predetermined position, and when the advance notice ends after the icon is stopped, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

Further, during the time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91". It's longer than the time I'm there. The time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating corresponds to the jackpot expectation, and the longer the time, the higher the jackpot expectation. The jackpot expectation degree is the probability that the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is a jackpot, and is an index showing how much the jackpot can be expected when the effect occurs. As a result, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated, a big hit is given to the player as compared with the case where the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated. You can have a great sense of expectation for.

FIG. 154 (a) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “93” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The second connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in "pseudo 3", the predetermined super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ..

FIG. 154 (b) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “94” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The third connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94" is generated by displaying the first specific icon, the first specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

FIG. 154 (c) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “95” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The fourth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95" is generated by displaying the second specific icon, the second specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

FIG. 154 (d) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “96” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The fifth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

In the first connecting effect, the second connecting effect, the third connecting effect, the fourth connecting effect, and the fifth connecting effect, the background images (first background image to fifth background image) are different from each other. ) Is displayed on the display device 7. When the "bell" icon is displayed and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed, basically the same connecting effect (first connecting effect) is performed, but as the first connecting effect, the first A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the first connection effect (common) is performed in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon. On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the third notice effect, the first connection effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first joint effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first joint effect (common). In the third notice effect, a background image different from the usual one is displayed as the background image for the third notice effect, but the background image dedicated to the third notice effect is also adopted as the background image displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped. doing. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the normal background image being displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped, which occurs following the third notice effect.

Similarly, as the second connecting effect, a second connecting effect (common) and a second connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the second connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the third notice effect, the second connection effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second joint effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second joint effect (common). As described above, in the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed, so that the third connection effect, the fourth connection effect, and the third As for the connecting effect of 5, there is no effect dedicated to the third notice effect.

In the present specification, the “connecting effect” refers to an effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap time between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first connecting effect is a connecting effect dedicated to the case where the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed. Further, the second connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed, and the third connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the first specific icon is displayed. The connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the second specific icon is displayed, and the fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect dedicated when the third specific icon is displayed.

Further, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first connecting effect is performed as a notice after the icon is stopped, but the background image displayed at that time is the first connecting effect ( It is slightly different from the background image displayed in (common). Similarly, when the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the second connection effect is performed as a notice after the icon is stopped, but the background image displayed at that time is the second. It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the joint effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle between a friendly character (first friendly character) and an enemy character is performed. If the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the process shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). If the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the process shifts to the predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can occur only in the first production stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the big hit notice effect, the process shifts to the same super reach (predetermined super reach) regardless of the type of the big hit notice effect. In a predetermined super reach, another ally character participates in one ally character. The first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage are each associated with a main ally character (a ally character with a high frequency of appearance), and the first production stage is basically the first. One ally character appears, the second ally character basically appears in the second production stage, and the third ally character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (friend characters) appearing in the above-mentioned first notice effect, second notice effect, and third notice effect are all first ally characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, the second ally character participates in the first ally character. In addition, when a predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, a third ally character participates in the second ally character, and when a predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third ally character participates in the war. The first ally character participates in the battle against the three ally characters.

As described above, when the icon is displayed in the jackpot notice effect, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol may or may not be temporarily stopped when developing from one stage to the next in the pseudo-continuous production. If the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed when developing from one stage to the next in the pseudo-continuous production, it is a condition for developing to the next stage that the icon is displayed.

<Specific mode of jackpot notice production>
FIGS. 155 to 157 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the first notice effect. 158 to 160 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the second notice effect. 161 to 164 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the third notice effect. FIGS. 165 to 167 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the fourth notice effect. 168 and 169 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the notice after the icon is stopped. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon.

FIG. 155 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 142 (a)) corresponding to the effect number “3”. In the effect shown in FIG. 155, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 7 (see FIG. 155 (a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears (see FIG. 155 (b)). Subsequently, the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“Is it hot?”) Is displayed on the display device 7 as the conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 155 (c)), and then the conversation for the second stage. The dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“hot!”) Is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155 (d)), and then the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“hot ze!”) As a conversation for the third stage. "Too hot!") Is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155 (e)), after which the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 155 (f)).

FIG. 156 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 142 (a)) corresponding to the effect number “5”. In the effect shown in FIG. 156, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 7 (see FIG. 156 (a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears. At the same time, the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“pressing the button”) is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 156 (b)), and then the button image 9003 is displayed on the display device 7. It is displayed (see FIG. 156 (c)), followed by a large "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156 (d)), followed by a pseudo-continuous step notification bell image 9021. The "bell" icon is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9011 on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156 (e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 156 (f)). The “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “bell” icon is deterministically displayed. The pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is an image corresponding to the pseudo-ream stage being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during "pseudo 2".

In FIG. 157, after the effect shown in FIG. 156 is performed in “pseudo 1”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “5” is performed in “pseudo 2” and “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 142 (a)). An example of the image displayed on the display device 7 is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 157, after shifting to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 156 (f), after the conversation of the first ally character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "watermelon" is displayed. The icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed large on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157 (a)), the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 is displayed on the display device 7, and the process shifts to “pseudo 3” (FIG. 157 (b). )reference). The “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “watermelon” icon is deterministically displayed. The watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-continuous stage notification is an image corresponding to the pseudo-ream stage being "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during "pseudo 3".

After that, after the conversation of the first ally character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed large on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157 (c)), and the pseudo-continuous stage The notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157 (d)), and shifts to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “cherry” icon is deterministically displayed. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to the development of super reach in "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during super reach. After that, if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 157 (e)), and the big hit is obtained (see FIG. 157 (f)).

FIG. 158 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 143) corresponding to the effect number “13”. In the effect shown in FIG. 158, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 7 (see FIG. 158 (a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is displayed in large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 158 (a)). (See FIG. 158 (b)), subsequently the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 158 (c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is displayed as if it were rotated counterclockwise. (See FIG. 158 (d)), followed by an image relating to the description and start of the mission displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 158 (e) and 158), after which the mission result was unsuccessful. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 158 (g)).

159 and 160 show an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 143) corresponding to the effect number “16”. In the effects shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 7 (see FIG. 159 (a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is large in the display device 7. Displayed (see FIG. 159 (b)), subsequently the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 159 (c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is rotated clockwise. (See Fig. 159 (d)), followed by multiple items (here, "Chance", "CHANGE", "Chansu", "Gekiatsu", "Intense heat", "Iron plate", "NEXT". , And the roulette effect of selecting one item from the "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031) is performed (see FIGS. 159 (e) to 160 (a)), and subsequently, as a result of the roulette effect. The "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 160 (b) and (c)), and subsequently the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed larger on the display device 7 (see FIG. 160 (d)). Subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 160 (e)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2” (FIG. 160). (F)).

FIG. 161 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 146) corresponding to the effect number “41”. In the effect shown in FIG. 161, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 7 (see FIG. 161 (a)), and then the title completion fan image 9004 is displayed on the display device 7 (FIG. 161 (FIG. 161). b)) Subsequently, in response to the failure of the title completion fanning, the title completion fanning image 9004 disappears, and the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (FIGS. 161 (c) and FIG. (D)).

FIG. 162 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 146) corresponding to the effect number “42”. In the effect shown in FIG. 162, first, as an effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 7 (see FIG. 162 (a)), and then the title completion fan image 9004 is displayed in the display device. It is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162 (b)), and subsequently, in response to the success of the title completion fanning, the title completion fanning success image 9005 is displayed on the display device 7 (FIG. 162 (c). ), The decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 162 (d)), and subsequently, the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162 (e)). The pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 162 (f)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 162 (g)). ).

In FIG. 163, after the effect shown in FIG. 162 is performed in “pseudo 1”, it is displayed on the display device 7 when the effect corresponding to the effect number “43” is performed in “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 146). An example of the image is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 163, after shifting to “pseudo 2” as shown in FIG. 162 (g), the enemy character 9006 appears on the display device 7 (see FIG. 163 (a)), and then continuously appears. Every time the eyes (for example, "2, 3, 3") are stopped and displayed, the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 (enemy attack effect) (FIGS. 163 (b) to (d)). (See), subsequently, the icon stop fanning was performed in which the display of the fanning watermelon image 9007 on the display device 7 became larger and larger (see FIGS. 163 (e) and (f)), and subsequently, the icon stop fanning was successful. Correspondingly, the enemy character 9006 collapses, and the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed large on the display device 7 (see FIG. 163 (g)), and subsequently, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the display device. In No. 7, it is displayed smaller than the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 163 (h)), and then shifts to “pseudo 3”.

In FIG. 164, after the effect shown in FIG. 163 is performed in “pseudo 2”, it is displayed on the display device 7 when the effect corresponding to the effect number “49” is performed in “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 146). An example of the image is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 164, after shifting to “pseudo 3”, an enemy character 9008 appears on the display device 7 (see FIG. 164 (a)), followed by continuous rolls (for example, “3.4. Every time 4 ”) is stopped and displayed, the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 (enemy attack effect) (see FIGS. 164 (b) to (d)), and then the display device 7 The display of the cherry image 9009 for fanning in the above is increased and the icon stop fanning is performed (see FIGS. 164 (e) and 164 (f)), and subsequently, the enemy character 9008 responds to the success of the icon stop fanning. As it collapses, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed large on the display device 7 (see FIG. 164 (g)), and subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 7 as the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013. It is displayed smaller than (see FIG. 164 (h)), and then shifts to super reach.

When the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third notice effect, the third notice effect may be performed without fail in the next pseudo-continuous stage. That is, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 1") corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42", the effect corresponds to the effect numbers "43" to "48" as "pseudo 2". You may make sure to execute any one of the effects. Further, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 2") corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", it corresponds to the effect numbers "49" to "52" as "pseudo 3". You may make sure that any one of the effects is executed.

FIG. 165 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 149) corresponding to the effect number “72”. In the effect shown in FIG. 165, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the display device 7 starts to fluctuate the decorative symbol 9001 (see FIG. 165 (a)), and then "4" as the left decorative symbol 9001L. The symbols are stopped (see FIGS. 165 (b) and 165 (c)), and then, as the right decorative symbol 9001R, the display of the "4" symbol becomes larger and larger, and the four symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 165 (d)). Then, in response to the success of the 4 symbol tempai fanning, the background is displayed only when the 4 symbol tempai fanning is successful (background after the success of the 4 symbol tempai) (not shown), and the left decoration. The "4" symbol is displayed in large size as the symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (see FIG. 165 (e)), followed by the reach of the intermediate decorative symbol 9001C in a horizontally rotated state (FIG. 165).
(F)), subsequently, the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 165 (g)), and subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7. The "bell" icon is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 165 (h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2". It should be noted that the normal background is displayed on the display device 7 after the success of the four symbol tempai and before the background (at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 9001).

In FIG. 166, after the effect shown in FIG. 165 is performed in “pseudo 1”, it is displayed on the display device 7 when the effect corresponding to the effect number “73” is performed in “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 149). An example of the image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 166 (when shifting to "pseudo 2"), it is a specific background. The background may be the same background as the background after the success of the four symbol tempai, or may be a background different from the background after the success of the four symbol tempai. Then, the subsequent production is performed in a dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after the success of the four symbol tempai, or may be a background different from the background after the success of the four symbol tempai, and may be the same background as the specific background. It may be a background different from the above-mentioned specific background. In the dedicated background state, as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R, the four symbol tempai fanning in which the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed is performed (see FIGS. 166 (a) and (b)), and the "4" symbol After the display disappears, the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed large on the display device 7 (see FIG. 166 (c)), and subsequently, the pseudo-continuous step notification watermelon image 9022 is displayed on the display device 7 with the "watermelon" icon. It is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 166 (d)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 167, after the effect shown in FIG. 166 is performed in “pseudo 2”, it is displayed on the display device 7 when the effect corresponding to the effect number “75” is performed in “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 149). An example of the image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 167 (when shifting to "pseudo 3"), it is the above-mentioned specific background. Then, the subsequent production is performed in the above-mentioned dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R are subjected to 4 symbol tempai fanning in which the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed (see FIG. 167 (a)), followed by the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decoration. As the symbol 9001R, the 7 symbol tempai fanning in which the "7" symbol fluctuates at high speed is performed (see FIG. 167 (b)), and then the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R. 4 symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 167 (c)), followed by 7 symbol tempai fanning in which the "7" symbol fluctuates at high speed as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (Fig. 167 (d)). ), After the display of the "7" symbol disappears, the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed in large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 167 (e)), and subsequently, the cherry image for pseudo continuous stage notification. The 9023 is displayed on the display device 7 to be smaller than the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 (see FIG. 167 (f)), and then shifts to super reach.

The mode of the 4 symbol tempai fanning to the 7 symbol tempai fanning is not particularly limited, and as described above, the "4" symbol to the "7" symbol may be changed at high speed, or "4". The symbol to "7" symbol may be vibrated.

FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 7 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 152) corresponding to the effect number “91”. .. FIGS. 168 (c) and 168 (d) show an example of the image and the movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 7 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 152) corresponding to the effect number “92”. .. In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), after the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 (or "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 168 (a)). , The movable accessory 9041 operates in the first aspect (see FIG. 168 (b)). In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIGS. 168 (c) and 168 (d), after the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 (or "bell" icon confirmed image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 168 (c)). , The movable accessory 9041 operates in the second aspect (see FIG. 168 (d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory that imitates a predetermined character, and has a first state (stored state), a second state (a state in which the character has his arm lowered ... see FIG. 168 (b)), and a first state. State 3 (character raising his arm ... Fig. 168
It is configured so that it can be displaced from (see (d)).

FIG. 169 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 152) corresponding to the effect number “93”. In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIG. 169, after the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed (FIG. 169).
(See (a)), the background image 9042 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 169 (b)). After that, it develops into a predetermined super reach, and a battle between a friendly character (for example, the first friendly character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 is performed (see FIGS. 169 (c) to (e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. If it is a big hit, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 169 (f)).

As described above, a specific example of the jackpot notice effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 169. In this example, a case where a predetermined pattern is adopted as an icon, such as the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011, the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012, and the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013, has been described. As the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. For example, in FIG. 170 (a), as an example of the first specific icon, the first specific icon confirmed image 9014 composed of a symbol including the numbers or characters "7" and "PREMIUM" is shown. Further, for example, the character image "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and when "NEXT" is displayed, it may be developed to the next stage in the pseudo-ren.

Further, for example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, the "X" icon as shown in FIGS. 170 (b) to 170 (d) The confirmed image 9051, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052, and the “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 may be adopted. As described above, as the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt a pattern in which a predetermined character (for example, an English word) is surrounded by a square. In this case, instead of the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023, the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y Image 9062 and Z image 9063 for pseudo-continuous step notification may be adopted (see FIGS. 170 (e) and 170 (f)). In FIG. 170 (e), the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062 are displayed brightly, while the pseudo continuous stage notification Z image 9063 is displayed dark. It is shown to be "pseudo 3". By displaying the “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 in this state, in FIG. 170 (e), the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061, the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062, and the pseudo continuous stage notification Z. All images 9063 are displayed brightly. As a result, it will then develop into super reach.

Further, in the above, an example in which the decorative symbol 9001 is displayed large (in the center of the display device 7) and the decorative symbol 9001 is displayed small (in the lower right corner of the display device 7) in the display device 7 has been described. In this embodiment, the larger decorative symbol 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative symbol 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are displayed while the icon is displayed and before and after the icon is displayed. The symbol 9001 may be configured not to be displayed. Further, when the icon is displayed, a symbol corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative symbol 9001 (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 9001C), or the part thereof. (For example, the left decorative icon 9001L and the right decorative icon 9001R may be stopped and displayed), or the left decorative icon 9001L, the intermediate decorative icon 9001C, and the right may be displayed in a variable manner. All the decorative symbols 9001R may be left in a variable display.

<Big hit notice production (common to each production stage)>
For the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect described above, refer to the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). ), It can occur only in the first production stage. On the other hand, the sixth notice effect and the seventh notice effect described below can occur in any of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. Further, while the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are the effects that can occur during the pseudo continuous effect, the sixth notice effect to the seventh notice effect occur. If so, the pseudo-continuous production does not occur. In the following, after explaining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in each effect stage, the sixth notice effect and the seventh notice effect will be described.

<Variable pattern of decorative pattern>
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of a decorative symbol in the first effect stage. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the second effect stage. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the third effect stage.

FIG. 171 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 2 seconds have passed, then decelerate over 1 second, stop for 1 second, and so on. The design is confirmed.

FIG. 171 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 171 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 10.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 171 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 14.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 172 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 172 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 172 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 172 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 16 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 173 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 2.5 seconds elapse, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds, 1 It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 173 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 5.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 173 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7.5 seconds elapse, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 9.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 173 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 15.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 13.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

The variation patterns of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 171 to 173 are default variation patterns, and in this embodiment, except for cases described separately (for example, FIG. 145, FIG. 148, FIG. 151, FIG. 176, etc.). The decorative pattern basically fluctuates according to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern.

<6th notice production>
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a flow of the sixth notice effect. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth notice effect. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The sixth notice effect shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 occurs when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). It is a production to get. In the sixth notice production, the first special zone rushing is performed, and if the rushing is successful, the first special zone is rushed. The first special zone is a special zone in the pre-stage that develops into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "101" is an effect that fades out after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated. In the production corresponding to the production number "102", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fade out. It is a production. In the production corresponding to the production number "103", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign (effect for the second stage) is generated. It is a production in which a sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) occurs, and then it fades out.

In the production corresponding to the production number "104", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign is generated. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 7, and then the first special zone rushing fails. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display device 7. In the production corresponding to the production number "105", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign (effect for the second stage) is generated. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the success of the first special zone rushing is displayed. This is an effect of being displayed on the display device 7, displaying an image related to the title of the first special zone on the display device 7, and then entering the first special zone. When the first special zone is completed, the process shifts to the fourth specific super reach.

In the production corresponding to the production number "106", the third sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the display device 7, and then. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the failure to enter the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7. In the production corresponding to the production number "107", the third sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the display device 7, and the first An image corresponding to the success of the special zone entry is displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7, and then the first special zone is entered. When the first special zone is completed, the process shifts to the fourth specific super reach.

In the first special zone, switching is performed between the screen corresponding to the first character and the screen corresponding to the second character, and the decorative symbol is tempered on either screen. After that, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and develops into the fourth specific super reach, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen on which the tempai is generated is performed. In addition, in the first sign, the second sign, or the third sign, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 7. In this case, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "106" and "107", the first special zone rushing fan suddenly occurs without going through the sign. When the look-ahead effect is performed after the game ball has won the first start opening 120 and before the special symbol change related to the start-up prize starts (when the sixth notice effect occurs via the look-ahead effect). , In the sixth notice effect that occurs when the special symbol changes, the sign may always be passed. On the other hand, when the sixth notice effect occurs without going through the look-ahead effect, the sign may or may not be passed in the sixth notice effect that occurs when the special symbol changes.

FIG. 176 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “104” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 176 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 15 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 176 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “105” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 176 (b), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at a high speed from the start of fluctuation to at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 176 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “106” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 176 (c), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 15 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 176 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “107” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 176 (d), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at a high speed from the start of fluctuation to at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106", the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 11 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the default fluctuation patterns (see FIGS. 171 (d) and 173 (d)) in the first effect stage and the third effect stage, the left decorative symbol is decelerated and stopped at the same timing. When the decorative symbol is stopped, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound that is determined to be lost) is output from the speaker 32, but if the first special zone rushing fan is performed. In addition, when the stop sound is generated, there is a possibility that the player may grasp the result of the fanning during the first special zone entry fanning. In view of this point, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" to "106" is performed, FIG. 176 is performed.
The decorative symbol is varied by a dedicated variation pattern (a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol stops after the end of the first special zone rushing fan) as shown in (a) to (c). As a result, it is possible to prevent the success or failure of the first special zone rushing fan from being spoiled through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the stop sound of the decorative symbol can be a sound peculiar to the loss (a sound that can occur only in the case of a loss).

Such fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c) are adopted when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage, while the effects are adopted. When the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the default variation patterns (FIG. 172 (d)) are used instead of the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c). (See), the decorative design may be changed. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 172 (d), the timing at which the decorative symbol is decelerated and stopped is delayed. Therefore, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “104” and “106” is performed, the variation pattern is used. Even if the decorative pattern is changed, the above-mentioned concerns about spoilers do not occur. However, even when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the decorative symbols may be changed according to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c).

It should be noted that the variation pattern depends on the case where the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the first production stage and the case where the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the third production stage. May be different. For example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third effect stage, each decorative symbol is changed at a higher speed than the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c). The time may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Further, in one of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage (for example, the second production stage), the sixth notice production is not performed during the pre-reading production. It may be configured as. In this case, in the production stages other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), the sixth notice production may be performed even during the execution of the look-ahead production. ..

<7th notice production>
FIG. 177 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the seventh notice effect. FIG. 177 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh notice effect.

The seventh notice effect shown in FIG. 177 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). be. In the 7th notice production, the second special zone rushing is performed, and if the rushing is successful, the second special zone is rushed. The second special zone is a special zone in the pre-stage that develops into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "121", after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the display device 7 is turned off, the effect is restored from the freeze and the second special zone is entered. The image related to the fanning is displayed on the display device 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the failure of the second special zone entry fanning is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 7. After that, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "122", after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the display device 7 is turned off, the image returns from the freeze and is related to the second special zone rushing. Is displayed on the display device 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the success of the second special zone rushing fan (second special zone rushing fanning). The success image) is displayed on the display device 7. When the player enters the second special zone, the display device 7 displays a state in which the predetermined enemy character is defeated after the predetermined ally character appears. After that, it develops into the 5th specific super reach, and in the 5th specific super reach, a production corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is the reach with the highest expectation of a big hit (except for the first specific super reach where the big hit is confirmed).

Two timings are provided as the timings at which the screen freeze may occur. Specifically, there are a case where the screen freezes 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and a case where the screen freezes 12 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). Has been done. The screen freeze occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, all the effects following the freeze occur with a delay of 6 seconds as compared with timing 1.

Further, while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button effective time is set. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, when the effect button 54 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation), the second special zone is entered. A production corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), the second special zone rushing is unsuccessful or successful. The corresponding production is performed.

Although not shown, as a production corresponding to the success of the second special zone rushing (successful production of the second special zone rushing), the second special zone rushing success image (for example, the title of the second special zone) is related. In addition to the effect of displaying an image and an image related to a predetermined icon), an effect of emitting a predetermined decorative lamp (logo lamp) is performed. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10 and is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin). In addition, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of characters (for example, characters displayed as icons) indicating a logo or the like according to the model. A full-color LED is adopted for the logo lamp, and it is possible to emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green, and the effect color of the logo cover can be changed.

It should be noted that the successful effect of entering the second special zone (for example, the light emission of the logo lamp) is performed for a predetermined time (3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the effect button 54 is operated or the operation timing. Even if the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, the time is not extended. Since the timing of entering the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (if the above timing is 1, 30 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and if the above timing is 2, the decorative symbol is displayed. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button valid time (36 seconds after the start of fluctuation), there is a gap between the end time of the successful production of entering the second special zone and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a swaying state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 178 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice effect. FIG. 178 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change notice effect. FIG. 178 (c) is a diagram showing a state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs.

In this embodiment, basically, in each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), the special symbol variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (20 times). Stay. After shifting to one production stage, if the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), the production stage may shift to another production stage. On the other hand, when the 7th notice production occurs, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage has not reached the predetermined number (20 times), the production stage must be performed. A migration occurs.

In the present specification, such a transition of the production stage is also referred to as a “stage change”. In addition, although the production stage after the transition is randomly determined by lottery, the same production stage as the production stage before the transition may be determined as the production stage after the transition. The transition of the production stage (stage change) is a concept that includes such cases.

When the stage change is performed, the stage change notice effect shown in FIG. 178 is performed. The effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (stage change notice effect) is an image showing the name of the effect stage after the transition after the background transition image corresponding to the effect stage after the transition is displayed on the display device 7. It is an effect that the display content of the counter image on the display device 7 is reset (recovered) while being displayed on the display device 7.

As the background transition image, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image suggesting the first effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the first effect stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image suggesting a second effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the second effect stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image suggesting a third effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the third effect stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol changes performed after the stage change occurs. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as a counter image after reset. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The numerator numbers indicate the number of special symbol changes that have taken place after the stage change has occurred. While staying at each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), the counter image is basically always (some effects) at a predetermined position of the display device 7. It is displayed (except while it is being done). As the number of special symbol changes performed after the stage change occurs, the counter image changes to "1/20", "2/20" ... "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, rainbow, or gold). In this embodiment, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values (six stages of “1” to “6”) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different from each other are provided. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to the set values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the color of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. Is the color corresponding to the set value. As a result, the counter image (0/20) suggests the set value.

The method of suggesting the set value by the counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including the numbers (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the set value may be displayed. For example, when the set value is "6", the counter image "0/66" may be displayed. In this regard, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol changes related to the stage change occurrence condition is a specified value (20 times), but the number of special symbol changes may be determined by lottery. good. On top of that, for example, when the set value is "6", it is possible to configure it so that "66" can be relatively easily determined as the number of times the special symbol changes.

Further, when the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the player has entered the second special zone. In this regard, as the seventh notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" and an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" are provided. Regardless of which of these effects occurs, a stage change will always occur. On top of that, the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change can be displayed in gold only when the stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "122". It is configured as follows.

Two timings are provided as the start timing of the stage change notice production. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and when the background transition image is displayed 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). And are provided. The stage change notice effect occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, all the effects are delayed by 6 seconds as compared with timing 1.

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect, the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed is the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed. It corresponds to. That is, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 1) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 1), the effect number "131" The production corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 2) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 2), the effect number "131" The production corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 1) is basically performed. Will be done. In this case, the stage change notice effect will be performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative pattern. Exceptionally, when the 7th notice effect occurs in the special symbol change (game that reaches the specified number) in which the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes reaching the predetermined number (20 times). Is to produce an effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 2). That is, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for generating the stage change, and if both conditions are satisfied in the same special symbol change, 6 seconds from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. From the lapse of time, a stage change notice will be produced.

Condition (I): The number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh notice production occurs (effect number " The production corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected)

The fact that the number of special symbol changes has reached the predetermined number (20 times) can be grasped by the player through the counter image, but when the number of special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number (20 times), It is highly probable that the player is aware that a stage change will occur. In this respect, by configuring as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the stage change notice effect is not performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in the game in which the specified number is reached. In this case, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2. As a result, the player can be expected to generate the 7th notice effect (entering the 2nd special zone) after the stage change notice effect is performed.

Further, as described above, the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage are associated with the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character, respectively. .. Although not shown, the game board unit 10 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration unit, and the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration unit. The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration portion.

The first character decoration unit is provided at a first predetermined location (for example, the right side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10, and the second character decoration unit is a second predetermined location (for example, the display device) of the game board unit 10. The third character decoration unit is provided at a third predetermined position (for example, the lower left side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10. The first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are decorated in the shape of the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character, respectively. .. Further, the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). Full-color LEDs are adopted for the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp, respectively, and it is possible to emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. As a result, the effect colors of the first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section can be changed.

In this embodiment, the first character lamp is basically on and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are off while staying in the first production stage. While staying in the second production stage, the second character lamp is basically on, and the first character lamp and the third character lamp are off. While staying in the third production stage, the third character lamp is basically on, and the first character lamp and the second character lamp are off. Although not shown, in the stage change notice production, any one of the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp (the character lamp corresponding to the production stage after the transition) blinks.

Specifically, when the production stage after the transition is the first production stage, the first character lamp blinks, and when the production stage after the transition is the second production stage, the second character lamp blinks. However, if the effect stage after the transition is the third effect stage, the third character lamp blinks. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, while the first background transition image is displayed, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the second background transition image is displayed, the second character lamp is lit. It blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 178 (c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first production stage to the second production stage. In the previous game of the game of reaching the specified number, the first character lamp is lit, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are turned off. When the game for reaching the specified number starts, the first character lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state, the second character lamp switches from the extinguished state to the blinking state, and the third character lamp remains in the extinguished state. After that, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. After that, the lighting state of the second character lamp continues until the next stage change notice effect occurs, and the lighting state of the first character lamp and the third character lamp continues.

After the stage change notice production is performed, the background shifts to the background corresponding to the production stage after the transition (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). As described above, after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the normal background is restored. Further, after the production in the fifth specific super reach, which is transferred via the production corresponding to the production number "122", is completed, the normal background is restored. The normal background is a background corresponding to the post-transition production stage (rather than the pre-transition production stage).

In the above, it has been described that the above conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for generating the stage change. Here, with respect to the above condition (I), the number of times of special symbol variation is when the variation display on the first special symbol display unit 163 (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) is performed. However, it is not counted when the variation display on the second special symbol display unit 164 (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B) is performed. Therefore, in the normal game state, even if the player plays the game by right-handed and the variable display on the second special symbol display unit 164 is repeatedly performed, the count is not performed, and in this case, the stage is changed. Is never done. The count is performed when the special symbol change starts.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the stage change may be performed other than the case where the above condition (I) or (II) is satisfied. Specifically, as an effect performed when a special symbol change is performed in a situation where the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage has not reached a predetermined number (20 times). , When a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) occurs, a lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is performed. Then, on condition that the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won, the transition of the production stage occurs.

Further, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times), the stage change may not be performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs in a game that reaches the specified number, a lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is performed. When the specified number is reached If the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage is not won, the production stage is transferred in the game in which the specified number is reached. On the other hand, if the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is won, the production stage does not shift in the game that reaches the specified number, and the production stage shifts in the next special symbol change of the game that reaches the specified number. Occurs.

<Stage change section hold ball>
179 to 181 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section holding ball.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball wins the first starting port 120, the sub control circuit 300 selects the sub fluctuation pattern by lottery. Here, the result of the lottery (sub-variation pattern selection lottery) may differ depending on the production stage staying during the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize, but the first start opening prize occurs. If a stage change occurs between the time when the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize is performed, the special symbol change (stage change game) in which the stage change is performed starts in the production stage after the transition. Not decided until. Therefore, for such a first start opening prize, the sub-variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game is started. Then, the lottery related to the look-ahead effect is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, but if the sub-variation pattern is not selected, the lottery related to the look-ahead effect cannot be performed.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the concept of "stage change section reserved ball" is provided. The stage change section hold ball is a hold ball corresponding to the first start opening prize related to the stage change game, and a special symbol change related to the stage change game after the first start opening prize related to the stage change game occurs. It refers to the reserved ball corresponding to the first starting opening prize that occurred before the start. It is said that the look-ahead effect is not performed for such a stage change section reserved ball. Of the stage change section reserved balls, the reserved balls corresponding to the first start opening prize related to the stage change game are also particularly referred to as "stage change section reserved balls".

FIG. 179 (a) shows a state in which the 16th special symbol change is performed after the transition to the current production stage and a state in which the holding ball does not exist. FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 120 during the 16th special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 179 (a). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the 17th to 20th special symbol variation after the transition to the current production stage. FIG. 179 (c) shows a state in which the 17th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage after the state shown in FIG. 179 (b). In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is the 18th to 20th special symbol variation after the transition to the current production stage. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 179 (d) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 120 during the 17th special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 179 (c). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol change is performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball (the stage change section reserved ball), and the pre-reading effect cannot be performed on the fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 179 (e) shows a state in which the 18th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage after the state shown in FIG. 179 (d). In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to second reserved balls becomes the 19th to 20th special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage, and corresponds to the third reserved ball. The special symbol change to be performed is the first special symbol change after the transition to the next production stage. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 180A shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 120 during the 18th special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 179 (e). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the second special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 180 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 180 (a), the 18th to 20th special symbol changes are performed, during which two game balls are won in the first starting port 120, and then two game balls are won. It shows the state in which the first special symbol change is performed after the stage change occurs and the stage shifts to the next production stage. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is the second to fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 3rd reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 3rd reserved balls cannot be pre-read. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 180 (c) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 120 during the first special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 180 (b). ing. In this state, the special symbol change corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the fifth special symbol change after the stage change occurs. The fourth reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. Therefore, the fourth reserved ball is not a stage change section reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball can be pre-read.

In FIG. 180 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 180 (c), the first to second special symbol changes are performed after the stage change occurs, and during that time, two games are played in the first starting port 120. It shows the state in which the ball wins a prize and then the third special symbol change is performed after the stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is the fourth special symbol change after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the first reserved ball. On the other hand, the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls is the fifth to seventh special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The second to fourth reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. It is a sphere. Therefore, the second to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and the second to fourth reserved balls can be pre-read.

In FIG. 181 (a), after the 20th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage in the absence of the reserved ball, while the 20th special symbol change is being performed. , A state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 120 is shown. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the 21st to 24th special symbol variation after the transition to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol changes are performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the first to fourth special symbol variation after the transition to the next production stage. As a result, the 1st to 4th reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 4th reserved balls cannot be pre-read.

In FIG. 181 (b), after the 20th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage in the absence of the reserved ball, while the 20th special symbol change is being performed. , A state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 120 is shown. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol change is performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the first reserved ball. There are no second to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 181 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 181 (b), the 20th special symbol change is performed, then a stage change occurs, and the first special after shifting to the next production stage. It shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 120 while the symbol change is being performed. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the second to fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. It is a sphere. Therefore, the 1st to 4th reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 4th reserved balls can be pre-read.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), the number of special symbol fluctuations for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is 4, whereas the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (b) and (c). Then, the number of times of special symbol change in which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is one. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is not fixed uniformly, but the timing of the stage change occurrence and the timing of winning the game ball to the first starting port 120. The number of times is changed according to the context of.

<Processing at the time of winning the first starting port>
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a first start port winning process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing a stage change section determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 184 and 185 are diagrams for explaining the look-ahead effect.

The first start port winning process shown in FIG. 182 is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the game ball wins the first start port 120. Is. The sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 120 by receiving the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the first start opening winning process, the sub CPU 301 first executes the stage change section determination process (step S9001). Hereinafter, the stage change section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 183.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the reserved ball in the stage change section exists in the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times held (step S9151). As described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181, the reserved ball in the stage change section is a reserved ball corresponding to the first starting opening winning prize in the stage change game (special symbol change in which the stage change is performed). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the information indicating the stage change section holding ball (stage change section holding ball information) is stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 303.

Specifically, as described above, the work RAM 303 includes the first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), the first sub-holding area (2), the first sub-holding area (3), and the work RAM 303. , The first sub-holding area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to the current special symbol change (the change) is stored in the first sub-holding area (0), and is held in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4). Information corresponding to the four special symbol fluctuations is stored. That is, as described above, the first sub-holding area (0) and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4) are the first special symbol start storage areas provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. It corresponds to (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The winning command for winning the first starting port, which is transmitted from the main control circuit 200, includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination and information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. By receiving the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 stores the information corresponding to the information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning.

When the stage change is performed in one special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 stores the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the special symbol change (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in any of the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (3). When one special symbol change ends and the next special symbol change starts, the sub CPU 301 displays the information stored in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4). The first sub-holding area (0) and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (3) are shifted, respectively. At that time, when the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in the first sub-holding area (1), the sub CPU 301 is the information from the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (0). With the transfer of, the stage change section the reserved ball information is deleted. Therefore, the situation in which the reserved ball information in the stage change section is stored in the first sub-reserved area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, when it is determined that the reserved ball in the stage change section exists among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times held, the sub CPU 301 holds the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time in the stage change section. It is specified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information (stage change section hold ball information) indicating that the ball is a stage change section hold ball in the first sub hold area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. As a result, for example, in a situation where the stage change section the reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (3), when the first start opening prize corresponding to the fourth reserved ball occurs, The stage change section hold ball information is stored in the first sub hold area (4) (see FIG. 180 (a)).

In step S9151, when it is determined that the reserved ball in the stage change section does not exist in the reserved balls for the upper limit of 4 times held, the sub CPU 301 shifts to the current production stage and then counts the special symbol change. (Step S9153), it is determined whether or not the number of times (the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time (step S9153). The number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol fluctuation is performed.

If it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift does not reach the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time, the sub CPU 301 specially corresponds to the first start opening prize this time. It is determined whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, in the sub CPU 301, the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time is the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). Judge whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to. Since the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the sub CPU 301 is generated by receiving the winning command of the first starting opening winning. Can recognize the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. In addition, the variation pattern includes information corresponding to the effect performed during the special symbol variation. Based on the information, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect is performed during the special symbol change.

In step S9153, when it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start opening prize, or corresponding to the current first start opening prize. When it is determined that the seventh notice effect will occur due to the special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 specifies the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time as the reserved ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. As a result, for example, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. Will store the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub-holding area (4) (see FIG. 179 (d)). Further, although not shown, for example, when the 7th notice effect occurs during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning (corresponding to the 4th holding ball), the 1st sub-holding area Stage change section The reserved ball information is stored in (4).

Although not shown, similarly, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will occur during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning. In addition, when the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won, the stage change section and the reserved ball information may be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. In addition, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth identification) is reached during the special symbol variation. (Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you do not win the production stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached, you will be in the first sub hold area corresponding to this first start opening prize. , Stage change section The reserved ball information may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth identification) is performed during the special symbol variation. (Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you win the production stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be in the 1st sub hold area corresponding to the next 1st start opening prize. Change section The reserved ball information may be stored.

After executing the process of step S9152 or step S9155, or when it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh notice effect does not occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 301 executes this subroutine. finish.

As described above, the stage change section determination process performed in step S9101 of FIG. 182 has been described with reference to FIG. 183. The explanation is returned to FIG. 182.

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a stage change section reserved ball (including the stage change section holding ball) (step). S9102). When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning is the stage change section reserved ball, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the holding ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is not the stage change section holding ball, the sub CPU 301 sets the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time to a fixed value. It is determined whether or not it corresponds (step S9103). Although not shown, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol, the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot with a short time) is relatively It is also possible to provide a disadvantageous second big hit (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds or a short-time non-big hit). On top of that, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot. Is the same, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) is selected when the first jackpot is made, and the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) is selected when the second jackpot is reached. It may be configured to be different from the probability. In this case, the predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) may perform special symbol fluctuations in the same fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S9103, the sub CPU 301 has a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than a predetermined variation pattern (indefinite jackpot) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 301 determines that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 301 determines the timing when the first start opening prize is generated this time. It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined time (for example, a time corresponding to 41 frames) after the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). When it is determined that the timing at which the first start opening prize is generated is within a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing when the first start opening prize is generated is not within a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 301 performs the sub change pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub-variation pattern is composed of the first half portion and the second half portion, and the main fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of the special symbol) is also composed of the first half portion and the second half portion. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 301 includes the main variation pattern information (information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol) included in the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, and the current effect. The content of the latter half of the sub-variation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value based on the stage.

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes the sub fluctuation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and based on the sub fluctuation pattern (second half) determined in step S9105, the main fluctuation pattern, and the current production stage, the first half portion of the sub fluctuation pattern. Determine the content. Information indicating the current production stage is stored in the production stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 refers to the production stage flag storage area to display the current production stage. Can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9107). When it is determined that the change of the second special symbol is being displayed, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the change of the second special symbol is a loss or a small hit (step S9108). ). When it is determined that the result of the second special lottery is not a loss or a small hit (a big hit), the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. In this embodiment, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, a method (simultaneous fluctuation type) capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol is adopted. Therefore, it is assumed that a big hit related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs, but by executing the processes of steps S9107 and S9108, unintended playability may occur even in such a situation. There is no such thing.

If it is determined in step S9107 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a big hit), the sub CPU 301 , The look-ahead effect lottery process is executed (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and based on the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106, regarding the current first start opening winning (for the sub-variation pattern). ) Whether or not to generate the look-ahead effect is determined, and when the look-ahead effect is generated, the content of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 191) is determined (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening winning this time based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). When it is determined that the look-ahead effect will occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 301 sets the look-ahead flag on (step S9111). The look-ahead flag is a flag indicating that a look-ahead effect is generated for one first start opening winning, and is set to off when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning starts. This suggests the result of the first special lottery related to the first starting opening prize between the occurrence of the first starting opening winning and the start of the special symbol change corresponding to the first starting opening winning. The production (look-ahead production) will be performed.

When it is determined in step S91110 that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, or after executing the process of step S9111, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The processing of steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening prize this time, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the hold ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a hold ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect. do. The reserved ball on which the look-ahead effect can be performed is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 190) and is based on the main variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value. It is a reserved ball in which the effect is performed according to the determined sub-variation pattern. When it is determined that the hold ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a hold ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 301 reads ahead to the first sub hold area corresponding to the first start opening prize this time. Possible information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a reserved ball that cannot perform the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 301 reads ahead to the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time. Unable information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect cannot be performed) is stored.

In FIG. 184 (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 120 while one special symbol change is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is pre-read. Indicates the state in which the available information is stored. In FIG. 184 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 184 (a), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the second one. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. Figure 185
In (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 120 while one special symbol change is being performed, and the pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball. Indicates the memorized state. In FIG. 185 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 185 (a), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the second one. It shows a state in which pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. In FIG. 185 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 185 (b), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the third one. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball.

When it is determined that the pre-reading effect is generated for the first starting port winning this time, the sub CPU 301 performs the pre-reading effect for the first starting port winning in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting port winning this time. Information indicating that (pre-reading relevant information) is stored. Then, when the look-ahead information is stored in all the first sub-holding areas (excluding the first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the first starting port winning before the first starting opening winning this time, the sub The CPU 301 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in these first sub-holding areas into the pre-reading information. The pre-reading information is information indicating that the pre-reading effect is performed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the first sub-holding area in which the pre-reading information is stored starts.

In FIG. 184 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 184 (b), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the third one. It shows a state in which the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. At this time, the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first to second holding balls instead of the pre-reading information. As a result, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to second reserved balls is being performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the third reserved ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 184 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 184 (c), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and four It shows a state in which pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball of the eye. In this way, when the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to one holding ball, the pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the next holding ball.

In addition, when it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur for the first starting opening winning this time, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before the first starting opening winning this time). ), When there is a first sub-holding area in which pre-readable information is stored, there are a plurality of first sub-hold areas in which the pre-readable information is stored. In this case, the read-ahead information stored in the first sub-holding area having a larger number than the first sub-holding area having the highest number is rewritten into the look-ahead information. In FIG. 185 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 185 (c), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the fourth one. It shows a state in which the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. At this time, the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the third holding ball instead of the pre-reading information. As a result, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to second reserved balls is being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the third reserved ball is performed. During this time, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the fourth reserved ball will be performed.

If the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a stage change section reserved ball, the pre-readable information may be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 180 (d), when it is determined to generate the look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, the look-ahead stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first reserved ball is stored. The pre-readable information stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the second to third hold balls may be rewritten to the pre-reading information while keeping the impossible information as it is. In this case, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to third reserved balls is performed. During the process, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the fourth reserved ball will be performed.

Alternatively, when the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is the holding ball in the stage change section, the pre-reading non-readable information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time. If the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a stage change section reserved ball other than the stage change section, the look-ahead information can be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first start opening prize. May be memorized. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 180 (d), when it is determined to generate the look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, it is stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the first to third reserved balls. The pre-readable information that has been set may be rewritten to the pre-reading information. In this case, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the fourth reserved ball is performed. Become.

As described above, the first sub-holding area is provided in the work RAM 303, and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 203. Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 303 can be configured to be stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. In this case, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 303 is controlled so as to be generated by the sub-control circuit 300 according to the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. Is possible. Further, the determination as to whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect may be performed by the main control circuit 200 based on the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. Further, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 303 may be configured to perform a suggestion effect according to the information to the extent that the player can recognize it.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol change>
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence / non-presence determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a stage count process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern selection table. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern replacement table.

In the first special symbol change start processing shown in FIG. 186, in the normal mode (see FIG. 137 (a)), after the game ball wins the first start opening 120, the special symbol change related to the start prize starts. Occasionally, the sub-control circuit 300 performs the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). The sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. Further, prior to executing the process shown in FIG. 186, the sub CPU 301 stores the information stored in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4) in the first sub-holding area, respectively. (0), and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (3) are shifted.

In the first special symbol change start processing, first, the sub CPU 301 executes the stage change occurrence / non-occurrence determination processing (step S9201). Hereinafter, the process of determining whether or not a stage change has occurred will be described with reference to FIG. 187.

In the stage change occurrence determination process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation this time is the first special symbol variation after the transition to the normal mode (step S9251). When it is determined that the special symbol variation this time is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that the condition for generating the stage change is satisfied, and the stage change is performed when the stage change flag is set to ON. After executing the process of step S9252, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9251 that the special symbol variation this time is not the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 301 executes the stage count process (step S9253). Hereinafter, the stage counting process will be described with reference to FIG. 188.

In the stage count process, first, the sub CPU 301 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage shift (step S9261). The value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition indicates the number of first special symbol fluctuations (number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition) counted after the transition to the current production stage, and is stored in the work RAM 303. The sub CPU 301 adds the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition every time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display unit 163) is performed, while the second special symbol variation (second special symbol display). Even if the fluctuation display in unit 164) is performed, the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is not added.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is 20 (step S9262). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is not 20, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage shift is 20, the sub CPU 301 sets the specified number arrival flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number arrival flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. If the specified number arrival flag is set to on when one special symbol change starts, basically (unless the specified number is reached, the production stage transition hold lottery (see step S9273 in FIG. 189) is won). , The stage will be changed in the special symbol change.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 301 sets "0" in the fluctuation count counter after stage transition (clears the value of the fluctuation count counter after stage transition) (step S9264). After that, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the stage counting process performed in step S9253 of FIG. 187 has been described with reference to FIG. 188. The explanation is returned to FIG. 187.

After executing the process of step S9253, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the read-ahead flag (see step S9111 of FIG. 182) is set to ON (step S9254). If it is determined that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes the stage change occurrence lottery process (step S9255). Hereinafter, the stage change occurrence lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 189.

In the stage change occurrence lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the change flag at the time of the next change is set to ON (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change has reached the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition after the stage transition in one special symbol change, but the stage change occurs next time. This is a flag indicating that the fluctuation has been carried over (see step S9279). When it is determined that the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9272). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9272, the sub CPU 301 sets the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation to off (step S9273), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9271 that the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the specified number arrival flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 188) is set to ON (step). S9274). If it is determined that the specified number arrival flag is set to ON, does the sub CPU 301 generate a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) during this special symbol change? Whether or not it is determined (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variation this time is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 301 is based on the information to indicate the current special symbol. It is possible to recognize the effects that can occur during fluctuations.

If it is determined that a specific super reach will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 executes a production stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has been won (step S9277).

If it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during the current special symbol change, or if it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines. The stage change flag is set to on (step S9278). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9278, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation to ON (step S9279). As a result, the stage will be changed in the next special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9279, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9274 that the specified number arrival flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 301 refers to the process result of step S9154 in FIG. 183. In the process of step S9154, when the sub CPU 301 determines that the 7th notice effect will occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning, the sub CPU 301 will move to the first sub holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning. Information indicating that the 7th notice effect is generated during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening prize (7th notice effect generation information) is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-holding area is shifted to the first sub-holding area (0). In the process of step S9280, the sub CPU 301 determines that the 7th notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change when the 7th notice effect generation information is stored in the 1st sub hold area (0).

When it is determined that the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9281, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 7th notice effect does not occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 performs a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the 5th specific super reach) during this special symbol change. ) Occurs (step S9282). This process is the same as the process of step S9275. When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 executes a pre-specified number production stage transition lottery (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. At that time, the sub CPU 301 makes the winning probability of the effect stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number different according to the value of the fluctuation number counter after the stage transition.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number has been won (step S9284). When it is determined that the production stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, if it is determined in step S9284 that the pre-specified number production stage transition lottery has not been won, or the process of step S9285 is performed. After execution, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the stage change occurrence lottery process performed in step S9255 of FIG. 187 has been described with reference to FIG. 189. The explanation is returned to FIG. 187.

When it is determined in step S9254 that the look-ahead flag is set to ON, or after executing the process of step S9255, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. In addition, when the seventh notice effect occurs during the special symbol change this time, all the reserved balls existing at the time when the special symbol change is started are the stage change section reserved balls (see FIG. 183). Since the pre-reading effect is not performed on the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 182), if the 7th notice effect occurs during the special symbol change this time, the determination result in step S9254 is always "NO".

As described above, the stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process performed in step S9201 of FIG. 186 has been described with reference to FIG. 187. The explanation is returned to FIG. 186.

After executing the process of step S9201, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see step S9273, step S9278, step S9281, and step S9285 in FIG. 189) is set to on (step S9202). ).

When it is determined that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes the stage change destination lottery process (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the production stage after the transition due to the stage change by performing a lottery based on the random number value with reference to the stage change destination lottery table. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after the transition is defined in association with the random value range. Has been done. As the stage change destination lottery table, a stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage are provided. In the stage change destination lottery table, the random value ranges are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 draws a lot with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. Lottery is performed with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the lottery is performed with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the production stage after the transition is determined, the sub CPU 301 controls the transition to the determined production stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 updates the information stored in the effect stage flag storage area with the information corresponding to the effect stage after the transition. Then, the sub CPU 301 sets “0” in the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition (clears the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition) (step S9204).

When it is determined in step S9202 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 performs the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9105 in FIG. 182 and step S9202 in FIG. 182) when the first start opening winning corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation this time occurs. It is determined whether or not (see step S9106) has been determined (step S9205). When it is determined that the sub-variation pattern is determined when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol change occurs, the sub CPU 301 performs when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol change occurs. It is determined whether or not the effect stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 182 are executed) and the current effect stage are the same (step S9206).

When it is determined in step S9205 that the sub-variation pattern (see steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182) is not determined when the first start opening winning corresponding to the special symbol variation is generated, or in step S9206. It was determined that the production stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182 were executed) when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol change occurred was not the same as the current production stage. In the case, the sub CPU 301 executes the sub-variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes the sub-variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). Since the processes of steps S9207 and S9208 are the same as the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 182, the description thereof is omitted here.

The effect stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 182 are executed) when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol variation this time occurs in step S9206 is the same as the current effect stage. If it is determined, or after executing the process of step S9208, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the look-ahead flag (see step S9111 of FIG. 182) is set to ON (step S9209).

When it is determined that the read-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes the sub fluctuation pattern replacement process (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub-variation pattern with another sub-variation pattern as needed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 190, the main variation pattern and the sub-variation pattern are defined in association with each other. As the main fluctuation pattern, a main fluctuation pattern "1", a main fluctuation pattern "2", a main fluctuation pattern "3", and the like are provided. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern "10" is a main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 183) corresponding to the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). There is. A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with one main fluctuation pattern, and when the one main fluctuation pattern is selected, any one of the plurality of sub-variation patterns is used. It is supposed to be selected. For example, in the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 182, when the sub CPU 301 receives information indicating that the main fluctuation pattern is "1" from the main control circuit 200 as a fluctuation pattern command, the sub fluctuation pattern One sub-variation pattern is selected from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

The sub-variation pattern includes a sub-variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect can be performed (a look-ahead possible sub-variation pattern) and a sub-variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed (a look-ahead non-pre-reading sub-variation pattern). FIG. 190 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a pre-readable sub-variation pattern and a non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. For example, the sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns, and the sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns. For example, when it is determined in step S9110 of FIG. 182 that the pre-reading effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 301 may use the pre-readable sub-variation pattern as the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106. For example, the pre-readable information (information indicating that the pre-reading effect can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern, the pre-reading non-predictable information (pre-reading effect is performed in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. (Information indicating that it cannot be done) is memorized.

After that, when the first start opening prize is generated and the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening prize (when the look-ahead flag is set to ON in step S9111), it will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. As described above, the sub CPU 301 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-holding area into the pre-reading information. In the process of step S9210 of FIG. 186, when the sub CPU 301 stores the pre-reading information in the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9105 and When the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a look-ahead sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, the sub CPU 301 is the sub determined in steps S9105 and S9106 when the pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. If the fluctuation pattern is a non-look-ahead sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-variation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 191, the sub-variation pattern after the replacement is defined in association with the look-ahead effect pattern for each sub-variation pattern before the replacement. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is defined among the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. The look-ahead effect pattern indicates the type of the look-ahead effect, and is determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 182). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading sub-variation pattern) corresponding to the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 191 as an example of the look-ahead sub-variation pattern, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns “31” to “50” corresponding to the main fluctuation pattern “1” are shown. The look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "35" are associated with the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "1" to "5", and the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "36" to "40" are the look-ahead sub-variation patterns. The fluctuation patterns "6" to "10" are associated with each other, and the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with the look-ahead possible sub-variation patterns "11" to "15". Sub-variation patterns "46" to "50" are associated with pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 of FIG. 186, the sub CPU 301 newly uses the pre-reading sub-variation pattern instead of the already determined sub-variation pattern (pre-readable sub-variation pattern) by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table. Determined as a sub-variation pattern. For example, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 182 is the sub-variation pattern "1", and the look-ahead effect pattern determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 182) is the look-ahead effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern "31" as the sub-variation pattern after replacement. Further, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 182 is the sub-variation pattern "10", and the look-ahead effect pattern determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 182) is the look-ahead effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “37” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement.

In this way, for example, when the main fluctuation pattern "1" is selected, any one of the sub fluctuation patterns "1" to "50" can be selected, but the sub fluctuation pattern selection table In, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "50" are not specified. Thereby, in both the case where the look-ahead effect is performed and the case where the look-ahead effect is not performed, it is possible to select the sub-variation pattern by the common method in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the process related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern. After that, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the sub-variation pattern replacement table is referred to, and the sub-variation pattern is replaced with the look-ahead sub-variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect pattern. The decorative pattern can be changed with. The sub-variation pattern selection table and the sub-variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 202.

Although not shown, the sub-variation pattern selection table includes a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first effect stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second effect stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third effect stage. Has been done. In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value range assigned to each sub-variation pattern is different from each other, and the sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the first effect stage and the second effect stage only. A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third effect stage are set. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 selects the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. If, the sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage is selected. The sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, as the sub-variation pattern replacement table, there are a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. It is provided. In these sub-variation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence between the sub-variation pattern before the replacement and the sub-variation pattern after the replacement is different from each other, and some of the types of the look-ahead effect pattern are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 replaces the sub fluctuation pattern by referring to the sub fluctuation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. If, the sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage is performed. Sub-variation patterns are replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the read-ahead flag is not set on, or after executing the process of step S9210, the sub CPU 301 shifts the already determined sub fluctuation pattern into a sub fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation scale. The replacement process is performed (step S9211). In this process, the sub CPU 301 fluctuates as necessary when the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 171 to 173). Change the time. For example, when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol change occurs, the first start opening prize corresponds to the fourth reserved ball, and the sub change corresponding to the 4-second change. When a pattern is selected, but all the reservations are subsequently exhausted and the special symbol variation is reached, a process of replacing the pattern with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see step S9273, step S9278, step S9281, and step S9285 in FIG. 189) is set to ON (step S9212). When it is determined that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes the stage change wipe color lottery process (step S9213). The stage change wipe color lottery process will be described below.

As described above, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes (number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (FIG. 178) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and becomes the effect stage (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) after the transition. Move to the corresponding background. Further, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (see FIG. 177) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and becomes the effect stage (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) after the transition. Move to the corresponding background. In addition, after the production in the fifth specific super reach that shifts via the production corresponding to the production number "122" is completed, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display, and the production stage after the transition (first production stage). , The second production stage, or the third production stage).

When shifting to the background corresponding to the effect stage after the shift in this way, a predetermined wipe image is displayed on the display device 7. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold color, or special color). Specifically, when the production stage after the transition is the first production stage, the wipe image for the first production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the first production stage in gold, or the first production stage in a special color. Wipe image is displayed. When the production stage after the transition is the second production stage, the default color wipe image for the second production stage, the golden wipe image for the second production stage, or the special color wipe image for the second production stage is displayed. Is displayed. When the production stage after the transition is the third production stage, the default color wipe image for the third production stage, the golden wipe image for the third production stage, or the special color wipe image for the third production stage is displayed. Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 301 determines the color of the wipe image by referring to the stage change wipe color lottery table and performing a lottery based on a random number value. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default colors) are used for each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after the transition. , Gold, and special colors) and the random value range are defined in association with each other.

The stage change wipe color lottery table includes the first stage change wipe color lottery table, the second stage change wipe color lottery table, the third stage change wipe color lottery table, the fourth stage change wipe color lottery table, and the fifth stage. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and in these stage change wipe color lottery tables, the random number value ranges are different from each other. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table correspond to the set values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the sub CPU 301 corresponds to the stage change corresponding to the current set value. The wipe color lottery table is referenced. Then, in each stage change wipe color lottery table, a random value range for the special color is set so that the probability that the special color is selected increases as the set value increases. For example, the probability that a special color wipe image is displayed is higher when the set value is "4" than when the set value is "2", and "6" is higher than when the set value is "4". In the case of, the probability that the special color wipe image is displayed is higher. As a result, the set value is suggested through the appearance frequency of the special color wipe image.

In the above, as an example, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the 7th notice effect (including the case where the 7th notice effect occurs in a game that reaches the specified number), the effect number "121" is set. It has been described that the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed before the corresponding effect or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" may be performed, and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" may not be performed. Further, while both the production corresponding to the production number "121", the production corresponding to the production number "122", and the production corresponding to the production number "131" are performed, the production number "131" is set. Even if the wipe image is not displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, and the wipe image is displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. When such a configuration is adopted, the wipe image is displayed only once in one stage change. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the wipe image.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, when a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol change of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that can be performed during the previous special symbol change of the stage change game when the change pattern corresponding to the seventh notice effect is determined as the main change pattern in the stage change game. In the look-ahead effect, the game freezes while the predetermined image is displayed, and the game shifts to the stage change game in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processes of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (the wipe image is based on the result of the stage change wipe color lottery process performed during the previous special symbol change). May be displayed). Further, the predetermined look-ahead effect may be configured so that it can occur only in one effect stage (for example, a second effect stage).

When it is determined in step S9212 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, or after the process of step S9213 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect lottery process according to the effect stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU 301 includes a sub-variation pattern finally determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value (a sub-variation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211) and a current production stage. Based on the above, a process for determining a specific production content is performed. For example, when the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the first production stage notice content lottery process (see FIG. 138). Further, when the current production stage is the second production stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the second production stage notice content lottery process, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub CPU 301 is the third production stage. Production stage notice content Lottery processing is executed. In the second production stage notice content lottery process and the third production stage notice content lottery process, as in the first production stage notice content lottery process, the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize is based on the sub-variation pattern. The content of the production performed inside is decided. After executing the process of step S9214, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Basic screen display at each production stage>
FIG. 192 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. FIG. 192 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. FIG. 192 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third effect stage.

As shown in FIG. 192 (a), in the first effect stage, a first effect stage name image 9101 showing the name of the first effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. As shown in FIG. 192 (b), in the second effect stage, a second effect stage name image 9102 showing the name of the second effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. As shown in FIG. 192 (c), in the third effect stage, a third effect stage name image 9103 showing the name of the third effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. The first effect stage name image 9101, the second effect stage name image 9102, and the third effect stage name image 9103 are each displayed at the same position on the display device 7.

Further, in each effect stage, the counter image 9104 is displayed on the display device 7. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) performed after the occurrence of the stage change. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The numerator number indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage transition.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), in the first production stage, a bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed. ing. As described above, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are in any of a dark mode and a bright mode, respectively. It is possible to display with (see FIG. 170). On top of that, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are always displayed while staying in the first production stage. It has become.

Specifically, when the pseudo-ream effect is not generated, or when the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the pseudo-ream stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo-ream stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-ream stage notification The watermelon image 9022 and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous step notification are displayed darkly. When the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-ream is "pseudo 2", the bell image 9021 for the pseudo-ream stage notification is displayed brightly, and the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo-ream stage notification and the pseudo-ream stage notification are used. The cherry image 9023 is displayed dark. When the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-ream is "pseudo 3", the bell image 9021 for the pseudo-ream stage notification and the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo-ream stage notification are displayed brightly for pseudo-ream stage notification. The cherry image 9023 is displayed dark. When the super reach is developed via the pseudo continuous effect, the bell image 9021 for the pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for the pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed during the super reach. It is displayed brightly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), the stock timer image 9110 is displayed in the second effect stage. The stock timer image 9110 is an image corresponding to any numerical value (“PLAY TIME”) from “00:00” to “99:99”. The "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which the super reach is performed, and the effect in the super reach is performed over a period of time corresponding to the "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the production (time stock notice) performed during the second production stage.

Although not shown, the first time stock notice, the second time stock notice, and the third time stock notice are provided as the time stock notice. In the first time stock notice, a predetermined item lamp emits light, a predetermined item decoration part (movable accessory) rattles, and the item decoration part pops forward and at the same time, a numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME". Will increase. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration unit. The item decoration part is provided at a predetermined position of the game board unit 10 (for example, as a part of the second character decoration part), and is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). In addition, the item decoration section is decorated in the shape of a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, there is no light emission of the item lamp and rattling operation of the item decoration part as in the first time stock notice, and the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock notice, after the predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, the image is displayed so that the effect is absorbed by the item decoration portion, and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Further, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 1 pattern. When any numerical value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 2 pattern. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 3 pattern. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level MAX pattern. The stock timer images 9110 include "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", and "95:01" to. The numerical value of "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has an effect level 2 pattern. In comparison, the jackpot expectation is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest jackpot expectation. In the effect level 1 pattern to the effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and as the effect level becomes higher, the display mode becomes more flashy. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (c), the character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed in the third production stage. The character appearance meter image 9120 is configured to include a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images that imitate the meters, respectively.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R have an initial display mode (a state in which the meters are not accumulated), a level 1 display mode (a state in which the meters are accumulated in one stage), and respectively. Of the level 2 display mode (state in which the meters are accumulated in two stages), the level 3 display mode (state in which the meters are accumulated in three stages), and the level MAX display mode (state in which the meters are full). It can be displayed in any of the modes.

The meters shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 are accumulated according to the production (meter UP notice) performed during the third production stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meters are accumulated in one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the display device 7 (becomes a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the display device 7 (becomes a standby state).

Of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R, when only the left character 9121L is in the standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for the left character) corresponding to the left character 9121L. Of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R, when only the right character 9121R is in the standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for the right character) corresponding to the right character 9121R. When both the characters of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are in the standby state, the super reach corresponding to both characters (super reach for both characters) is developed.

In the left character super reach, when the right character 9121R appears in the display device 7, it shifts to the super reach for both characters, and in the right character super reach, when the left character 9121L appears in the display device 7, it shifts to the super reach for both characters. Move to. Further, in the super reach for the left character, when the first ally character appears on the display device 7, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Similarly, in the right character super reach, when the first ally character appears on the display device 7, it develops into a predetermined super reach. In addition, in the super reach for both characters, if the button repeated hitting effect is successful, it develops into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reach are the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 154 (a)) that shifts when the “cherry” icon is displayed in the first production stage.

Even when the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the silhouettes of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are displayed on the display device 7. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed in the display device 7 in the default state, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R. Is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the display device 7 in the default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is blinked in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is blinked in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is lit in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is lit and displayed in red. In this way, as the stage of the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 goes up, the jackpot expectation becomes higher.

Even if the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to the right character 9121R may be in the standby state. Specifically, when the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a rotating manner, and various icons may be stopped and displayed after the rotation is completed. As the icons that can be stopped and displayed in this way, a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like are provided. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the left character super reach. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the super reach for the right character. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the above-mentioned predetermined super reach.

<8th notice production>
FIG. 193 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 193 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 193 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The eighth notice effect shown in FIG. 193 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the second effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). The eighth notice production can occur only in the second production stage.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative design is tempered (becomes a reach mode) occurs. The sign is the second character lamp (Fig. 178).
The blinking of (see (c)) suggests that tempai fanning occurs. In the above, it has been described that the corresponding character lamps are always turned on while staying at each production stage. However, in a game other than the game in which the specified number is reached, the corresponding character lamp may be basically turned off. In the case of such a configuration, the lighting of the second character lamp may be used as the above-mentioned sign.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "151" is an effect that fades out after the above-mentioned sign occurs. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "152", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai (tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to the failure of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning failure image) is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "153", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai (tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the display device 7. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, the notice shifts to the notice after the tempai success.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "154", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai (tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the display device 7, and "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, the notice shifts to the notice after the tempai success. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "155", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai (tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the display device 7. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, it shifts to the intense heat notice after that.

The predetermined movable accessory that operates in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "152" to "155" is the same movable accessory that operates in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 153). Further, when the tempai fanning success image is displayed in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "153" to "155", the decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode. In addition, after the productions corresponding to the production numbers "153" and "154" are performed, the notice shifts to the notice after the success of the tenpai, and when the notice after the success of the tenpai ends, the 6th specific super reach, the 7th specific super reach, and Develops into one of the first specified super reach. In the notice after the success of Tempai, a connecting production corresponding to the super reach of the development destination will be performed.

In particular, in the case of developing into the sixth specific super reach, an image showing the title of the sixth specific super reach is displayed on the display device 7 in the notice after the success of the tempai. In the sixth specific super reach, a predetermined slot game is played. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons including the "cherry" icon are variablely displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and then stopped and displayed. In a slot game, when the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 154 (a)) that shifts when the “cherry” icon is displayed in the first production stage. Therefore, it can be said that the slot game is a mission for shifting to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, the "PLAY TIME" shown in the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (a value greater than 0), the slot game is repeated. Then, when "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played over a period of time according to the "PLAY TIME". If three "cherry" icons are lined up within the time, the mission is cleared and the game develops into the prescribed super reach. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

As described above, in the production corresponding to the production number "154", "PLAY TIME" is stocked, and the stock is due to the above-mentioned second time stock notice. In the second production stage, both the time stock notice and the jackpot notice production (for example, the eighth notice production) may occur during one special symbol change.

In the intense heat notice that shifts after the effect corresponding to the effect number "155" is performed, one or more of the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are displayed on the display device 7. Appears in. Then, it develops into a super reach according to the combination of characters that have appeared. The intense heat notice can also occur in the first production stage and the third production stage.

Four timings are provided as the timings at which the above-mentioned signs can occur. Specifically, when the sign occurs 4.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and when the sign occurs 8.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). When a sign occurs from 12.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (timing 3), and when a sign occurs from 16.5 seconds after the start of change of the decorative symbol (timing 4). Is provided. The sign occurs at one of these four timings. At timing 2, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 1, and at timing 3, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 2. However, at the timing 4, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds as compared with the timing 3. In FIG. 193 (b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 193 (c), in the effect (timing 1) corresponding to the effect number "152", each decorative symbol (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol) starts to change. It is designed to stop when 11 seconds have passed (when the display of the tempai fanning failure image ends). As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that each decorative symbol is stopped when the wipe display is displayed after the tempai fanning fails and the background is returned to the normal background. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the fanning during the tempai fanning. Regarding timings 2 to 4, from the same viewpoint, the stop timings of the decorative symbols are 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, 19 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 23 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, respectively.

<Logo lamp notice production>
FIG. 194 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp notice effect. FIG. 194 (b) and FIG. 194 (c) are diagrams showing a time chart of the logo lamp notice effect.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. Hereinafter, the logo lamp will be described in more detail.

The logo cover includes a first logo portion, a second logo portion, and a third logo portion. The first logo part is decorated in the shape of the first word, and the second logo part is decorated in the shape of the second word. The logo part is decorated in the shape of the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are predetermined words (character strings), respectively. In the present specification, for convenience, the first word is "X", the second word is "Y", and so on. The third word may be called "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left side portion of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the central portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right side portion of the logo cover. ..

The logo lamp is composed of a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo portion, and the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo portion. The third logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo portion. As a result, the letter "X" is lit by emitting the first logo lamp, the letter "Y" is lit by emitting the second logo lamp, and the letter "Z" is lit by emitting the third logo lamp. It is possible to create an appearance that lights up.

In this embodiment, the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp advance notice effect shown in FIG. 194 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). .. The logo lamp notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other big hit notice effects during one special symbol change.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "161", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the first logo lamp (character "X") is turned on. It is a production that turns off the lights. In the production corresponding to the production number "162", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character "Y") is lit for a predetermined time (1). Lights up for (seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to light), then the first logo lamp (letter "X") and the second logo lamp (letter "Y"). Is a production that turns off.

In the production corresponding to the production number "163", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character "Y") is lit for a predetermined time (1). Lights up for (seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to light), after which the third logo lamp (letter "Z") lights up (first logo lamp ("X"). (Letter) and the second logo lamp (the letter "Y") will continue to light). The lighting of the first logo lamp (letter "X"), the second logo lamp (letter "Y"), and the third logo lamp (letter "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol change.

The productions corresponding to the production numbers "161" to "163" are productions related to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai. As the letters are lit in sequence, such as "X"-> "Y"-> "Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern is a tenpai (always a reach mode). That is, the logo lamp notice effect is an effect in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 194 (b) shows a time chart in the case where the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage. Here, two timings are provided as the lighting timing of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 5.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative pattern (for 10 seconds tempai), 9.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change of the decorative pattern. The case where the first logo lamp (the letter "X") is lit from the time point (for 14-second tempai) is provided. In the first effect stage and the third effect stage, when the decorative symbol fluctuates with the default fluctuation pattern, the reach mode is set 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (10 seconds tempai) and the reach mode is 14 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. There is a time (14 seconds tempai) (see FIGS. 171 and 173).

The two timings in FIG. 194 (b) correspond to these two types of tempai timings. As a result, when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "10 seconds for tempai" in FIG. 194 (b). Further, when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "14 seconds for tempai" in FIG. 194 (b).

When the logo lamp advance notice production is performed on the second production stage, four timings are provided as the lighting timing of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and when the first logo lamp (the letter "X") lights up 10 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (the first logo lamp) When the letter "X" is lit (timing 2), when the first logo lamp (letter "X") is lit 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (timing 3), and when the decorative symbol is lit (timing 3). The case where the first logo lamp (the letter "X") is turned on (timing 4) is provided from the time when 18 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. In FIG. 194 (c), only timing 1 is illustrated. Each of these four timings corresponds to the four timings at which the above-mentioned eighth notice effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to turn on the logo lamp at the timing when the tempai fanning is performed in the eighth notice production.

The logo lamp advance notice effect described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuous production. That is, any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" can occur in each of the "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2", and "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect. For example, in "pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from the time when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and in "pseudo 2", the first from the time when a predetermined time elapses from the resumption of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. The logo lamp (letter "X") lights up, and in "pseudo 3", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after a predetermined time has elapsed from the resumption of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. At this time, for example, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 1", the process does not shift to "pseudo 2", while the effect number "163" is supported in "pseudo 1". When the effect is performed, the transition to "pseudo 2" may be performed. Further, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 2", the production does not shift to "pseudo 3", while the production corresponding to the production number "163" in "pseudo 2" is performed. If it is done, it may shift to "pseudo 3". Further, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 3", the process does not shift to the super reach, while the production corresponding to the production number "163" is performed in "pseudo 3". In that case, it may be possible to shift to super reach.

<1st production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the first production stage logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for notice content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 195 is the first effect stage when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 186). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 after the lottery process (see FIG. 138).

In the first production stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not a pseudo continuous production occurs based on the information included in the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9301). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9302). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9303). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 196.

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production (step S9321). In this process, the sub CPU 301 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 3". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 3". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 301 will notify the logo lamp for pseudo 3 based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation. Is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in the "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp advance notice production is not performed in "pseudo 3" (step S9323). .. After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content, which is performed in step S9303 of FIG. 195, has been described with reference to FIG. 196. The explanation is returned to FIG. 195.

When it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9303 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9304). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 197.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 301 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 2". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 2". do.

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 is determined (step S9342). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9322 of FIG. 196 is being executed, while the sub CPU 301 is otherwise (step S9323 of FIG. 196). When the process of Pseudo 3 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "Pseudo 3"), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 3 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9344). .. In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp warning effect is not performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9345). ). After executing the process of step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content, which is performed in step S9304 of FIG. 195, has been described with reference to FIG. 197. The explanation is returned to FIG. 195.

When it is determined in step S9301 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9304 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9305). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 198.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub CPU 301 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 1". do.

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 is determined. Determine (step S9362). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9343 or step S9344 of FIG. 197 is being executed, while in other cases (FIG. 197). When the process of step S9345 of the above step S9345 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp advance notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo 3 logo lamp advance notice content has been determined (step S9364). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9322 of FIG. 196 is being executed, while the sub CPU 301 is otherwise (step S9323 of FIG. 196). If the process of the above is executed, if the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo-continuous logo lamp notice has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9366). .. In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 301 performs the logo lamp warning effect in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such thing (step S9367). After executing the processing of step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content performed in step S9305 of FIG. 195 has been described with reference to FIG. 198. The explanation is returned to FIG. 195.

After executing the process of step S9305, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Second production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a second production stage logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 199 is the second effect stage when the current effect stage is the second effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 186). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 after the lottery process.

In the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 193) occurs during this special symbol change (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301 performs the content of the effect performed during the special symbol change based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change in the second effect stage notice content lottery process. I have decided. In the process of step S9401, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the eighth notice effect is determined as the effect to be performed during the special symbol variation this time.

When it is determined that the eighth notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 determines the logo lamp notice content based on the sub change pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the eighth notice effect does not occur during the special symbol change this time, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp advance notice effect is not performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Third production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for the third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for notice content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for notice content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 200 is the third effect stage when the current effect stage is the third effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 186). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 after the lottery process.

In the third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9452). In the third production stage, the stage in the pseudo-continuous production progresses only to "pseudo 2". Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 201.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301 performs the decorative symbol in what pattern at the stage of "pseudo 2" during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. It is decided whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9461, the sub CPU 301 has a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tempai stop pattern) such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 2". In "pseudo 2", it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is one of the decorative symbol stop patterns (14-second tempai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. ..

If it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 301 will notify the logo lamp for pseudo 2 based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation. Is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp advance notice production is not performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9463). .. After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content performed in step S9452 of FIG. 200 has been described with reference to FIG. 201. The explanation is returned to FIG. 200.

When it is determined in step S9451 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9452 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9453). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 202.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production. (Step S4971). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301 performs the decorative symbol in what pattern at the stage of "pseudo 1" during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. It is decided whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S4971, the sub CPU 301 has a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tempai stop pattern) such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1". In "pseudo 1", it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is one of the decorative symbol stop patterns (14-second tempai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. ..

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 is determined. Determine (step S9472). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9462 of FIG. 201 is being executed, while in other cases (step S9463 of FIG. 196). When the process of Pseudo 2 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 2 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9473). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9474). .. In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S4971 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 301 performs the logo lamp warning effect in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such thing (step S9475). After executing the process of step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content performed in step S9453 of FIG. 200 has been described with reference to FIG. 202. The explanation is returned to FIG. 200.

After executing the process of step S9453, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Screen display in probabilistic mode>
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the probability variation mode.

As described above, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time is 600,000 msec) starts in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 137 (a)). In the bonus mode, while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600,000 msec), most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 151, and a large number of them. The game ball is paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game while expecting that a variation pattern having a variation time of 600,000 msec (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136) is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern. For this reason, in the probability variation mode, every time the normal symbol change is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) corresponding to the pattern of the normal symbol variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the probability variation mode, the drum image 9201 (left drum image 9201L, middle drum image 9201C, and right drum image 9201R) is displayed on the display device 7. The drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). Then, in the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the drum symbol 9202 (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R).

In the example shown in FIG. 203 (a), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in such a manner that they are fluctuating. In the example shown in FIG. 203 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped as the "bell" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol, respectively. It is displayed in such a manner. In this way, in the probability variation mode, every time the symbol is changed, an effect (drum variation effect) that imitates the reel variation display and the stop display (slot game) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the probability variation mode, the remaining ST number image 9203 and the prize ball number image 9204 are also displayed on the display device 7. The remaining ST number image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining ST number) performed in the probability variation mode. When the probability variation mode is started, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number image 9203, and thereafter, each time the special symbol change is performed, the number indicated as the remaining ST number image 9203 is decremented by one. When the number indicated as the remaining ST number image 9203 becomes "0", the probability variation mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The prize ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode.

Here, in the present specification, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is referred to as the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, as in the probability variation mode, the value indicating the remaining number of STs is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol change is performed once. Then, when the value indicating the remaining number of STs becomes 0, the mode shifts from the first bonus mode to the normal mode. Therefore, the probability variation mode and the first bonus mode are collectively referred to as the remaining ST number subtraction mode. When shifting from the probabilistic mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probabilistic mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is inherited in the first bonus mode as well. In the present specification, the remaining ST number subtraction mode may be referred to as a probability variation mode.

On the other hand, even when the start condition of the big hit game state is satisfied in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 137 (a)). In the present specification, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the jackpot game state as a trigger is referred to as a second bonus mode. When the mode shifts to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST number is reset, and the remaining ST number is not updated (managed) in the second bonus mode. When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining number of STs.

<Drum fluctuation production determination process>
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect determination process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The drum variation effect determination process shown in FIG. 204 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (passing through the gate). Is. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126 by receiving a ball passing detector passing detection command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126. The ball passage detector passage detection command is set by the main control circuit 200 in the ball passage detector passage detection process and transmitted to the sub control circuit 300.

In the drum variation effect determination process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (see FIG. 137 (a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 301 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time corresponds to the variation in the normal symbol loss length (variation shown in FIG. 136). It is determined whether or not the pattern is “05H”) (step S9502). Since the ball passage detector passage detection command contains information indicating the normal symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 301 receives the ball passage detector passage detection command to cause the sub CPU 301 to perform the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. Can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is a predetermined number (10 times) or more. (Step S9503). The remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is less than the predetermined number (10 times), the sub CPU 301 determines whether the ST recovery is confirmed (whether it is determined to shift to the jackpot game state) (step). S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the ST recovery when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the currently performed special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. It is judged that the ball is in the jackpot game state (it has been decided to shift to the jackpot game state). As described above, after the jackpot game state ends, the probability change flag is set to ON (see FIG. 133), and the probability change mode is restored (ST is restored). However, when the jackpot game state is executed and the number of jackpot game states executed from the first hit reaches a predetermined number (5 times) (when the limiter is reached), the probability change mode is not restored. , Shift to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that the ST recovery has not been confirmed.

When it is determined in step S9502 that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, or in step S9504, ST recovery is not confirmed (big hit game state). (Step S9505), the sub CPU 301 determines the drum variation effect pattern to be a loss pattern. As the loss pattern, all the loss patterns and some loss patterns are provided. The all-loss pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which all different symbols are stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. As for some lost patterns, of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, the same symbol is stopped and displayed as two symbols, and the remaining one symbol is different from the two symbols. Is a drum fluctuation effect pattern in which is displayed as a stop.

As all the lost patterns, for example, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. Such a pattern or a pattern in which the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. Etc. are provided. As some lost patterns, for example, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. The "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns such as a pattern are provided.

In the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to obtain one loss pattern from among such a plurality of loss patterns (a plurality of all loss patterns and a plurality of partial loss patterns). It is determined as the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the passage of the gate this time. After executing the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In step S9503, it is determined that the number of remaining STs is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (10 times), or in step S9504, it is determined that ST recovery is confirmed (it is determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state). In this case, the sub CPU 301 determines the drum variation effect pattern as the hit pattern (step S9506). The hit pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which the same symbols are all stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. As the hit pattern, for example, as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, all the "bell" symbols are stopped and displayed, and all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped and displayed. A plurality of patterns such as a pattern in which the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed are provided. In the process of step S9506, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to select one of the plurality of hit patterns during the normal symbol variation corresponding to the current gate passage. Determined as a pattern for drum fluctuation production.

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes a loss length variation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9508). When it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the loss length variation look-ahead flag to ON (step S9509). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation is determined in the subsequent drum variation effect (the loss length variation look-ahead effect is performed) (see FIG. 205). The loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag is set to off when the normal symbol variation (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the current gate passage starts.

When it is determined in step S9508 that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9509, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect start processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the drum variation effect start processing shown in FIG. 205, the effect mode determination process (FIG. 76) is performed by the sub control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation related to the passage of the game ball starts after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126. This is the process performed in step S205). The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol memory check process (see step S192 in FIG. 64).

In the drum variation effect start processing, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (see FIG. 137 (a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 301 loses the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs (step in FIG. 204). It is determined whether or not it is (see S9505) (step S9522).

When it is determined that the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is not a loss pattern, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation this time occurs is a loss pattern, the sub CPU 301 determines the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 204). ) Is set to on (step S9523).

When it is determined that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag is not set on, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 changes the drum variation effect pattern to the look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the partial loss pattern described above.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 301 has a random value when all the drum fluctuation effect patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 204) determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation this time occurs are lost patterns. By performing a lottery based on the above, one partial loss pattern is selected from a plurality of partial loss patterns, and the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during the current normal symbol variation is the selected partial loss pattern. Replace with a pattern. If the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is a partial loss pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform such replacement processing and has already been determined. Maintain the drum fluctuation effect pattern. After executing the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation currently being performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball. 207 to 209 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the drum fluctuation effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, up to four start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern) are reserved. In FIG. 206 (a), there are three reserved balls in a situation where one normal symbol change is performed, and 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol change this time, and the first reserved ball. 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to, and 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the normal symbol corresponding to the third reserved ball. It shows a state in which 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the symbol variation.

In FIG. 206 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 206 (a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 126 while the normal symbol change is being performed, and the normal lottery accompanying the passage ( It shows a state in which 600,000 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball). FIG. 206 (c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (b) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206 (d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (c) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206 (e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (d) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206 (f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (e) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (600,000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 207 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b). In FIG. 207 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 207 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 207 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 207 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206 (c). In FIG. 207 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 207 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (c) of 500 ms, in FIG. 207 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 207 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206 (d). In FIG. 207 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 207 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (d) of 500 ms, in FIG. 207 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 207 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206 (e). In FIG. 207 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 207 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (e) of 500 ms, in FIG. 207 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 207 (i) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206 (f). In FIG. 207 (j), the variation display shown in FIG. 207 (i) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. 207 (j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are hit patterns. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 207 (k), an image corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

As described above, one drum variation effect is a variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol. It is composed of a stop display of 9202R. The variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation and is performed for 500 ms, and each drum symbol 9202 stops at the same time. Here, when the result of the normal lottery is per normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is 500 ms, so that the stop timings of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are set. It coincides with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

Further, the stop display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is performed for 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the variation display of the next drum variation effect 1500 ms after the variation of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R has stopped in one drum variation effect. be. On the other hand, when the result of the ordinary lottery is per ordinary symbol, the time from the end of the ordinary symbol fluctuation (after the ordinary symbol is stopped) to the end of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol change after 1500 ms has elapsed from the stop of the normal symbol in one normal symbol change. As a result, the cycle of the drum fluctuation effect and the cycle of the normal symbol fluctuation can be matched.

FIG. 207 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, but the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery is not won. On the other hand, FIG. 208 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the lose length fluctuation look-ahead lottery is won.

FIG. 208 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b). FIG. 208 (b) shows that the variation display shown in FIG. 208 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 208 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 208 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206 (c). FIG. 208 (d) shows that the variation display shown in FIG. 208 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 208 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (c) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 208 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206 (d). FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which the variation display shown in FIG. 208 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 208 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206 (d) is 500 ms and the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 208 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206 (e). In FIG. 208 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 208 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 208 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (e) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 208 (i) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206 (f). In FIG. 208 (j), the variation display shown in FIG. 208 (i) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. 208 (j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are the hit patterns. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 208 (k), the image corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 208, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 208 (j)), and are left. The drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a lost pattern (see FIGS. 208 (d), 208 (f), and 208 (h)). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation was determined (the normal symbol loss length variation was won). Even if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in the loss pattern ( See step S9505 in FIG. 204). If a partial loss pattern appears even though the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, it can be said that the stop display of the partial loss pattern is a ghost effect.

In the above, an example in which a part of the loss pattern is stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect of the loss length fluctuation has been described. The loss length variation look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, the loss length variation look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 209 may be adopted.

FIG. 209 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b). In FIG. 209 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 209 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 209 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 209 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206 (c). In FIG. 209 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 209 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (c) of 500 ms, in FIG. 209 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 209 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 206 (d) and 206 (e). As described above, the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is usually performed over 500 ms. On the other hand, the variation display shown in FIG. 209 (e) is performed over 4500 ms. In FIG. 209 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 209 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 209 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 206 (d) and (e) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 209 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206 (f). In FIG. 209 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 209 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 209 (i), an image corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

In the example shown in FIG. 209, one drum fluctuation effect is performed while the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206 (d) and the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206 (e) are performed (two normal symbol fluctuations). It is supposed to be done. This suggests that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won. As described above, the loss length variation look-ahead effect may be configured such that one drum variation effect is performed while a plurality of normal symbol variations are performed. It is desirable that such a longer-than-normal drum fluctuation effect (long-time drum variation effect) be performed when the normal symbol loss length variation is won, but the normal symbol loss length variation is not won. It may be done in some cases. In a form in which a long-time drum fluctuation effect can be performed in both cases where the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the drum fluctuation effect to be performed for a long time with a high probability as compared with the case where the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won.

As described above, in FIGS. 207 to 209, the gate passage occurs in the situation where the remaining number of STs is a predetermined number (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation corresponds to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. An example in which the pattern was determined was described. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a hit pattern. On the other hand, the gate passage occurred in the situation where the remaining number of STs was less than the predetermined number (10 times), and the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation was determined as the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a loss pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 204).

The normal symbol loss length fluctuation is performed over a long period of time (600,000 ms), but if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation occurs after the number of remaining STs is reduced, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed. Then, the probability change mode (probability change game state) ends. When the probabilistic game state ends, if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (see FIG. 134). It will be almost impossible to win a prize. Therefore, in this case, since the significance of winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is lost, it is decided to refrain from making the hit pattern appear.

Although it is explained that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 600,000 ms, the variation time is not limited to this example. For example, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, a plurality of fluctuation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are provided. It may be done. In this case, the remaining number of STs in which the hit pattern can appear may be made different according to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. For example, when T1 second (for example, 60 seconds) and T2 seconds (for example, 120 seconds) (T1 <T2) are provided as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T1 second is provided. When it is determined, the hit pattern appears on condition that the remaining ST number is N1 times (for example, 10 times) or more, while when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T2 seconds is determined, the remaining ST number is N2 times (for example, 10 times). For example, the hit pattern may appear on the condition that it is 20 times or more (N1 <N2).

Further, the mode of the hit pattern may be different depending on the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. For example, when the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined is 40 or more, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined. When the number of remaining STs is 20 or more and less than 40, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined is less than 20. The "bell" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is started at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation. The start timing of the variation display of the drum symbol 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variation display of the drum symbol 9202 may be started while the normal symbol variation is being performed. For example, the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R may be started from the time when 1000 ms has elapsed from the start of the normal symbol variation. In this case, for example, the fluctuation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is performed from the time when one normal symbol change is started to the time when 1000 ms has elapsed to the time when 1500 ms has elapsed. , The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped from the time when 1500 ms elapses from the start of the normal symbol change to the time when 1000 ms elapses from the start of the next normal symbol change. It can be configured to display.

In this way, by performing the fluctuation display and the stop display of the drum symbol 9202 so as to straddle the two normal symbol fluctuations, for example, while the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206 (e) is being performed ( For example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 207 (j)) after 1500 ms have elapsed from the start of the normal symbol variation. Is possible. As a result, the stop display shown in FIG. 207 (j) is performed before the normal symbol loss length fluctuation shown in FIG. 206 (f) is started. As a result, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is started. Immediately after that, the image as shown in FIG. 207 (k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 207 (j) may be terminated before the start of the normal symbol loss length variation or at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length variation.

In the above, it has been described that the image as shown in FIG. 207 (k) is displayed after the stop display shown in FIG. 207 (j) is performed, and then or at the same time, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts. When the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts, it may be configured not to display either the stop display shown in FIG. 207 (j) or the image displayed as shown in FIG. 207 (k). However, both may be configured not to be displayed. Further, by displaying a small symbol instead of (or in addition to) the stop display shown in FIG. 207 (j) and the image display as shown in FIG. 207 (k), the normal symbol loss length is obtained. It may be configured to indicate that the fluctuation starts.

<Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion production>
FIGS. 210 and 211 are diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect.

As described above, in the probability variation mode (see FIG. 137 (a)), when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time is 600,000 msec) starts, the mode shifts to the first bonus mode. .. In the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect is performed. In the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed on the display device 7. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is an image showing the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is suggested through the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image. ..

In FIG. 210 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is displayed on the display device 7. In the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a, after the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a hit pattern (see FIG. 207 (j)), the drum symbol 9202 Is displayed when the display of is finished. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 207 (k)) corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the first bonus mode). In this example, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600: 00" as the normal symbol fluctuation of 600,000 ms starts as the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

After the state shown in FIG. 210 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. 210 (b) to (j), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b → the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210j, and so on. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j are sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image. 9210b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j, the color of the image becomes lighter as the number shown by the image changes. It will become. The color of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. There is.

In the above, the example in which the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode has been described, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. ..

In the first bonus mode, a battle effect may be performed during the first bonus mode as an effect suggesting that the result of the second special lottery may have been a big hit. In the battle effect during the first bonus mode, the display device 7 displays how the ally character and the enemy character fight. When a ally character defeats an enemy character in such a battle effect during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where the expectation that the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is relatively high.

In FIG. 211 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a is displayed on the display device 7. In this example, in the battle production during the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at the time when the ally character defeats the enemy character is about 30,000 ms, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a Is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 211 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to (j), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211j, and so on. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j are sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Similar to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j, they do not appear in the figure, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol loss length is lost. Length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j and the image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. There is.

It should be noted that the numbers shown by the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image do not necessarily correspond exactly to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time As an image, a plurality of remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds) , And 600 seconds) are provided. Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time When an image is displayed, the image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at that time is selected, and the selected normal symbol loss length is selected. The variable remaining time image is displayed. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 210 is a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 211 corresponds to 30 seconds. It is an image of the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image as described above is displayed on the display device 7, the drum fluctuation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and The right drum symbol 9202R is not displayed on the display device 7).

<Processing at the time of big hit in the 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing a first bonus mode medium jackpot processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing shown in FIG. 212, when the start condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in the first bonus mode and the jackpot gaming state starts, the sub-control circuit 300 determines the effect mode (FIG. FIG. This is the process performed in step S205 of 76). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode in which the transition is triggered by the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts by receiving the jackpot start command.

In the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing, first, the sub CPU 301 executes the prize ball counter addition processing (step S9601). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

Next, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts when the start condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in the probability variation mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303. After that, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 213 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the jackpot gaming state ends in the second bonus mode. .. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the jackpot game state ends by receiving the jackpot end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 300, for example, when the jackpot flag is cleared.

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the number of limiters has been reached based on the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 301 has a predetermined number of times (5 times) of the big hit game states executed from the first hit (the big hit game state ending this time is the fifth big hit after the first hit (including the first hit). Judge whether or not it is in a gaming state).

When it is determined that the limiter number has not been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length is changing (currently, the normal symbol loss length is changing). Determine (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern related to the normal symbol variation has expired after the variation display of the normal symbol related to the normal symbol loss length variation is started. The sub CPU 301 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the above-mentioned normal symbol change start command. Further, since the normal symbol change start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol change pattern (see FIG. 136), the sub CPU 301 receives the normal symbol change start command to cause the normal symbol change. The fluctuation time of the pattern can be recognized. Then, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 300. The remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed in a predetermined cycle. In the process of step S9622, when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is larger than 0, the sub CPU 301 determines that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is in progress.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is fluctuating, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the probability variation mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the probability variation mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the big hit game state, the normal lottery is performed (the normal symbol variation pattern is determined) as in the non-big hit game state. It is supposed to be. The normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the gate may be performed during the big hit game state, or may be performed after the end of the big hit game state.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one of the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a jackpot.

After executing the process of step S9623, if it is determined in step S9625 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 has the number of prize balls. The counter addition process is executed (step S9627). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215. After executing the process of step S9627, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9621 that the number of limiters has been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the normal mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303.

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9628, the sub CPU 301 executes the result display process during the bonus mode (step S9629). The result display processing in the bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. After executing the process of step S9629, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing a process at the end of the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 214 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the first bonus mode. Is. As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 300, and the sub control circuit 300 has the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. By referring to the remaining time, it can be recognized that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one of the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a jackpot.

If it is determined in step S9641 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the prize ball counter addition process (step S9643). ). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the result display process in the bonus mode (step S9644). The result display processing in the bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the probability variation mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the probability variation mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303. After that, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Prize ball counter addition processing>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing a prize ball counter addition process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The prize ball counter addition processing shown in FIG. 215 is the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing (see step S9601 in FIG. 212), the second bonus mode end processing (see step S9627 in FIG. 213), or the first bonus. This is a process performed at the end of the mode (see step S9643 in FIG. 213).

In the prize ball counter addition process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the extra game flag is set to ON (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In this embodiment, when the probability variation mode is changed to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode is completed, the player stays in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode. There is. In this case, it is considered that the bonus mode is continuing (consecutive villa). In the following, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that first shifts from the probability variation mode will be referred to as an initial game. Further, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode in which the player stays continuously after the end of the initial game is referred to as an extra game.

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 301 initially sets the game prize ball counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during this bonus mode is managed at any time in the work RAM 303. In the process of step S9662, the sub CPU 301 stores the total number as the value of the initial game prize ball counter in a predetermined area of the work RAM 303. Subsequently, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game flag on (step S9663).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 301 sets the value of the extra game prize ball counter to the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game). The total number of game balls paid out in the game is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 303. In the process of step S9664, the sub CPU 301 pays out the game ball to the value of the extra game prize ball counter stored in the work RAM 303 during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode). The value obtained by adding the total number of the above is stored in the work RAM 303 as the value of the new extra game in-game prize ball counter.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing a result display process in the bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 216 is a process performed in the second bonus mode end process (see step S9629 in FIG. 213) or the first bonus mode end process (see step S9644 in FIG. 214). be.

In the result display processing during the bonus mode, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 215) is set to ON (step S9881).

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 301 determines the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). Initially, the value of the game prize ball counter) is displayed on the display device 7 (step S9682).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 301 displays the total value of the value of the initial game prize ball counter and the value of the extra game prize ball counter on the display device 7 ( Step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out during the period from the transition from the probability variation mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive villa section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game flag to off (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Direction processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 217, for example, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 213 that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the sub control circuit 300 is performed before the processing of step S9623 is performed. Is done by.

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 300, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 301 sets the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode (step S9702). The effect data for returning to the probability change mode is effect data corresponding to an effect indicating that the state returns to the probability change mode (probability change mode return effect), and is stored in the program ROM 202. By executing the process of step S9702, the probability change mode return effect is performed. For example, a probability change mode return image (an image indicating that the probability change mode is returned) is displayed on the display device 7.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game entry effect data (step S9703). The extra game rush effect data is the effect data corresponding to the effect indicating that the extra game is rushed (extra game rush effect), and is stored in the program ROM 202. By executing the process of step S9703, the extra game rush effect is performed. For example, an extra game rush image (an image indicating that the extra game is rushed) is displayed on the display device 7.

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 301 may move to the process of step S9625 of FIG. 213. Further, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 213 that the normal symbol loss length is not changing, the sub CPU 301 is the same as the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). The effect data (different from the effect data) may be set, or the effect data different from the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode (different from the effect data for entering the extra game) may be set.

<Processing during the 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the processing during the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 218 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 of FIG. 76) by the sub-control circuit 300 in the first bonus mode. For example, the processing during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol change starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 300, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 301 executes the process (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9722). The first bonus mode processing (I) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode processing (II) (step S9724). The first bonus mode processing (II) will be described later with reference to FIG. 220.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode processing (III) (step S9725). The first bonus mode processing (III) will be described later with reference to FIG. 221.

After executing the process of step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (I)>
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (I) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (I) shown in FIG. 219 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9722 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode processing (I), first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9742). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (A) during the first bonus mode (step S9743). In the first bonus mode, the effect (A) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode end fanning lottery, and when the lottery is won, displays the first bonus mode end fanning image on the display device 7. The first bonus mode end fanning image is an image that fangs the end of the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9743, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (B) during the first bonus mode (step S9744). In the first bonus mode production (B), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number of times is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9744, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9741 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9745). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (C) during the first bonus mode (step S9746). In the first bonus mode, the effect (C) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9746, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (D) during the first bonus mode (step S9747). In the first bonus mode, the effect (D) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9747, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (II)>
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (II) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (II) shown in FIG. 220 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9724 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode processing (II), first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9762). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (E) during the first bonus mode (step S9763). In the first bonus mode production (E), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. This is the effect that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9763, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (F) during the first bonus mode (step S9764). In the first bonus mode production (F), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining number of STs is 5 times. This is the effect that is performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the effect (E) during the first bonus mode. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9764, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9761 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9765). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (G) during the first bonus mode (step S9766). In the first bonus mode production (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, the remaining ST number is less than 5 times, and This is a production that is performed when a big hit is won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9766, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (H) during the first bonus mode (step S9767). In the first bonus mode production (H), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. It is a production performed when the number is less than and the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (D) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9767, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (III)>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (III) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (III) shown in FIG. 221 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9725 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode processing (III), the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9782). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9783). In the first bonus mode production (I), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times or more. And, it is a production performed when a big hit is won. In the process of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is small. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (J) during the first bonus mode (step S9784). In the first bonus mode, the production (J) has less than 15 seconds remaining in the normal symbol loss length fluctuation in the first bonus mode, has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and has 5 or more remaining STs. And, it is a production performed when the big hit is not won. In the process of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is small. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the effect (I) during the first bonus mode. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

When it is determined in step S9781 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9785). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (K) during the first bonus mode (step S9786). In the first bonus mode production (K), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, the remaining ST number of times is less than 5, and the jackpot It is a production that is performed when you are elected. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9785 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (L) during the first bonus mode (step S9787). In the first bonus mode, the effect (L) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining number of STs is less than 5 times. It is a production that is performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

After executing the processes of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 301 extends the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets the fluctuation time (for example, 600,000 ms) of the winning normal symbol fluctuation as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The winning ordinary symbol variation is the ordinary symbol variation related to the ordinary symbol loss length variation among the pending ordinary symbol variations. If the pending normal symbol fluctuations include a plurality of winning normal symbol fluctuations, the sub CPU 301 will start the fluctuation first among the plurality of winning normal symbol fluctuations. The fluctuation time is set as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length change set in this way is not updated by the timer update process until the winning normal symbol change starts, and is subtracted after the start of the winning normal symbol change.

After executing the process of step S9788, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. As a result, after that, the production will be performed according to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length fluctuation. In other words, when the content of the production is decided, it is usually treated as if the remaining time of the symbol loss length fluctuation was extended. For example, in the second special symbol variation this time, any one of the effects (I) to (L) in the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 221 is caused by the processing of step S9725 in FIG. 218. On the other hand, in the next second special symbol change, the process of step S9722 of FIG. 218 is performed, and any of the first bonus mode in-stage effects (A) to (D) shown in FIG. 219 is performed. It will be.

As described above, the processing during the first bonus mode described with reference to FIGS. 218 to 221 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the initial game described above, or the first bonus as an extra game (see FIG. 215). It may be done in a mode or in both of these first bonus modes. As described above, in the first bonus mode, a plurality of times including the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the presence or absence of winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the number of remaining STs, and the presence or absence of winning the jackpot. It is possible to perform an effect according to one of the elements or any two or more elements.

In the first bonus mode, the drum variation effect described above may be performed as an effect according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. For example, when the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in the hit pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). If the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a loss pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). It may be done. In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, a look-ahead effect (for example, an effect similar to the above-mentioned loss length variation look-ahead effect) is performed before the special symbol change is started. It may be said. As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 5 or more and less than 5). It may be possible that different effects can be performed (in some cases).

Further, when the drum variation effect is performed as the effect according to the special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a plurality of drum variation effects may be performed as an effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. Further, before the start of one special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be performed as an effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. As described above, one drum variation effect can be completed in about 2 seconds, and it is possible to configure the drum variation effect to be repeated a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST count adjustment process>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing a remaining ST number adjustment process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above, it has been described that the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the display device 7 in the probability variation mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 203). The remaining ST number image 9203 may show an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily show an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggest the remaining ST number). In the following, the remaining ST number image 9203 will be described as suggesting the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 222 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST number adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST number adjustment process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number (step S9801). Actually, the value of the remaining ST number is an accurate value of the remaining ST number, and as described above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol change is performed. The value of the remaining ST number for display is an approximate value of the remaining ST number, and the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. Remaining ST Count The number shown as the image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST count for display. The actual remaining ST count value and the display remaining ST count value are stored in the work RAM 303, respectively.

When it is determined that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, the sub CPU 301 sets the value of the actual remaining ST count to the value of the remaining ST count for display (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed to the value of the actual remaining ST number, and the image 9203 of the remaining ST number is corrected so as to show an accurate value of the remaining ST number. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. ..

When it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number of display, or after executing the process of step S9802, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 222. For example, in the normal time, the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, but the value of the remaining ST number for display is actually the remaining ST. If it is larger (smaller) than the number of times, it can be configured to increase (decrease) the update frequency or increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. ..

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing a display remaining ST number update process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above, it has been described that the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated every time the drum fluctuation effect is performed (when the fluctuation of the drum symbol 9202 starts), or the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) may be updated. The value of the remaining number of STs for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation) starts. Hereinafter, an example in which the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated when the second special symbol variation starts will be described.

The display remaining ST number update process shown in FIG. 223 is subordinated when the special symbol variation related to the start winning is started after the game ball has won the second starting ports 140A and 140B in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. This is a process performed by the control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). The sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the display remaining ST number update process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S9821). When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot this time is a 10R jackpot (see FIG. 133) (step S9822). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes the result of the jackpot determination and the information indicating the type of the jackpot, the sub CPU 301 receives the special symbol effect start command. It is possible to make a judgment.

When it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is not a jackpot (loss or small hit), or in step S9822, the jackpot this time is not a 10R jackpot (2R jackpot). If it is determined, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error of the remaining ST number for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the remaining ST number for display from the value of the actual remaining ST number. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 50 is actually set as the value of the remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error of the remaining ST number for display is 10.

When it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9824). After that, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether or not the error of the remaining ST number for display is larger than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). When it is determined that the error of the remaining number of STs for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 adds 1 to the value of the remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9826). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery to perform either a process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or a process of maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display. May be decided. After executing the process of step S9826, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined that the error of the remaining number of STs for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 subtracts 2 from the value of the remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9827). After that, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 301 subtracts 3 from the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9827). Here, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the 10R jackpot is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 301 may subtract 1 from the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (subtract 3 in total) every 5 seconds while the special symbol change is being performed. .. After executing the process of step S9827, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the 2R jackpot (see FIG. 133) and the time from the end of the special symbol fluctuation to the completion of the opening of the jackpot jackpot 131 is 10 seconds. It has become. Further, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the small hit and the time from the end of the special symbol fluctuation to the completion of the opening of the small hit large winning opening 151 is 5 seconds. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the loss is 5 seconds. Further, when a big hit game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST number for display may or may not be reset, but in the mode in which the remaining ST number for display update processing shown in FIG. 223 is performed. , It is preferable to configure it so that it is not reset (after the end of the second bonus mode, the value of the remaining number of STs for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

In the above, it has been described that the remaining ST number is suggested by the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203. In this embodiment, as an image suggesting the remaining ST number of times, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the display device 7 instead of the remaining ST number of times image 9203. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to characters such as "A", "B", "C", "D", and the like, and the character (rank) suggests the remaining number of STs. For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 100 is set as the display remaining ST number managed in the process of FIG. 223, and when the display remaining ST number is 60 or more, the rank image is "A". Is displayed, and when the number of remaining STs for display is 40 or more and less than 60, "B" is displayed as a rank image, and when the number of remaining STs for display is 20 or more and less than 40, it is displayed as a rank image. When "C" is displayed and the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "D" is displayed as a rank image. When the number of remaining STs for display is less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

Further, when the value of the remaining ST count is actually a predetermined value (for example, 5), the value of the remaining ST count for display is always set to a specific value (for example, 0). The update may be controlled (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST number for display, and each time the special symbol change is performed thereafter (when the special symbol change ends), the remaining ST number for display is set by 5 each. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, control is performed so that the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by lottery even if a special symbol change is performed. .. As a result, when the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 30 when the value of the remaining ST count actually reaches 11, each time the special symbol change is performed thereafter (when the special symbol change ends), the remaining display count remains. The number of STs is subtracted by 5, and when the value of the number of remaining STs actually reaches 5, the value of the number of remaining STs for display becomes 0. It is possible to adopt such a configuration. When the value of the actual remaining ST number is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 5) (when the value of the display remaining ST number becomes a specific value (for example, 0)), the actual remaining ST number is calculated. It may be possible to shift to a mode in which a background is displayed different from the case where the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 5).

Further, in the above, it has been explained that the remaining number of STs (rank) for display is updated based on the result of the jackpot determination or the type of jackpot, but for display based on the result of the ordinary lottery or the type of the ordinary symbol variation pattern. It may be configured so that the remaining ST number (rank) is updated. For example, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be increased (smaller) than when the normal symbol lost length fluctuation is not won. good. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be larger (smaller) than in the case where the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether or not the jackpot has been won and whether or not the normal symbol loss length has been won through the remaining ST number image 9203 and the rank image.

<Probability change mode, normal map look-ahead effect processing>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading effect process in the probabilistic mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pre-reading effect process in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 224 is a sub-control circuit when the special symbol variation related to the start winning is started after the game ball is won in the second starting ports 140A and 140B in the probabilistic mode. This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) according to 300. The sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the probabilistic mode pre-reading effect processing, the sub CPU 301 first executes the pre-reading lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the drawing pre-reading lottery has been won (step S9842). When it is determined that the normal drawing look-ahead lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal map look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S9843). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 301 makes the determination by receiving the special symbol effect start command. Is possible.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A) (step S9845). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A), when the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The sub CPU 301 may display different images on the display device 7 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9845, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (B) (step S9846). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (B), in the probability variation mode, the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won, the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is a big hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won. The sub CPU 301 may display different images on the display device 7 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effect (A). After executing the process of step S9846, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the big hit determination related to the current special symbol change is not a big hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to the current special symbol change is a small hit ( Step S9847). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 301 makes the determination by receiving the special symbol effect start command. Is possible.

When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) (step S9849). In the probability variation mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, the result of the big hit judgment related to this special symbol change is a small hit, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that both the small hit and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9849, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (D) (step S9850). In the probability variation mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (D) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, the result of the big hit judgment related to this special symbol change is a small hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the small hit has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is not a small hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E) (step S9852). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E), when the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (D), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9852, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (F) (step S9853). In the probabilistic mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (F) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, and the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, and the normal symbol loss length variation is not won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that neither the big hit to the small hit nor the normal symbol loss length variation is won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (E), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9853, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), the normal figure look-ahead effect (B), the normal figure look-ahead effect (D), and the normal figure look-ahead effect A specific image (an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won) is displayed with a higher probability than in (F). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation was won during the special symbol variation. As the images that can be displayed in the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won). An image) that confirms that the work has been done may be provided.

In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds). , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), different images are displayed according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol loss length fluctuation. It may be displayed on the device 7.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the pre-reading effect processing in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 224 is performed in the probabilistic mode, but also in the first bonus mode, the same processing as the processing in steps S9841 to S9853 is performed. It may be that.

<Special figure look-ahead effect processing in probabilistic mode>
FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing a special figure look-ahead effect process in the probability variation mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the probability variation mode, the special figure look-ahead effect process shown in FIG. 225 is produced by the sub control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation related to the passage of the game ball starts after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126. This is a process performed in the determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol memory check process (see step S192 in FIG. 64).

In the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability change mode, first, the sub CPU 301 executes the special figure look-ahead lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9862). If it is determined that the special figure look-ahead lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). Whether or not it is determined (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 136), the sub CPU 301 may make the determination by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. It is possible.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9864). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (A) (step S9865). In the special figure look-ahead effect (A), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 of FIG. 224) that suggests that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. Displayed on the device 7. The sub CPU 301 may display different images on the display device 7 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9865, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9864 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (B) (step S9866). In the special figure look-ahead effect (B), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 of FIG. 224) on the display device 7 that suggests that the sub CPU 301 has won the normal symbol loss length variation. Let me. The image displayed by the process of step S9866 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9866, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9863 that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9867). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (C) (step S9868). In the special figure look-ahead effect (C), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 of FIG. 224) that suggests that the jackpot has been won. The sub CPU 301 may display different images on the display device 7 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9868, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9867 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (D) (step S9869). The special figure look-ahead effect (D) won the special figure look-ahead lottery in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9869, for example, an image suggesting that the sub CPU 301 has not won the jackpot or the normal symbol loss length variation (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 224). Is displayed on the display device 7. The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9869, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (C), a specific image (winning a big hit) has a higher probability than the special figure look-ahead effect (B) and the special figure look-ahead effect (D). An image that suggests) is displayed. This suggests that the jackpot was won during the normal symbol fluctuation. As the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (an image that confirms that the jackpot has been won) may be provided. Further, in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, the number of remaining STs is 10 times or more, 5 times or more and less than 10 times, and 5 times, respectively. It may be configured to display different images (if less than). Further, the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D) may be configured so that the above-mentioned drum fluctuation effect is performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds). , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (B), different images may be displayed on the display device 7 according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability variation mode shown in FIG. 225 is performed in the probability variation mode, but the same processing as the processing in steps S9861 to S9869 is also performed in the second bonus mode. It may be that.

When the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, basically, the effect corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (FIGS. 207 (j) and (Fig. 207 (j)) and ( k)) will be performed, but if the jackpot is won (for example, if the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, the mode shifts to the jackpot gaming state (second bonus mode) shortly after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (first bonus mode) starts, and until the start time of the jackpot gaming state, "BONUS" The production corresponding to the start of "" may be suspended. For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed in the loss pattern (despite the fact that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won), or the drum symbol 9202 may be displayed as a stop. It is possible to stop and display the hit pattern and not perform the hit notification effect (see FIG. 207 (k)) at that time. After that, when shifting to the big hit game state, it is possible to configure to perform an effect (hit notification effect) that excites the start of "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion notice production>
FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the first production stage, the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 (“bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, “watermelon” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and “watermelon” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and “ The "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c) is displayed on the display device 7. The "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are images that imitate the meters, respectively.

Specifically, the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are each in the initial display mode (meters are accumulated). Level 1 display mode (state in which the meter is accumulated in one stage), level 2 display mode (state in which the meter is accumulated in two stages), and level MAX display mode (state in which the meter is full). ) Can be displayed in any of the modes.

Icon stop suggestion meter The meters shown by the image 9301 are accumulated according to the effect (icon stop suggestion notice effect) performed during the first effect stage. The icon stop suggestion notice effect shown in FIG. 226 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). The icon stop suggestion notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other jackpot notice effects during one special symbol change. The icon stop suggestion notice effect is an effect that can be performed only in the first effect stage.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "171" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "172" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "173" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "bell" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is "bell" as compared with the case where the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is higher than that of the level 1 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is higher than that of the level 2 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to "pseudo 2".

The effect corresponding to the effect number "174" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "175" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "176" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "watermelon" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is more "watermelon" than when the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is confirmed that the transition to "pseudo 3" is performed.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "177" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "178" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "179" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "cherry" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is "cherry" as compared with the case where the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, as compared with the case where the display mode is the level 1 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, as compared with the case where the display mode is the level 2 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting stop of the "cherry" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to a predetermined super reach.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "179" are basically the special when the special symbol related to the start prize is changed after the game ball has won the first start opening 120. It is performed as an effect to suggest to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the symbol variation progresses. That is, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting that the "bell" icon is stopped during one special symbol change suggests that the "bell" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change. Similarly, the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon during one special symbol change suggests that the "watermelon" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change. Further, the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting that the "cherry" icon is stopped during one special symbol change suggests that the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173", the look-ahead effect is performed after the game ball wins the first start opening 120 and before the special symbol change related to the start prize starts. In some cases, in the look-ahead effect, it may be performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the special symbol change progresses. In this case, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon during one special symbol change may be that the "bell" icon is displayed during the next and subsequent special symbol changes (targeted for pre-reading). Will be suggested. Therefore, when the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode in the look-ahead effect for one start prize, the pseudo symbol performed during the special symbol change related to the start prize. In the continuous production, it is confirmed that at least "pseudo 2" will be transferred.

<Icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 227 is the first effect stage notice when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 186). This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 138).

Icon stop suggestion notice content In the lottery process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not a look-ahead effect occurs during the current special symbol change based on the information included in the sub change pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the look-ahead sub-variation pattern (see FIG. 191).

When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is generated during the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is generated based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9902). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9903).

When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 3 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9904 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 2 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 2". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 2". As a result, in "pseudo 2", the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9905 is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 1 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 1". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 1". As a result, in "pseudo 1", the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9901 that the look-ahead effect occurs during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in the look-ahead effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and when performing the icon stop suggestion notice effect in the look-ahead effect, Determine the content of the production. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect performed in the look-ahead effect. As a result, in the look-ahead effect, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon can be changed.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<The pending change production lottery process>
228 and 229 are flowcharts showing the pending change effect lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the reserved ball image 9302 is displayed on the display device 7 in the first effect stage. The reserved sphere image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently performed) special symbol change (the reserved sphere). Further, one or more of the first reserved sphere image 9303a, the second reserved sphere image 9303b, the third reserved sphere image 9303c, and the fourth reserved sphere image 9303d, depending on the number of reserved special symbol fluctuations. Image is displayed. The first reserved ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first reserved ball, the second reserved ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the third reserved ball image 9303c is It is an image corresponding to the third reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth reserved ball.

In this embodiment, an effect of changing the color of the hold ball image 9302 (the hold change effect) is performed. Through the color of the reserved ball image 9302, the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is suggested. The pending change effect is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)). The pending change effect is an effect that can occur in combination with another big hit notice effect during one special symbol change. The colors of the first reserved sphere image 9303a, the second reserved sphere image 9303b, the third reserved sphere image 9303c, and the fourth reserved sphere image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The pending change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is the first effect when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 186). Stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 after the lottery process (see FIG. 138). The pending change effect lottery process may be performed even when the current effect stage is the second effect stage or the third effect stage.

In the hold change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes the hold change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the hold change effect (at what timing and how the color of the hold ball image 9302 is changed) by performing a lottery based on a random number value. The content of the pending change effect is defined by the combination of the pending change patterns. The pending change patterns include a pending change pattern (1), a pending change pattern (2), a pending change pattern (3), a pending change pattern (4), a pending change pattern (5), a pending change pattern (6), and a pending change. A pattern (7), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) are provided.

Examples of the combination of the pending change patterns include the combination of the pending change pattern (1) and the pending change pattern (9), the pending change pattern (1), the pending change pattern (2), the pending change pattern (3), and the pending change pattern (3). Combination of change pattern (9), hold change pattern (1), hold change pattern (2), hold change pattern (3), hold change pattern (4), hold change pattern (7), hold change pattern (8), And the combination of the hold change pattern (9), the hold change pattern (1), the hold change pattern (2), the hold change pattern (3), the hold change pattern (4), the hold change pattern (5), and the hold change pattern (5). A combination of 6), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) is provided. The pending change pattern (9) is always included in the combination of the pending change patterns. Further, when the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the pending change pattern (8) is always included in the combination. In the process of step S9921, the sub CPU 301 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). The hold change pattern (1) changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo" starts (when the special symbol change starts this time). It is a pattern that makes you want to.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (1) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-less" effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S992 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 1", the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved sphere image 9303a immediately before the start of the special symbol variation this time. When the color of the reserved sphere image 9303 is changed due to the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 301 determines the color change mode of the reserved sphere image 9302 with reference to the color of the first reserved sphere image 9303a.

When it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9923, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of (step S9924). The hold change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo". The combination including the pending change pattern (2) can be selected only when the sub-variation pattern in which the decorative symbol has the reach mode is determined in "pseudo 1".

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (2) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the "pseudo-less" effect. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9924 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9924 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9923 when the process of step S9923 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9923 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9922.

When it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9925, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of (step S9926). The hold change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production starts. The combination including the pending change pattern (3) can be selected only when the pseudo continuous effect occurs.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (3) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo-continuous production starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9926 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 2", the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9926 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9925 when the process of step S9925 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9925 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9924.

When it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9927, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of (step S9928). The hold change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when the pseudo continuous effect occurs and the sub-variation pattern in which the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode is determined in "pseudo 2". It has become.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (4) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9928 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9928 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9927 when the process of step S9927 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9927 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9926.

When it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9929, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of (step S9930). The hold change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production starts. The combination including the pending change pattern (5) can be selected only when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3".

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (5) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo-continuous production starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9930 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 3", the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9930 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9929 when the process of step S9929 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9929 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9928.

When it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9931, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of (step S9932). The hold change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production. In the combination including the pending change pattern (6), a pseudo continuous effect is generated, the pseudo continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in "pseudo 3". It can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern is determined.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (6) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9932 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9932 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9931 when the process of step S9931 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9931 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9930.

When it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9933, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of (step S9934). The hold change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the hold ball image 9302 reaches the final color remains two more times. .. As the timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (7), for example, the first half of the super reach and the like can be mentioned.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (7) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the reserved sphere image 9302 reaches the final color remains two more times. decide. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9934 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined manner in the situation where the color change remains two more times. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9934 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9933 when the process of step S9933 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9933 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9932.

When it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9935, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of (step S9936). The hold change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the hold ball image 9302 reaches the final color remains once more. .. Examples of the timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (8) include the first half and the second half of the super reach.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (8) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the reserved sphere image 9302 reaches the final color remains once more. decide. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9936 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode in the situation where the color change remains once more. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9936 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9935 when the process of step S9935 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9935 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9934.

When it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9937, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of (step S9938). The hold change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the hold ball image 9302 to the final color. Although detailed description will be omitted, the color of the hold ball image 9302 is finally changed to which color by a lottery based on a random number value before the hold change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is performed. (The final color of the reserved ball image 9302) has been determined. In the process of step S9938, the sub CPU 301 always determines that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (9) is, for example, when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, when the "pseudo 2" starts, when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, and "pseudo 3". , When a tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3", the first half and the second half of the super reach, and the like can be mentioned.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (9) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in order to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9938 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode, and the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is a lottery performed before the reserved change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is performed. It will be the final color determined by (original lottery). The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9938 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9937 when the process of step S9937 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9937 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9936.

When it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9939, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 301 determines "NO" in the process of step S9938. May be good. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may display the reserved sphere image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). When the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the reserved sphere image 9302 is a false effect.

<Slot game during the 6th specific super reach>
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the contents of the effect block in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing a sixth specific super reach content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the second effect stage (see FIG. 137 (a)), the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 193) may be performed, and when the eighth notice effect is performed, the sixth notice effect is performed. It may develop into a specific super reach. In the 6th specific super reach, a game (slot game during the 6th specific super reach) in which a plurality of types of icons are fluctuated and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 7 and then stopped is played. .. In the 6th specific super reach middle slot game, when the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The sixth specific super reach slot game is composed of a plurality of production blocks. FIG. 230 illustrates the contents of the effect block.

In the effect block "1", an image corresponding to the description of the sixth specific super reach middle slot game is displayed on the display device 7. In the production block "2", an image (for example, an image showing the title of the predetermined super reach) indicating that the slot game during the sixth specific super reach was successful (developing into a predetermined super reach) is displayed on the display device 7. Is displayed in. In the effect block "3", an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (the sixth specific super reach slot game ends) is displayed on the display device 7.

In the production block "4", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in a variable manner over 8 seconds in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and an image that encourages the alignment of "additional" icons. Is displayed on the display device 7, and the "additional" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "4" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach ends. In the production block "5", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the display device 7 in the left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "additional" icons. Is displayed on the display device 7, and the "additional" icons are stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (three "additional" icons are aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "5" is performed, a predetermined number of values of the above-mentioned "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 192 (b)) are added, and the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. ..

In the production block "6", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the display device 7 in the left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "mission" icons. Is displayed on the display device 7, and the "Mission" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "Mission" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "6" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach ends. In the production blocks "7" and "8", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the display device 7 in the left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and the "mission" icons are aligned. After such an image is displayed on the display device 7, the "mission" icon is stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "mission" icons are aligned), and a predetermined mission is entered. After that, the mission fails in the production block "7", and the mission succeeds in the production block "8". When the production corresponding to the production block "7" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues, and when the production corresponding to the production block "8" is performed, the predetermined super reach Develops into.

In the production block "9", a plurality of types of icons are fluctuated for 8 seconds in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "cherry" icons. Is displayed on the display device 7, and the "cherry" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "9" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. In the production block "10", a plurality of types of icons are fluctuated for 8 seconds in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "cherry" icons. Is displayed on the display device 7, and the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "10" is performed, it develops into a predetermined super reach.

The sixth specific super reach content lottery process shown in FIG. 231 is performed in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 186) when the current production stage is the second production stage, and the production number “153”. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 when it is determined that the effect corresponding to "" or "154" is to be performed. The content of each production block will be determined by performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the final production block (step S9941). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect block "2" as the final effect block when the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is a sub variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach. .. On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is a sub-variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect block "3" as the final effect block.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the effect block in the stage immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, when the effect block "2" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to perform the effect block as an effect block immediately before the final effect block. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the production block "3" is determined as the final production block, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to perform the production block "4" as the production block immediately before the final production block. "Or" 6 "is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets a new stock timer by subtracting the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts. Is stored in the work RAM 303 as the value of. The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" shown by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game during the 6th specific super reach starts during this special symbol change. doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to the effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "6". The time corresponding to the production block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding the mission) corresponding to the production block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". The value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the stock timer is larger than 0 (step S9944). When it is determined that the value of the stock timer is larger than 0, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the last effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and as the final effect block, any one of the effect block "5", the effect block "7", and the effect block "9". Determine the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets a value obtained by subtracting a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9945 from the value of the stock timer stored in the work RAM 303 as a new stock timer value. Stored in the work RAM 303. Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to the production block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding the mission) corresponding to the production block "7". The time corresponding to the effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "9". When the effect block "5" is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds the value of the stock timer by a predetermined number (additional time). The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process of step S9946, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to step S9944. If it is determined in step S9944 that the value of the stock timer is 0, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect block "1" as the first effect block. After executing the process of step S9947, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

By executing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process described above, the content of the sixth specific super reach middle slot game is determined. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, the production block "2" is sequentially determined in step S9941, the production block "10" is determined in step S9942, the production block "9" is determined in step S9945, and further. If the production block "5" is determined in step S9945, the production block "7" is further determined in step S9945, and then the production block "1" is determined in step S9947, the production is performed in the sixth specific super reach. Block "1"-> Production block "7"-> Production block "5"-> Production block "9"-> Production block "10"-> Production block "2" (6th specific super reach content The order determined by the lottery process In the reverse order), the effects corresponding to each effect block will be performed.

<Effects and logo lamps on the LCD screen>
FIG. 232 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage. FIG. 232 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage. 233 to 235 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As an effect using such a logo lamp, a logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage and a logo effect advancer effect for the second effect stage may be performed.

The logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage shown in FIG. 232 (a) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage. The logo effect notice effect for the first production stage can occur only in the first production stage. In addition, the logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage is an effect that can occur in combination with other jackpot notice effects during one special symbol change.

Although not shown, first, the decorative design becomes a tenpai 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, prior to the production corresponding to the production numbers "181" to "184". After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184", the button image is displayed on the display device 7 and the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the production corresponding to the production number "181", nothing in particular occurs and the production ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined mode after waiting for a predetermined time (1 second) to elapse from the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in white in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Further, in the production corresponding to the production number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively.

In the production corresponding to the production number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates the appearance of a given word (eg, "CHANGE") lit in white throughout the logo cover. A large number of LEDs are arranged side by side in a matrix (lattice pattern) on the back side of the logo cover, and an arbitrary word can be formed by appropriately selecting the LEDs to emit light.

The production corresponding to the production number "182" has a higher expectation of a big hit than the production corresponding to the production number "181", and the production corresponding to the production number "183" corresponds to the production number "182". The jackpot expectation is higher than that of the production, and the production corresponding to the production number "184" has the highest jackpot expectation.

The logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage shown in FIG. 232 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the second effect stage. The logo effect notice effect for the second production stage can occur only in the second production stage. In addition, the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage is an effect that can occur in combination with other jackpot notice effects during one special symbol change.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", the image display is such that the screen (monitor) of the display device 7 is reduced after the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate (see FIG. 233 (a)). (See FIG. 233 (b)). Then, the reduced monitor (decorative symbol) becomes an image display that moves to the left (see FIG. 233 (c)), and a plurality of icons are displayed instead of the decorative symbol, and each icon is illuminated in sequence. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 233 (d)), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted (see FIG. 233 (e)). After that, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette effect, and an image showing the title of the effect corresponding to the icon (for example, "CHANGE" shown in FIG. 233 (f)) is displayed on the display device 7. “CHANGE” indicates the title of the effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 234 and 235) in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed by the logo cover.

While the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button effective time is set. When the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, when the effect button 54 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation), the next screen (for example, " The screen showing that "CHANGE" is selected) is displayed. On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, "CHANGE" is selected at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends). Screen).

After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect). In the effect absorption effect, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "191", the image corresponding to the fact that the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined mode and the result of the effect absorption effect fails is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 displays the image. Wipe display and return to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined mode. As a result, in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, an appearance is created in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors, respectively. As a predetermined effect, a plurality of types of effects having different colors (white effect, red effect, etc.) may be provided, and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the appearing effect. .. After the logo lamp emits light, the decorative design becomes a tenpai. At this time, in the production corresponding to the production number "193", "PLAY TIME" is stocked. After that, it shifts to the notice after the success of Tempai. As described above, in the notice after the success of the tempai, a connecting effect corresponding to the super reach of the development destination is performed (see FIG. 193 (b)).

FIG. 234 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 after the start of the effect absorption effect in the effect corresponding to the effect number “192”. As shown in FIG. 234, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 234 (a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed so as to approach the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 234 (b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo unit 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410L of "X" is formed (see FIG. 234 (c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 7, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 234 (c)). ), When the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410C of "Y" is formed (see FIG. 234 (d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 7, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo unit 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 234 (d)). ), When the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo portion 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410R of "Z" is formed (see FIG. 234 (e)). After that, the reduced monitor (decorative symbol) moves to the right (see FIG. 234 (e)), and the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 234 (f)).

FIG. 235 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 after the start of the effect absorption effect in the effect corresponding to the effect number “191”. As shown in FIG. 235, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 235 (a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed so as to approach the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 235 (b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo unit 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410L of "X" is formed (see FIG. 235 (c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 7, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 235 (c)). ), When the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410C of "Y" is formed (see FIG. 235 (d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 7, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo unit 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 235 (d)). ), When the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, but the character 9410R of "Z" is not formed. After that, the logo lamp goes out (the letter 9410L of "X" and the letter 9410C of "Y" go out), and the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 235 (e)). , The decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 235 (f)).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235, in the logo effect advance notice effect for the second effect stage, the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect). Although not shown, the same effect absorption effect is performed in the logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage. The effect absorption effect is an effect in which the image displayed in the vicinity of the logo cover becomes smaller or disappears, so that the image appears as if it acts on the logo cover (is absorbed by the logo cover). Is.

In addition, in FIG. 234 and FIG. 235, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R are divided (adjacent logo portions are not continuously formed, and a gap is formed. Although the example (formed) has been described, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be integrally formed. In particular, when displaying an arbitrary word on the entire logo cover as in the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", it is desirable that the entire logo cover is integrally formed.

By the way, also in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, not only may it be controlled to the A time saving game state after the end of the big hit gaming state, but also it shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state is satisfied. Then, when the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the game shifts to the C time saving gaming state.
[5-3. B production control related to the transition to the short game state]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the sub CPU 301 is in a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which left-handed is a normal gaming mode. , In the display device 7, the display of the first display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, while the display of the second display effect is performed even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. No. Further, in a gaming state in which right-handed striking is a normal gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the sub CPU 301 uses the display device 7 to display the second. While the display of the second display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display of the first display effect is not performed even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started. The display device 7 is preferably a liquid crystal display device.

The first display effect, which is started to be displayed along with the variable display of the first special symbol, is, for example, a display effect (for example,) performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Variable display of decorative patterns, display effects by characters, etc.) are equivalent. The symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, for example, blinking in one corner of the display device 7 regardless of the game state, is not included in the first display effect.

Similarly, the second display effect, which is started to be displayed along with the variable display of the second special symbol, is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. (For example, variable display of decorative patterns, display effect by characters, etc.) corresponds to this. The symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, for example, blinking in one corner of the display device 7 regardless of the game state, is not included in the second display effect.

By the way, in a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the final change in the ceiling. If the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one of the special symbols, the display effect may be unnatural and the interest may be reduced.

For example, at an arbitrary timing from the start of the variable display of one special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling to the end of the variable display (for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), the B time reduction game state is set. In the case of transition, while the first display effect is performed on the display device 7, there may be a situation in which the display device 7 is internally shifted to the B time reduction game state. In particular, when the variable display of the other special symbol is started between the start of the variable display of one special symbol and the end of this variable display as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the first display effect to the second display effect Switching to can be unnatural.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display effect performed when shifting to the B time reduction game state in the final change of the ceiling is performed in a natural manner as described below, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. .. Hereinafter, the effect control related to the transition to the B time saving game state performed by the sub CPU 301 will be described.

[5-3-1. B Production control with a normal pattern related to the transition to the short game state]
FIG. 236 is a time chart showing the effect control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time saving game state, (A) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the first normal pattern, and (B) th. 2 It is a time chart showing an example of effect control performed in a normal pattern.

First, FIG. 236 (A) is mainly referred to, and FIG. 237 is supplementarily referred to, and the effect control in the first normal pattern will be described. FIG. 237 is an example of a display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7.

In the first normal pattern shown in FIG. 236 (A), the variable display immediately before the ceiling final change (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final change") is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the ceiling final change is the first. This is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol in the final change of the ceiling. The "liquid crystal effect" shown in FIG. 236 corresponds to the display effect displayed on the display device 7. In addition, "Special 1_Loss variation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a loss, and "Special 1_Big hit variation" is the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It shows the fluctuation pattern in a certain case. Similarly, "Special 2_Loss variation" represents the variation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss, and "Special 2_Small hit variation" is the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern in the case of a small hit is represented, and the "special 1_big hit fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern in the case where the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is a big hit.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the variation before the final ceiling, the sub CPU 301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 7a of the display device 7, as shown in FIG. 237 (a). When the variable display of the first special symbol as the final pre-ceiling variation is completed and the display mode of the loss is derived to the one special symbol display unit 163, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), the sub CPU 301 is lost. The image showing is confirmed and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 236 (A), in the first normal pattern, the sub CPU 301 has a first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling. For example, the shutter closing effect is started. This shutter closing effect functions as an effect indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, that is, a transition effect to the B time saving game state.

The shutter closing effect is an image shown in FIG. 237 (c). In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also performs a right-handed navigation effect instructing right-handed. In addition, in the shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 replaces or adds to the right-handed navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time saving game state, and the like. , You may perform the production related to the progress of the game. Further, in this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also displays an image indicating that the night mode is being prepared. In the present embodiment, the night mode is a display effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the B time reduction game state, and during the night mode preparation, the display effect suggests that the B time reduction game state is being prepared. be.

By the way, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol may be a big hit or a time saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 executes a normal jackpot variation effect without executing the shutter closing effect. ..

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling variation is the time saving hit, the sub CPU 301 performs the B time saving game according to the processing when a plurality of time saving game states overlap. When shifting to the state, it is advisable to perform a transition effect to the B time saving game state (for example, a shutter closing effect), and when shifting to the C time saving game state, it is preferable to perform a transition effect suggesting the transition to the C time saving game state. .. In this case, the effect of shifting to the B time saving game state and the effect of shifting to the C time saving game state may be the same or almost the same in appearance, or may be different.

In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol includes a small hit, the first change is as the ceiling final variation. When the special symbol is variably displayed, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol may be a small hit. In this case, since the main CPU 201 controls the small hit game state and then shifts to the B time reduction game state, the sub CPU 301 performs the small hit winning effect suggesting that the small hit game state has been won in the B time reduction game state. It is preferable to give priority to the transition effect to (for example, the shutter closing effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may give priority to the effect of shifting to the B time saving game state over the effect of winning a small hit.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol may be a big hit or a time saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a big hit, the sub CPU 301 ends the shutter closing effect and is irregular. It is advisable to execute the jackpot fluctuation effect. That is, it is preferable that the irregular jackpot variation effect is executed with priority over the transition effect to the B time reduction game state.

Also. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 shifts to the B time reduction game state (for example, , Shutter closing effect) is finished, and for example, a night mode display effect is started as a display effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the B time reduction game state, and in this night mode display effect, a small hit suggesting that it is a small hit. It is advisable to perform a hit suggestion effect. That is, it is preferable to prioritize the small hit suggestion effect over the effect of shifting to the B time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may prioritize the effect of shifting to the B time reduction game state rather than the effect of suggesting a small hit.

When the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the jackpot variation) is started as the variable display of the first rotation in the B time saving game state during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final change of the ceiling, the main special symbol becomes the first. The 1 special symbol is changed to the 2nd special symbol.

In such a case, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the jackpot fluctuation) is started, the sub CPU 301 releases, for example, the closed shutter (ends the shutter closing effect), and the second special symbol As a second display effect accompanying the variable display, a night mode display effect is started (see FIG. 237 (d)). That is, when the main special symbol changes from the first special symbol to the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final change of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 moves from the first display effect to the second display effect. Switch to. Therefore, the night mode display effect functions as an effect indicating that the B time reduction game state has been entered.

As shown in FIG. 236 (A), even if the sub CPU 301 internally shifts to the B time saving game state when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is started, the sub CPU 301 is the first. 2 Until the variable display of the special symbol is started (until the night mode display effect is started), the shutter closing effect as the first display effect is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid an unnatural situation in which the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the final change of the ceiling, but the display effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol is not started. Can be suppressed.

When the sub CPU 301 finishes the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect after that, at least while being controlled to the B time saving game state.

The sub CPU 301 has a night mode display effect (see FIG. 237 (d)) and a game explanation effect (see FIG. A series of display effects such as a landing effect (see FIG. 237 (f)), a right-handed instruction display effect (see FIG. 237 (g)), and a count-up effect, which will be described later, are performed.

As described above, the night mode display effect is a display effect indicating that the B time reduction game state has been entered, and is, for example, a display effect in which the background image is at night. The game description (see FIG. 237 (e)) corresponds to a display effect in which a description related to the game is displayed, such as information indicating that the game is in the B time saving game state. In the landing effect (see FIG. 237 (f)), the characters "Count Up" are displayed, and whether, for example, a ball of light lands on the 7-segment display 71 provided at the lower right of the display device 7, for example. The display effect like this is equivalent. Although it is difficult to grasp from the illustration of FIG. 237, when the landing effect is performed, the sub CPU 301 starts high-speed fluctuation on the 7-segment display 71. After that, the sub CPU 301 performs a right-handed instruction display effect for instructing the right-handed person (see FIG. 237 (g)). Although not shown, the count-up effect corresponds to a display effect in which the information displayed on the 7-segment display 71 (for example, the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state) increases. The sub CPU 301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 71 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing a series of display effects from the night mode display effect to the count-up effect, and the B time reduction game. Information indicating the end timing of the state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed (see FIG. 237 (h)). After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the second display effect accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7.

In the first normal pattern, in this way, the display effect can be switched from the first display effect to the second display effect, which is performed in association with the transition to the B time saving game state, in a natural manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236 (B), the effect control in the second normal pattern will be described. In the second normal pattern, the fluctuation before the final ceiling is the variable display of the first special symbol, the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first time in the B time reduction game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the B time reduction game. This is the pattern when the second time in the state is the variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 236 (B), in the second normal pattern, the sub CPU 301 accompanies the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display (loss variation) of the first special symbol, which is the final fluctuation of the ceiling. As a display effect, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also performs a right-handed navigation effect instructing right-handed. In addition, in the shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 replaces or adds to the right-handed navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time saving game state, and the like. , You may perform the production related to the progress of the game.

If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started before the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the sub CPU 301 performs the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation. Is finished, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is not displayed in the shutter effect which is the first display effect, and until the first variable display of the second special symbol is started in the B time saving game state. The first display effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display of the second special symbol is started after the variable display of the first special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling is completed, this first No new first display effect will be performed due to the variable display of the special symbol.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (as the second special symbol, the first variable display after shifting to the B time reduction game state) is started as the second time in the B time reduction game state, the sub CPU 301 changes to the ceiling final. The first display effect that started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, and the second display effect that accompanies the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be displayed. Even if the first special symbol is in the variable display when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second time in the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 is accompanied by the variable display of the second special symbol. Start the display effect.

When the first variable display of the second special symbol is started after the transition to the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 starts the night mode display effect, and then the game explanation effect, the landing effect, and the count-up effect. Perform a series of display effects up to. By the way, when the variable display time of the second special symbol that is first performed after the transition to the B time reduction game state is short, the above series of display effects are performed until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed. There may be cases where it cannot be finished. In such a case, the sub CPU 301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 71 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing the above-mentioned series of display effects, and performs a count-up effect. B Display information (for example, the number of time reductions) indicating the end timing of the time reduction game state. That is, if the second special symbol is in variable display when it is time to end the above-mentioned series of display effects, the sub CPU 301 adjusts to the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol. , Ends the above series of display effects. However, there are cases where the second special symbol is not being variably displayed when it is time to end the above series of display effects. In such a case, the sub CPU 301 issues a demo display command from, for example, the main CPU 201. When it is received, a count-up effect is performed, information indicating the end timing of the B time reduction game state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed, and the above series of display effects is ended.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, until the variable display number (that is, the number of remaining time reductions) of the special symbol that can be executed in the night mode display effect is displayed. In the meantime, the variable display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be performed and the remaining number of time reductions may change. Therefore, in order to absorb and display the variable display number, the second special symbol is displayed. Waiting for the end of the variable display, the count-up effect is performed.

The sub CPU 301 performs the second display effect when the first variable display of the first special symbol in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the second special symbol, while the sub CPU 301 performs the second display effect in the B time saving game state. When the display is a variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. .. However, when the first variable display in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the frequency with which the first display effect is performed is that the first variable display in the B time saving game state is the second special symbol. In the case of variable display, it is preferable that the frequency is lower than the frequency at which the second display effect is performed.

In this embodiment, in the gaming state in which left-handed is a normal game mode, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the second special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, and right-handed is regular. In the gaming state, which is considered to be a game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the game specification is such that the second special symbol is mainly variably displayed when the game is left-handed, and the first special symbol is mainly variably displayed when the right-handed game is played. In the game state where left-handed is the normal game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the first special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, and right-handed is the normal game mode. Then, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol.

[5-3-2. B Production control with irregular patterns related to the transition to the short game state]
FIG. 238 is a time chart showing the effect control in the irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time saving game state, and (A) the time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the first irregular pattern, (B). ) A time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the third irregular pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 238 (A), the effect control in the first irregular pattern will be described. The first irregular pattern is a pattern in which the final front variation of the ceiling is a variable display of the first special symbol and the final variation of the ceiling is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 238 (A), when the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the first special symbol and the ceiling final variation is the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 has a variable display. At the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the variation before the final ceiling, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started. That is, after the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the variation before the final ceiling, is completed, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started as the final variation of the ceiling, but in the above-mentioned normal pattern, the first special symbol is displayed. A shutter closing effect that functions as the first display effect accompanying the variable display is displayed.

After shifting to the B time saving game state, when the sub CPU 301 starts the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time saving game state, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is terminated and the night mode display effect is performed. Start. That is, the sub CPU 301 continuously displays the shutter effect started at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol as the variation before the final ceiling until the variable display of the second special symbol is started after the B time reduction game state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 238 (A), the "ceiling final fluctuation (long fluctuation)" shown in the columns of "special 2_loss fluctuation" and "special 2_small hit fluctuation" is the first over a long period of approximately 600,000 msec. 2 It is a long variation in which the variation of the special symbol is displayed, but it is shown in a narrow width for convenience. The variable display time of the second special symbol performed over a long variation is not limited to approximately 600,000 msec, and may be, for example, in the range of 360000 msec to 600,000 msec.

Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the first special symbol is variablely displayed as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 is displayed on the display device 7 at a stage where the above-mentioned shutter closing effect has not yet been started. , Right-handed small navigation effect (right-handed instruction display in small letters). That is, even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed (for example, during the reach effect), the right-handed small navigation effect is performed. As a result, even if the variable display of the second special symbol as the final variation of the ceiling starts and the game shifts to the B time reduction game state, the player can be instructed to play the game mode (right-handed) at an appropriate timing. Unnecessary consumption of game balls can be suppressed, and thus a decline in interest can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time saving game state (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation). Even when the reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned right-handed small navigation effect is performed in this reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238 (B), the effect control in the second irregular pattern will be described. The second irregular pattern is during the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation) for the ceiling final variation, the variable display of the first special symbol for the ceiling final variation, and the variable display of the first special symbol for the ceiling final variation. , B This is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after the transition to the short game state.

As shown in FIG. 238 (B), when the ceiling final variation is the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol and the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started as the first display effect accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after the transition to the B time saving game state during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 is set to the final variation of the ceiling. Even if the variable display of a certain first special symbol is not finished, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is ended and the night mode display effect is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the night mode display effect, and performs a series of display effects up to the game explanation effect, the landing effect, and the count-up effect. After that, a right-handed instruction display effect is performed.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol after the end of the final change of the ceiling and at least until the end of the B time reduction game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238 (C), the effect control in the third irregular pattern will be described. In the third irregular pattern, the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first variable display after the transition to the B time saving game state is the first. 2 This is a pattern in the case of variable display of a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 238 (C), the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation), the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first time after the transition to the B time saving game state. When the variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the above-mentioned shutter closing effect, and suddenly starts the night mode at the start of the first variable display of the second special symbol after the transition to the B time saving game state. Perform display production. When the night mode display effect is performed, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol at least until the end of the B time reduction game state.

Further, the sub CPU 301 performs a series of display effects up to a game explanation effect, a landing effect, and a count-up effect after performing the night mode display effect for a predetermined time, and then performs a right-handed instruction display effect.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as described above, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time becomes 600,000 msec) is started in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode. (See FIG. 137 (a)). In the bonus mode, while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600,000 msec), most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 151, and a large number of them. The game ball is paid out.

Therefore, like the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the pachinko gaming machine that shifts from the normal gaming state or the C time saving gaming state to the B time saving gaming state shifts to the B time saving gaming state. The probability that the loss length fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol may be different between before and after the transition. In this case, before the transition to the B time-saving game state, the loss length fluctuation can be won as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and after the transition to the B time-shortening game state, the loss length fluctuation cannot be won as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. It is preferable that it is possible (probability 0).

After the transition to the B time reduction game state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is increased, but after the transition to the B time reduction game state, it is not possible to win the long fluctuation as a fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, so that B After the transition to the time-saving game state, it is possible to suppress the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening for small hits, and thus to suppress the increase in the number of balls.

In addition, after the transition to the B time reduction game state, the winning probability of the loss length fluctuation is reduced as compared with before the transition to the B time reduction game state, instead of making it impossible to win the long fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. You may do so. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening for small hits and thus the increase in the number of balls to be ejected after the transition to the B time saving game state. ..

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the passage gate 126 is arranged in the right side area 107, but it may be arranged in the left side area 106. However, when the passing gate 126 is arranged in the left side region 106, it is preferable to reduce the probability of hitting the normal symbol, for example, so that the operation frequency of the normal electric accessory 146 does not increase.

FIG. 239 is a modified example of the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 136. The time reduction flag is off before the transition to the B time reduction game state, and the time reduction flag is on after the transition to the B time reduction game state.

As shown in FIG. 239, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 determines the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is on. By doing so, before the transition to the B time reduction game state, the game ball can be expected to be paid out by winning the small hit large winning opening 151 as compared with the case after the transition to the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, after the transition to the B time reduction game state, it is possible to suppress the payout of the game ball by the small hit large winning opening 151 as compared with the case before the transition to the B time reduction game state.

When the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 201 may determine the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is off. In this case, after the transition to the B time reduction game state, the game ball can be expected to be paid out by winning the small hit large winning opening 151 as compared with before the transition to the B time reduction game state. It is possible to make the game state even more interesting.

By the way, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12) before the transition to the B time reduction game state, and shifts to the B time reduction game state. After the transition, the determination is made with reference to the special figure fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is higher after the transition than before the transition to the B time reduction game state. That is, the average variable display time after the transition to the B time reduction game state is shorter than the average variable display time before the transition to the B time reduction game state. In addition, the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) will be a big hit (big hit probability), and the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol will be a normal symbol hit (ordinary symbol). The hit probability) is the same before and after the transition to the B time reduction game state.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 is, for example, a 7-segment display, and before the transition to the B time reduction game state, the transition condition to the B time reduction game state (for example, the variable display number of special symbols until the transition to the B time reduction game state). (Ceiling counter, etc.) may be displayed, and after the transition to the B time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state (for example, the number of time saving remaining times in the B time saving game state, etc.) may be displayed. In this case, when the content of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 changes due to the transition of the gaming state, the sub CPU 301 forcibly changes the display content displayed on the 7-segment display 71 to 0 and displays the display. It is good to set it to.

[6. Expansion example]
An extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described above will be described below. Since the reference numerals assigned to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals will be omitted.

[6-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on according to the type of the big hit. , The number of probability changes is determined when the probability change flag is set to on, but the number of probability changes is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, when it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability change machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 112 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 112, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 112 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 112 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the jackpot to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot can pass through the specific area in either the first open mode or the second open mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 112 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one mode may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 112, an opening mode of a specific area in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area even if only one of a plurality of game balls winning a prize in the big winning opening is being executed during the jackpot game control process. As an example of the above, an example of providing the third open mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The mode is not limited to that, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 113 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 113, when the winning determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the first special symbol 2 Special symbol selection The symbol command is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for the selected symbol command, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. , "Z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for the selected symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. , "Z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%. Since FIG. 113 is only a diagram showing an extended example of the probability variation control, the winning judgment value data does not include the “time saving hit judgment value data”, but the winning judgment value data includes the “time saving hit judgment value data”. May be included.

FIG. 114 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 114, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot A) of the first opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode. As described above, since the winning judgment value data shown in FIG. 113 does not include the “time saving hit judgment value data”, the type of “time saving hit” is not shown in FIG. 114, but the winning judgment value. When the data includes "time saving hit determination value data", it may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of time saving hits.

According to FIGS. 112 to 114 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selectivity of 40%, and 10% selection. The rate is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity is determined to be 10R probability variation jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 10R normal big hit B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable big hit B with a selection rate of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by the time control as shown in FIGS. 112 (A) to 112 (C). As shown in FIG. 115, the mode may be opened according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 115 shows another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, and (A) the opening mode of the specific region is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific region is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 115 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening counts. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the jackpot to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the second opening mode of the other example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening is compared with the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set on.

In the above description, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective when the machine is a type 1 or type 2 mixer such as a third pachinko machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example of providing is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one is used. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific region.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closing of the specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Moreover, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be compounded.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limit. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above description, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot game state and the game state. , The game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability change machine, if the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the specific area is played during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability variation control is not executed. The same applies to a gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. , A so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be used.

[6-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the C time is shortened after the jackpot game control processing is completed. Control can be performed. However, the lottery for "time saving hit" is not limited to being performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol.

For example, among the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, a specific random value different from the big hit judgment random value (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value, a special symbol symbol random value) Etc.) may be used to perform a time saving hit determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time saving control, in addition to the hit determination process for the special symbol. When the time saving winning judgment is performed when the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol disorder. If it is a numerical value, it can be determined as a "time saving hit" in which the time saving control is executed. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving hit determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting port, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.) It may be extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, the passing of the game ball through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning judgment processing and the special symbol hit judgment processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning judgment processing is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute the control of displaying the display effect by the display device on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination processing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment is made. A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) in which it is impossible or difficult to visually grasp whether the processing result is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may execute the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU gives, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball which is regarded as a normal game mode in the big hit game state. The effect image to be shown is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU performs the time reduction control. As a method of launching a game ball, which is a normal game mode, control is performed so that, for example, an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is displayed on a display device. However, when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", an effect image showing the firing method of the game ball, which is regarded as a normal game mode when the time saving control is executed, is always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, when the time saving hit determination processing is executed before the special symbol hit determination processing is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where the time saving hit is set (that is, a situation in which the time saving flag is set to on). A control may be executed to display an effect image that can be visually grasped or easily grasped on the display device as to whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time saving winning judgment processing, the extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing, the condition for determining the time saving hit in the time saving winning judgment processing, the execution timing of the time saving winning judgment processing, and the time saving winning judgment processing. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the ending timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time reduction, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing include, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a special symbol fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated random value for determining the time saving. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning / winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is such that when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the special symbol hit judgment processing, the game ball to the passing gate that triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit judgment processing. It may be at any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting port, when the game ball wins in either the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting ports.

(Conditions for determining time saving hit in the time saving winning judgment process)
When the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time saving winning judgment random value is a specific time saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit judgment random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination processing are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is the hit of opening the accessory. When the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 21522152 is opened, whether or not to execute the time saving control and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is good to do so. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not the time reduction control is executed and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss", the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is the opening of the accessory, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened. If does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time saving winning judgment random value acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly to the above, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be subjected to the time saving winning determination processing (for example, before it is held), or holds the extracted random number value and holds the extracted random number value. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed before the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time saving winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, or the time-saving control is not executed in the gaming state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time saving winning determination processing such as executing the time saving winning determination processing in any game state or executing the time saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state are set in advance, and this determination is made. When the specified condition is satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination processing may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable that the time saving control having different functions is executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time saving game state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set when hitting time reduction)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or additionally, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the time saving winning judgment random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit judgment value data, the time saving number is determined to be "100" and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set (that is, reset the time saving remaining number) the time saving number determined based on the" time saving hit "instead of the time saving remaining number. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit ". Of the processes to be added to the number of times, one of them may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set on or the second time saving flag is set on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the time saving remaining number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that are being executed. The time saving number determined by the above may be newly set (that is, the remaining time saving number may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions of the time saving control, the time saving based on the "time saving hit" is performed after all the remaining times of the time saving during execution are exhausted. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the time reduction control during execution ends.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing being "time reduction hit" can be set to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning judgment processing becomes the special symbol hit judgment processing in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time saving hit judgment processing is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated (based on "time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on) and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit judgment processing in the same frame, even if the time saving control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit judgment processing is performed) based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing. good. In this case, the gaming state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. It becomes.

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning / losing determination processing being "time reduction hit" may be set after the predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends. Based on the above, it is advisable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is the accessory opening hit. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU will reduce the time based on the "time saving hit" based on the opening / closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is advisable to start control.

(End timing of time saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the set time saving number of times in the game state where the time saving control is executed" and "in the game state where the time saving control is executed". , When the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit ", etc. Is.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control is continuously executed even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be done.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory during the execution of the time saving control. However, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will be used even after the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to execute time saving control.

(Rewrite time saving number of times)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in a gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, a high accuracy time saving gaming state, a time saving gaming state, etc.) and the result of this time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time saving number may be rewritten, or the time saving number may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control is executed until the time saving number in the running time saving control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the special symbol hit determination process, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time reduction winning determination process, or at various timings. can do. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the time reduction control during execution. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies the predetermined conditions by predetermining one of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions".

(Probability of hitting time reduction)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port (hereinafter, "No. 1" The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning judgment processing") and the time saving winning judgment processing (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning judgment processing") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed, or the second time saving winning judgment processing may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be higher than the time saving winning probability when the first time saving hit is performed, or when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed and the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment processing)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display. It is preferable that the time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit are provided in the LED display group including the special symbol display unit and the like so as to be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction win / loss determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the winning of the accessory opening and the big hit game control processing is not executed based on the hit of the opening of the accessory, the main CPU 2201 loses the time saving. The interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the judgment process is "time saving hit" is made longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[6-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a game medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize) is obtained based on the result of the game. It can be applied to all gaming machines in which balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) are given. That is, if the game is played by launching or inserting a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing the game medium owned by the player and enabling a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for the player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium loading operation). The operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player when the winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), and the necessary game medium is provided on the line. The operation of acquiring the game) or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game may be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the game medium corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as a game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game ball are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, when the game is completed, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine is settled, or a part of the ball held is transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game medium" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the game ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the game ball is also included in the enclosed game machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. The game medium management device may be connected by communication. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, if the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of the above with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small hit gaming state as described above. In this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[6-4. Status display of being in a time-saving game state]
When controlled to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, a time saving state display unit indicating that the time saving game state may be provided. The time saving state display unit may be provided in the LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like so as to be controlled by the main CPU.

Further, when a time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state is provided, an A time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the A time-saving game state, a B time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state, and a B time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state. A C time saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the C time saving game state may be provided. In this case, the main CPU controls the A time saving state display unit so that a specific mode in which it can be visually grasped that the A time saving game state is displayed in the A time saving game state, and if it is the B time saving game state, the main CPU controls the A time saving state display unit. , The B time saving state display unit is controlled so that a specific mode in which the B time saving game state can be grasped by appearance is displayed, and if it is the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state can be grasped by appearance. It is preferable to control the C time saving state display unit so that the mode is displayed. Further, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display units executed in an overlapping manner.

Further, even if the A time saving state display unit, the B time saving state display unit, and the C time saving state display unit are not provided respectively, for example, the time saving game state having the same time saving performance may be a common time saving state display unit. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state are the same and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, it means that the time saving game state is A. It is preferable to provide a time-saving state display unit and a BC common time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state so as to be controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, the sub CPU displays, for example, the time-saving game state, the type of the time-saving game state in the case of the time-saving game state, and / and the time-saving number of times (including the time-saving remaining number) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device or the like. You may try to do it.

[6-5. Outer end signal about time saving game state]
When controlled to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, the main CPU sends a time saving signal indicating the time saving game state from the external terminal board 4184 to the outside (for example, an island computer). In this case, a time saving signal that does not distinguish between the types of the time saving gaming state may be transmitted, or a signal indicating which time saving gaming state is controlled, that is, the time saving gaming state. The types may be distinguished and transmitted. When transmitting the time saving signal by distinguishing the types of the time saving game state, the main CPU transmits, for example, the A time saving signal in the case of the A time saving game state, and the B time saving signal in the case of the B time saving game state. Is transmitted, and if the game is in the C time saving game state, the C time saving signal is transmitted. Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may transmit a plurality of executed time saving signals.

Further, a common time saving signal may be transmitted for the time saving game states having the same time saving performance. For example, when the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state are the same and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the main CPU is in the A time saving game state. In this case, the A time saving signal may be transmitted, and in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, the BC common time saving signal may be transmitted.

[5-6. Interval in case of "time saving hit"]
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", the main CPU determines the interval time after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the game, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost. It may be longer than the above interval time in some cases. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game as the special symbol. The result of the hit determination process may be longer than that in the case where the bonus game control process is not executed based on the bonus opening hit, or the same or substantially the same time may be set.

[7. Addendum]
[7-1. Appendix 1]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a special result is derived, a gaming machine is controlled to a special gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

As a gaming machine of this type, in addition to the special gaming state that is controlled when a special result is derived, even if the special result is not derived, the variable display of the specified number of times is performed in the high probability time shortening state. A gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability non-time saving shortening state is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-174800 has a new game property such as shifting from a high-probability time-shortening state to a high-probability non-time-shortening state to make the gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, in recent years, a gaming machine having a new game property has been desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 1 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A special symbol lottery means for performing a special symbol lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 201 for performing a special symbol variable display start process (S93)).
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol game end setting process (S282), etc.) and
With
The game state control means
The normal game state, which is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed, and
A special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed and is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
It is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed, and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
The special symbol control means
A special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating that the game is shifted to the special game state, and
A loss stop mode (for example, a loss display mode) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and a loss display mode.
It is characterized in that any one of a plurality of stop modes including a specific stop mode (for example, a display mode per time reduction) indicating that the game is shifted to the specific game state can be derived.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a specific gaming state is provided separately from the special gaming state as a gaming state advantageous to the player during the period in which the special symbol can be variably displayed, and a specific stopping mode is derived. Then, it becomes possible to provide a new game property that has never been seen before, such as shifting to a specific game state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the special gaming state, and after the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived, the pachinko / pachislot machine shifts to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state. It becomes possible to provide playability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The game state control means
When the loss stop mode is derived, the game state continuation control means capable of continuing the game state when the loss stop mode is derived (for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the special symbol Main CPU201) that does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag in the game end processing,
Even when the loss stop mode is derived, if a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), the game state is not continued by the game state continuation control means. The specific game state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the B time reduction control mode determination process) that can shift to the specific game state is provided.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even when the loss stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, which provides a new gaming property that has never been seen before. It becomes possible. Even when the loss stop mode is derived, the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied corresponds to, for example, the case where a specific special game state among a plurality of types of special game states ends.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the specific stop mode,
The first specific stop mode (for example, the mode of the selected symbol command "z0") and
A second specific stop mode different from the first specific stop mode (for example, a mode of the selected symbol command "z1") is included at least.
The game state control means
It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage (for example, the number of time reductions) is different between the case where the first specific stop mode is derived and the case where the second specific stop mode is derived. do.

According to the gaming machine of the above (4), it is possible to widen the range of playability by giving variations, and it is possible to provide interesting playability while suppressing gambling.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
A specific area provided in the game area (for example, a passing gate 126) and a normal symbol lottery means for performing a normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area (for example, variable display start processing of the normal symbol (S293)). ) And the main CPU 201)
With a normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display end process (S294) of a normal symbol) that performs variable display of a normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived. ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, normal) that facilitates the establishment of the predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery. Main CPU201) that performs the electric accessory release process (S296) and
A normal symbol probability control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time saving setting process (S238)) capable of changing the normal symbol probability from which the normal symbol hit is derived, and
With more
The ordinary symbol probability control means
When the specific game state (for example, the C time saving game state) is shifted due to the derivation of the specific stop mode, the normal symbol probability is not changed (for example, the hit determination table of the normal symbol is referred to and it is normal. Main CPU 201) that performs the hit determination process of the symbol,
When the special game state is shifted to the specific game state (for example, the A time saving game state) after the end of the special game state due to the derivation of the special stop mode, the normal symbol probability can be changed (for example, of the normal symbol). Main CPU 201 that performs the hit judgment process of the normal symbol with reference to the hit judgment table)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the above (5), the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) is made even after the end of the special gaming state, and the transition to the specific gaming state is caused by the derivation of the specific stop mode. If this is the case, the normal symbol probability is not changed, and if the game shifts to the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the normal symbol probability is changed. In this way, by providing a plurality of specific game states having different transition triggers and making it possible to change the normal symbol probability according to the transition trigger, the range of game playability can be expanded and interesting game playability can be provided. Is possible.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a high-probability gaming state in which the special stop mode is more likely to be derived than in the normal game state and the specific game state.
The special symbol control means
In the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (for example, when S221 is a YES determination), at least the special stop mode and the specific stop mode can be derived, while the specific stop mode can be derived.
In the high-probability gaming state (for example, when S221 is determined to be NO), at least the special stop mode can be derived.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, both the special stopping mode and the specific stopping mode can be derived in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, in which the interest of the player tends to be lowered. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the gaming state.

In the high-probability game state, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the result corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, a time saving hit), the mode in which the specific stop mode is derived but the state does not shift to the specific game state and the special symbol A mode in which the specific stop mode is not derived even if the result of the lottery corresponds to the specific stop mode, and a mode in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the result corresponding to the specific stop mode is not included in the result of the special symbol lottery in the first place. It may be either.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the predetermined conditions include a first condition and a second condition.
The special symbol lottery means
A first special symbol lottery means for performing a first special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the first condition (for example, a main CPU 201 for processing S81 and S82).
It has a second special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the second condition and a second special symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs processing of S78 and S79).
The special symbol control means
When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol is variably displayed.
It is characterized in that the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode can be different between the case where the first special symbol is variably displayed and the case where the second special symbol is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may differ between the case where the first special symbol is variably displayed and the case where the second special symbol is variably displayed. The width can be expanded, and it becomes possible to provide interesting playability.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The game state control means
When the gaming state under control is the normal gaming state, when the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, the process of S244 can be executed). On the other hand
When the gaming state under control is the specific gaming state, even if the specific stop mode is derived, the specific game under control is not controlled to the specific gaming state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode. It is characterized in that the mode according to the state can be continued (for example, the processing of S243 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived while being controlled to the specific gaming state, the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state under control continues. That is, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the specific game state, this is not invalidated, and the player can give the same effect as when the specific game state under control is extended. Can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a random number acquisition means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs processing of S392 or S399) for acquiring a plurality of types of random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination and a symbol random number) is provided.
The special symbol lottery means
The stop mode derived by the special symbol control means using a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a big hit) among the plurality of types of random numbers is the special stop mode, the loss stop mode, and the specific stop mode. It is possible to determine which of the plurality of stop modes including
The type of the special stop mode or the type of the specific stop mode can be determined by using a predetermined random number (for example, a symbol random number) different from the specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a big hit) among the plurality of types of random numbers. It is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a big hit) is used to determine a derived stop mode, that is, a lottery result, and a predetermined random number different from the specific random number (for example, a symbol random number). ) Can be used to determine the type of special stop mode or the type of specific stop mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security as compared with the case where not only the derived stop mode but also the special stop mode and the type of the specific stop mode are determined by using only the specific random number.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above.
The game state control means
When the specific stop mode is derived to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state), the specific stop mode is derived to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state). It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the expected value of the period controlled by the specific gaming state becomes smaller than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, as compared with the case of shifting to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state) due to the derivation of the specific stopping mode, the specific gaming mode is derived due to the derivation of the special stopping mode. It is possible to give an advantage when the state (for example, the A time saving game state) is entered. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state or a specific game state without increasing the gambling of the person.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above.
The game state control means
When the specific stop mode is derived to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state), the specific stop mode is derived to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state). It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the expected value of the period controlled by the specific gaming state becomes larger than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, as compared with the case where the special stopping mode is derived to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived and the specific game is played. It is possible to give an advantage when the state (for example, the C time saving game state) is entered. In such a case, it is possible to enhance the playability in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, which tends to reduce the interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-2. Appendix 2]
The pachinko machine of Appendix 2 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the game ball launched toward the game area passes through the special symbol start area (for example, start port switches 121, 141A, 141B), the processing of the random number acquisition means (for example, S392 or S399) for acquiring the random number related to the special symbol. Main CPU 201)
A special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery including a special result and a specific result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means. Main CPU 201) to perform and
A symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived, the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the special symbol is not variablely displayed is not performed. ), And a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145).
A game state control means that can control the game state in which the special symbol is variably displayed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process) and
With
The game state control means
Normal game state and
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state, B time saving gaming state, C time saving gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
When the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the big hit of the selected symbol commands "0" to "2" in FIG. 120), the result of the special symbol lottery is the special result with respect to the control of the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous than the case where it is the result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command “4” in FIG. 120).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result, it is advantageous in terms of controlling the specific gaming state as compared with the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a special result. It is possible to add fun to the game state and provide new game playability that has never been seen before.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol lottery means
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for hitting the time saving) is derived by the symbol control means and controlled to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state), the end condition of the specific gaming state is set as described above. It is characterized in that it can be determined based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived and controlled to the specific gaming state, the end condition of the specific gaming state is determined based on the value of the acquired random number, so that the specific gaming The end timing of the state can be different each time. By doing so, it is possible to give a wide range of playability, and it is possible to provide interesting playability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
A special display effect (for example, jackpot reach) indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, and a specific display effect (for example, time saving hit) indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived. It is characterized by further including a suggestion effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) capable of performing any of a plurality of display effects including the system reach).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, not only the special display effect indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, but also the specific display effect indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to provide new playability that has never been seen before.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6), and the probability corresponding to the set set value is set. A gaming machine in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived.
The special symbol lottery means
The special symbol lottery is set in one of the plurality of set values (for example, setting 1) and in another set value (for example, setting 6). It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the special stop mode is different, while the derivation probability of the specific stop mode is the same.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, the set value is low by making the derivation probability of the specific stop mode the same while making the derivation probability of the special stop mode different according to the set value. Even so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Although the derivation probability of the specific stop mode is the same between the case where one of the plurality of set values is set and the case where the other set value is set, the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to make the end condition of the specific gaming state controlled when the probability is changed different (for example, the number of time reductions in the case of setting 1 is 50 times, and the number of time reductions in the case of setting 6 is 100 times).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, it is interesting to make the probability of transitioning to a specific gaming state the same depending on whether it is set to one set value or another set value. It is possible to make it interesting by making the end conditions different while suppressing the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The special symbol lottery means
The special symbol lottery can be performed with either a low probability that the probability that the special stop mode is derived is relatively low or a high probability that the probability that the special stop mode is derived is relatively high. And at the same time
When the special symbol lottery is performed with the low probability, the probability that the special stop mode is derived (for example, 1/201 shown in FIG. 118) and the special symbol lottery are performed with the high probability. With a probability relatively higher than any of the probabilities that the special stop mode is derived (for example, 1/200 shown in FIG. 118) (for example, 1/6 shown in FIG. 118). It is characterized in that the special symbol lottery can be performed so that the aspect is derived.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the specific stop mode is derived with a higher probability than both the case where the probability of deriving the special stop mode is low and the case where the probability of deriving the special stop mode is high. It is possible to provide sex and suppress the decline in interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The random number acquisition means
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol, and
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S399) that acquires a random number related to the second special symbol.
The special symbol lottery means
The first special symbol lottery means (for example, the first special symbol variable display start) which performs the first special symbol lottery including the special result and the specific result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means. Main CPU201) that performs processing (S93) and
A second special symbol lottery means (for example, a second special symbol variable display start process (S93)) that performs a second special symbol lottery that includes at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means. The main CPU 201) and
The symbol control means
A first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. When,
A second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. And have
When the result of the second special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, a big hit of the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8"), the result of the first special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the selected symbol command). It is more advantageous than the case of "z3" or "z4" jackpot) and the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the time saving hit of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2"). It is characterized by being configured to be.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the result of the second special symbol lottery is a special result, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a special result, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific result. Since it is more advantageous than any of the cases, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game in which the second special symbol lottery is performed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The random number acquisition means
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol, and
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs processing of S399) that acquires a random number related to the second special symbol.
The special symbol lottery means
The first special symbol lottery means (for example, the first special symbol variable display start) that performs the first special symbol lottery including the special result and the specific result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the first random number acquisition means. Main CPU 2201) that performs processing (S2013) and
A second special symbol lottery means (for example, a second special symbol variable display start process (S2013)) that performs a second special symbol lottery that includes at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means. Main CPU 2201) and
The symbol control means
A first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. When,
A second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. And have
The results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery further include special results (for example, per opening of a character).
The gaming machine
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a display mode for opening the accessory) showing the special result is derived, a predetermined area (for example, a display mode for opening the accessory) is derived. , The approach control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) that controls the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 2150) so as to be possible or easy.
A special area (for example, V winning opening 2155) through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined area can pass, and
With more
The special game state control means
When the game ball passes through the special area, it can be controlled to a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, a big hit game state via the second route).
The first special symbol lottery means
The probability that the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived (for example, 0) and the probability that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived (for example, 0). For example, the first special symbol lottery can be performed so as to be different from 1 / 1.17).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, a new game property that is controlled to the specific gaming state when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result is transferred to a predetermined area. It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, and when the game ball that has entered the predetermined area enters the special area, it can be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer that shifts to the special game state. Therefore, even for the so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer, it is possible to provide a new playability that has never been seen before.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In the specific gaming state,
The first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state are included.
The end conditions of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state are set.
The first end condition (for example, the time reduction in FIG. 99) for ending the specific gaming state when the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol becomes the first predetermined number. End condition L) and the second end condition (for example, the time reduction end condition M in FIG. 99) for ending the specific game state when the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches the second predetermined number. The third end condition (for example, the end condition N of the time reduction in FIG. 99) for ending the specific gaming state when the number of times of derivation of the special stop mode reaches the third predetermined number is included.
At least one of the first end condition, the second end condition, and the third end condition is the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state. It is characterized in that it differs in at least one of the specific gaming states.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, it is possible to have a wide range of playability by giving variations to the end conditions of the specific gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state is
Includes at least two specific gaming states of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state.
The end conditions of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state include a variable display number (for example, a time reduction number) of the special symbol.
The game state control means
In any one of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state (for example, the C time reduction game state), the other specific game state (for example, the B time reduction game) If the transition condition to (state) is satisfied,
The variable number of times of display of the special symbol that can be performed until the end condition for the one specific game state is satisfied, and the above-mentioned that can be performed until the end condition for the other specific game state is satisfied. Of the variable display times of the special symbol, until the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the larger variable display number, control is possible in the same manner as the one specific game state regardless of the degree of advantage (for example, in S243). The processing can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the ending condition of a specific gaming state is ensured not to be disadvantageous to the player, and is performed in the same manner as one specific gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
The game state control means
The normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state) and
Although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is higher than that of the normal game state, the high probability non-specific game state (for example, the high probability low base state) in which the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is the same as that of the normal game state,
A low probability specific game state (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the probability of deriving the special stop mode is the same as that of the normal game state, but the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is higher than that of the normal game state. ,
Both the probability that the special stop mode is derived and the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery can be controlled to either a high-accuracy specific gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state) higher than the normal gaming state. And
The gaming machine
It is characterized by comprising a display effect control means capable of controlling the normal game state, the low probability specific game state, and the high accuracy specific game state so that a display effect that is difficult to grasp from the outside is performed.

According to the gaming machine (10), the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state are displayed in a manner that is difficult to grasp in appearance, which makes the game interesting. It is possible to have it, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The gaming machine
The first aspect (for example, left-handed) in which the game ball is launched toward the first area (for example, the left side area 106) of the game area, and
A second aspect (for example, right-handed) in which the game ball is launched toward the second area (for example, the right side area 107) of the game area, and
It is possible to play the game in any of a plurality of modes including the above, and the game is configured to be played in the first mode or the second mode depending on the game state.
In the normal game state, the low probability specific game state, and the high probability specific game state, the game is performed in the first aspect, while the game is performed.
In the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the game is configured to be performed in the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, the game is performed in the first aspect in the normal gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state, while the second aspect in the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state. Since the game is played in, it is possible to make the player understand that the high-accuracy non-specific game state is a special game state unlike other game states.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (11) or (12) above,
Further provided with a payout means (for example, payout / launch control circuit 400) for paying out the prize ball or prize data based on the fact that the game ball launched toward the game area has passed through the predetermined winning area.
In the normal game state, the low probability specific game state, and the high probability specific game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1.
In the high-accuracy non-specific game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time can exceed 1.

According to the gaming machine (13) described above, it is possible to enhance the interest by setting the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous than other gaming states.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above.
The game state control means
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z3") is derived in the normal game state (for example, the low probability low base state), the high probability specific game state is obtained after the end of the special game state. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state without shifting to.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, so that the deterioration of the interest in the normal gaming state can be suppressed. Is possible.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-3. Appendix 3]
The pachinko machine of Appendix 3 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A main control means (for example, a main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and
A production control means (for example, a sub control circuit 300) that controls the production, and
With
The main control means
A start information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs processing of S392 or S399) that acquires start information (for example, various random numbers) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the variable start condition is satisfied, the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means is used to draw a lottery that includes at least a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a time saving hit), and a loss in the lottery result. The lottery means to be performed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) and
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined display area, and the symbol control means (for example, the special symbol variable display end process (S94)) for controlling the lottery result to be derived is performed. CPU201) and
A game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol game end setting process (S282), etc.) and
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a look-ahead determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance,
An information transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S322) that transmits information related to the progress of the game to the effect control means, and
Have,
The game state control means
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) showing the special result is derived, the special gaming state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed (for example, the jackpot gaming state) and
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time reduction) showing the specific result is derived, the game state in which the symbol is variably displayed and is more advantageous than the normal game state (for example, the display mode per time reduction). It is possible to control one of a plurality of gaming states including (C time saving gaming state).
The effect control means
It is possible to receive the information transmitted from the information transmitting means and control the effect based on the information to be displayed in a predetermined effect display area.
Upon receiving the information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301) controls so that the effect (for example, the variation effect corresponding to the variation) is performed along with the variable display of the symbol. )When,
When the information indicating the result of the preceding determination by the preceding determination means is received, the preceding effect controlling means (for example, the sub CPU 301) controls so that the preceding effect (for example, the look-ahead effect) is performed prior to the variable display of the symbol. It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the effect and the preceding effect are performed in the gaming machine controlled to the specific gaming state, which is new and unprecedented. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having various playability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding effect control means
The first preceding effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301) that controls so that the first preceding effect (for example, the display of the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that the specific stop mode may be derived is performed. )When,
A second preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that a second preceding effect (for example, display of a jackpot system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that the special stop mode may be derived is performed. When,
A third preceding effect that controls so that a third preceding effect (for example, display of a common system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that either the special stopping mode or the specific stopping mode may be derived may be performed. It is characterized by having an effect control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, not only the effect in which the special stop mode may be derived (second advance effect) but also the specific stop mode may be derived as the advance effect. Since the first suggestive first-stage effect is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property that has never been seen before. Moreover, when the third preceding effect is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The third preceding effect control means
The third preceding effect (for example, the display mode of the time saving) is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the big hit) or the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode of the time saving hit) is derived. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the third preceding effect is performed in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish which of the special stop mode and the specific stop mode is derived from the appearance, which is a new effect that has never been seen before. It is possible to enhance the interest by doing.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3) above.
The third preceding effect control means
The first aspect (for example, a blue square) and
A second aspect (for example, a yellow pentagon), which is a mode that can be changed from the first aspect and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the first aspect,
A third aspect (for example, a rainbow triangle), which is a mode that can be changed from the first aspect or the second aspect and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the second aspect.
It is possible to control so that the third preceding effect is performed in one or more of a plurality of aspects including.
The first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which it is difficult to visually distinguish whether the expected value for the result of the lottery is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result.
The third aspect is characterized in that it is easy to distinguish from the appearance that it is an expected value for the special result.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the third preceding effect is performed, in the first aspect and the second aspect, it is possible to visually determine which of the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result is higher. Although it is difficult to distinguish, when the third aspect is changed, it becomes easy to distinguish that the expected value for the special result is high. Therefore, when the third preceding production is performed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
The first preceding effect control means
The fourth aspect (for example, a dedicated common look-ahead effect form) and
A fifth aspect (for example, a white circle), which is a mode that can be changed from the fourth aspect and has a higher expected value for the specific result than the fourth aspect,
It is possible to control so that the first preceding effect is performed in one or more of a plurality of aspects including.
The fourth aspect is an aspect in which it is difficult to visually distinguish between the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result.
The fifth aspect is characterized in that it is easy to distinguish the expected value for the specific result by appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the fourth aspect, it is difficult to distinguish which is higher, the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result, but in the fifth aspect, the expectation for the specific result is difficult. Higher values make it easier to distinguish. Therefore, in the first preceding production, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without increasing the gambling of the person by performing the production in which the expected value for the specific result is high while excluding the expected value for the special result.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above.
It is characterized in that the ratio of the first preceding effect performed by the first preceding effect control means and the ratio of the second preceding effect performed by the second preceding effect control means are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, by making the ratio of the first preceding effect and the ratio of the second preceding effect different, it is possible to give the effect a sharpness, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It becomes.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above.
The symbol control means
It is possible to derive the specific stop mode in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state.
The first preceding effect control means
It is possible to control so that the first preceding effect is performed in the normal gaming state, while it is possible to control so that the first preceding effect is not performed in the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine (7) described above, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in a normal gaming state. That is, the case where the specific result is derived in the normal gaming state is more interesting to the player than the case where the specific result is derived in the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to effectively perform the first preceding effect by enabling the first preceding effect to be performed in the normal gaming state and not performing the first preceding effect in the specific gaming state.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means
The first effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
A second effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) that controls so that the second effect (for example, jackpot system reach) suggesting that the specific stop mode may be derived, and a second effect control means (for example, sub CPU301).
The third effect control means (for example, the effect control means) for controlling the third effect (for example, common reach) suggesting that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived. It is characterized by having a sub CPU 301) and.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (7) above.
The effect control means
The first effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
A second effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) that controls so that the second effect (for example, jackpot system reach) suggesting that the specific stop mode may be derived, and a second effect control means (for example, sub CPU301).
The third effect control means (for example, the effect control means) for controlling the third effect (for example, common reach) suggesting that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived. It is characterized by having a sub CPU 301) and.

According to the gaming machines (8) and (9) above, as the production. Since not only the effect in which the special stop mode may be derived (the second effect) but also the first effect in which it can be suggested that the specific stop mode may be derived is performed, so far. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability. Moreover, when the third effect is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The second effect control means
When the second preceding effect (for example, display of the jackpot type look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (for example, the display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed, the second preceding effect (for example, the jackpot system reach) Is controllable to take place
When the first preceding effect (for example, the display of the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form) is performed, it is possible to control so that the second said effect (for example, the big hit system reach) is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the second effect is performed when the second preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the first preceding effect is performed. .. Therefore, at the stage of the preceding production, it is possible to perform the production that enhances the interest by performing the preceding production with a high expectation value for the special result while excluding giving the expected value for the specific result.

(11) In the gaming machine according to (9) or (10) above,
The first effect control means is
When the first preceding effect (for example, the display of the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (for example, the display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed, the first said effect (for example, the time saving hit system) Reach) can be controlled to take place, while
When the second preceding effect (for example, the display of the big hit system look-ahead effect form) is performed, it is possible to control so that the first said effect (for example, the time saving hit system reach) is not performed.
According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the first effect is performed when the first advance effect or the third advance effect is performed, but is not performed when the second advance effect is performed. .. Therefore, at the stage of the preceding production, by performing the preceding production with a high expectation value for a specific result while eliminating giving the expectation value for the special result to the person, the deterioration of the interest is suppressed without increasing the gambling of the person. It becomes possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above.
The third effect control means is
The first preceding effect (for example, display of the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form), the second preceding effect (for example, the display of the big hit system look-ahead effect form), and the third preceding effect (for example, the display of the common system look-ahead effect form). It is characterized in that it is possible to control so that the third effect (for example, common reach) is performed regardless of which of the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the third production, it is difficult to grasp whether the expected value for the special result is high or the expected value for the specific result is high, so that the player is interested for a relatively long time. It will be possible to attach it.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above.
The effect control means
In the variable display (for example, target fluctuation) of the specific symbol when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol,
When the third effect (for example, common reach C) is started, after the third effect is performed, the first effect (for example, time saving hit system reach C) or the second effect is performed. While it is possible to shift to (for example, jackpot reach C),
When the third effect (for example, common reach C) is not started, either the first effect (for example, time saving hit system reach C) or the second effect (for example, big hit system reach C) It is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not migrate.

According to the gaming machine of the above (13), when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol, the third effect is started in the variable display of the specific symbol on which the preceding effect is performed. If it is done, it can enhance the interest. On the other hand, if the third effect is not started, neither the first effect nor the second effect is entered, so that it is possible to suppress the player's gambling spirit.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-4. Appendix 4]
The pachinko machine of Appendix 4 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start information is acquired, and the acquired start information (for example, various random numbers) can be held up to a predetermined number of holding means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S395 or S402).
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the start information held by the holding means is used to perform a lottery including a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a time saving hit), and a loss in the lottery result. The lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) and
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, special symbol display units 163, 164), and the symbol control means (for example, special) is controlled so that the result of the lottery is derived. Main CPU201) that performs the symbol variable display end processing (S94) and
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) showing the special result is derived, a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed is performed. Special game state control means that can be transferred to
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and a specific stop mode (for example, a display mode per time reduction) indicating the specific result is derived, the game state in which the variable display of the symbol is performed is higher than the normal gaming state. A specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) capable of shifting to an advantageous specific game state, and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) that controls the effect to be performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol in a predetermined effect area (for example, the display area 7a of the display device 7).
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a look-ahead determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance,
Based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means, the advance effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
With
The preceding effect control means
It is characterized in that the preceding effect can be performed when the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the effect and the preceding effect are performed in the gaming machine controlled to the specific gaming state, which is new and unprecedented. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having various playability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding effect control means
When the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for the time reduction) can be derived, the specific stop mode (for example, the display for the time reduction) is displayed. While it is possible to control to perform a specific preceding effect (for example, display of a time saving hit system look-ahead effect form) suggesting that an aspect) may be derived.
Even if the specific start information is included in the start information held by the holding means, the special stop mode (for example, a big hit) is used as the start information in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied before the specific start information. When the special start information from which the above-mentioned display mode can be derived is included, it is possible to control so that the advance effect (for example, the look-ahead effect) of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived is reserved, if the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is reserved first, No advance production of specific start information is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by performing an effective preceding production while eliminating as much as possible the preceding production that may become unnecessary.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The preceding effect control means
When the start information held by the holding means includes special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived, the special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) may be derived. It is possible to control so that a special advance effect (for example, display of a jackpot type look-ahead effect form) that suggests that is performed is performed.
Even when the start information held by the hold means does not include the special start information, it is possible to control so that the special advance effect is performed.
When the special advance effect is performed even though the start information held by the hold means does not include the special start information, the start information held by the hold means includes the specific stop mode. Even if the specific start information that can be derived is included, it is possible to control so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the special advance effect is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, the advance effect for the specific start information is performed even if the specific start information is reserved. Since this is not done, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. That is, if the special advance effect is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, the player may be discouraged when the special stop mode is not derived. In such a case, even if the specific start information is reserved, by not performing the preceding effect on the specific start information, the specific stop mode is derived after the player is once discouraged. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The preceding effect control means
Even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the specific start is included. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the preceding effect of information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, even if the specific start information is reserved, the advance effect of the specific start information is not performed during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived. Therefore, it is possible to avoid performing the preceding production that may be unnecessary as much as possible. That is, since the player's interest is attracted to the effect during the variable display during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, even if the advance effect for the specific start information is performed, the effect may be useless. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
In the specific gaming state,
The first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state) in which the first specific control (for example, the time saving control in the time saving performance in the A time saving game state) can be executed, and
A second specific gaming state (for example, a C time saving game state) capable of executing a second specific control different from the first specific control (for example, a time saving control in a time saving performance in a C time saving game state) is included. Ori,
The specific game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state.
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state).
When the special stop mode is derived, the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the end of the special gaming state, the said In the case of shifting to the first specific gaming state, even if the specific stop mode is derived by satisfying the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information, the first specific control is not executed. It is characterized in that specific control can be executed.

Even if the specific start information is reserved when the special stop mode is derived, the gaming machine of the above (5) is transferred to the first specific game state after the end of the special game state, the specific start information. Even if the variable display of the above is performed and the specific stop mode is derived, the first specific control is executed without executing the second specific control. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of the merit obtained by the player due to the derivation of the special stop mode.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
The specific game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state.
The preceding effect control means
When the special stop mode is derived, the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the end of the special gaming state, the specific stop mode is described. When controlled to the gaming state, it is possible to control so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, even if the specific start information is reserved when the special stop mode is derived, when the specific start information is controlled to the specific game state after the end of the special game state, the specific start information is provided. This is to prevent the preceding production from being performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the necessary advance effect from being performed.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The specific game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the end of the special gaming state, the said It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to shift to the specific gaming state based on the specific start information.

According to the gaming machine of the above (7), when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is reserved, it is not shifted to the specific game state based on the specific start information after the end of the special game state. Therefore, for example, when the special gaming state is controlled based on the derivation of the special stopping mode, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state based on this.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The preceding effect control means
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the end of the special gaming state, the said It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is reserved, the advance effect that may become unnecessary is performed after the end of the special gaming state. Can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
The specific game state control means
Even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived when the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special gaming state, When the special stop mode is controlled to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state) in which the expected value from which the special stop mode is derived is controlled, the specific stop mode is derived by satisfying the variation start condition for the specific start information. Even if it is done, it is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to shift to the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, after the end of the special gaming state, the advantageous gaming state (for example, the highly probable gaming state) in which the expected value from which the special stop mode is derived is higher than the specific gaming state is prioritized. Since it is controlled, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
A counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) for counting the variable display number of the symbol is further provided.
The specific game state control means
When the variable display number of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the ceiling value), it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state).
The preceding effect control means
Even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the variation start condition for the specific start information is not satisfied. When the variable display number of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, it is possible to control so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, even if the specific start information is reserved, the variable display number of symbols counted by the counting means before the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information is satisfied. When the number of times reaches the specified number of times, the game shifts to the specific gaming state before the specific display mode is derived. In such a case, even if the advance effect of the specific start information is performed, the advance effect may become an unnecessary advance effect. Therefore, by avoiding such a pre-production that may become unnecessary, the decline in interest is suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit) and
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a small hit display mode) showing the special result is derived, a special game capable of shifting to a special game state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed is possible. With additional state control means
The preceding effect control means
The start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived and special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived. Even if the fluctuation start condition for the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is satisfied before the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, control is performed so that the preceding effect for the specific start information is performed. It is characterized by being possible.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, the specific start information and the special start information are reserved, and the fluctuation start condition for the special start information is satisfied before the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information. However, it has made it possible to perform a preliminary effect on specific start information. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit) and
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and the special stop mode showing the special result is derived, a special gaming state capable of shifting to a special gaming state (for example, a small hit game state) in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed is derived. Further equipped with a control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The preceding effect control means
In the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, when the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start information It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the preceding effect of is performed.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the specific start information is held during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the advance effect of the specific start information is performed. .. This makes it possible to enhance the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-5. Appendix 5]
The pachinko machine of Appendix 5 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main CPU 201 that performs special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that performs special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the special start area (for example, start port switches 121, 141A, 141B). )When,
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special gaming state control capable of controlling the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) and
A specific game in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and the specific game can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. State control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs time saving management processing) and
A normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display start process (S293) of a normal symbol) that performs a normal symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a normal start area (for example, a passing gate switch 127).
With a normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display end process (S294) of a normal symbol) that performs variable display of a normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived. ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, opening the normal electric accessory) that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special starting area. Main CPU201) that performs processing (S296) and
With
The specific gaming state is
At least one or more of the probability that the stop mode for hitting the normal symbol is derived, the degree of ease of passing the game ball through the special starting region, and the time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed is the normal. A gaming state in which specific control different from the gaming state is executed.
A first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) that can be controlled until the first ending condition is satisfied, with the transition condition being that the special stop mode is derived and the special gaming state ending.
A second specific gaming state (for example, a C time saving gaming state) that can be controlled until the second ending condition is satisfied is set as a transition condition that a specific stopping mode (for example, a display mode per time saving) is derived by the symbol control means. )When,
A third specific game state (for example, a B time reduction game state) that can be controlled until the third end condition is satisfied, with the transition condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and at least two specific games. It is characterized by including a state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state on the condition that the specific stop mode is derived, and the variable display of the special symbol are performed a specified number of times. Since at least two specific gaming states are prepared among the third specific gaming states that are the transition conditions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property that has never been seen before.

The specific control mode may be the same or the specific control mode may be different between the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state. Further, of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state, the specific control mode in the two specific game states is the same, and the specific control mode in the remaining one specific game state is It may be different from the mode of specific control in the above two specific game states.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving game state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving game state) are
It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the stop mode per normal symbol is the same or substantially the same.

The gaming machine of the above (2) is such that the derivation probability of the normal symbol hit stop mode is the same or substantially the same in the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is controlled.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), a plurality of different degrees of ease of passing the game ball to the special starting region are obtained. Passability patterns (for example, open patterns for ordinary electric accessories) are available.
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are
It is characterized in that, in at least a part of the passage ease patterns among the plurality of pass ease patterns, the pass ease of the game ball to the special starting region is the same or substantially the same. ..

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state allow the game ball to pass through the special starting region in at least a part of the passage ease patterns among the plurality of pass ease patterns. It is configured so that the degree of ease of is the same or substantially the same. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is controlled.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) and the third specific game state (for example, B time saving game state), a plurality of time patterns in which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed have different times. It is prepared and
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are
It is characterized in that, in at least a part of the plurality of time patterns, the time during which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed is the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of the above (4), the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state have the same or abbreviated time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in at least a part of the plurality of time patterns. It is configured to be the same. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is controlled.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The specific game state control means
Even if the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time saving) is derived in the first specific gaming state, the time saving performance in the first specific control (for example, A time saving gaming state) corresponding to the first specific gaming state is derived. ) Can be maintained.

The gaming machine of the above (5) corresponds to the first specific gaming state without changing to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the first specific gaming state. The first specific control can be maintained.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific game state control means
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time reduction) is derived at a specific timing (for example, the time reduction final variation) in the first specific gaming state (for example, A time reduction gaming state), after the specific timing. (For example, the variation following the time saving final variation) is characterized in that the first specific control can be changed to the second specific control.

The gaming machine of (6) above is capable of changing from the first specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at the specific timing in the first specific gaming state. be.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The specific game state control means
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, the time reduction final variation) in the first specific gaming state, the first specification is performed after the specific timing (for example, the next variation of the time reduction final variation). Both the first specific control corresponding to the gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state) and the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state) are performed. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to occur.

In the gaming machine of the above (7), when the specific stop mode is derived at the specific timing in the first specific gaming state, neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed after the specific timing. It is controllable. Controllable so that neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed corresponds to, for example, a control that ends the first specific control and does not start the second specific control.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The specific game state control means
Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, the third specific control without changing to the second specific control (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state) corresponding to the second specific gaming state is not changed. It is characterized in that the third specific control corresponding to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the B time saving gaming state) can be maintained.

The gaming machine of the above (8) corresponds to the third specific gaming state without changing to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state. The third specific control can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific game state control means
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saving final variation) in the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), after the specific timing (for example, after the time saving final variation) The third specific control (for example, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state) can be changed to the second specific control (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving game state).

The gaming machine of (9) above is capable of changing from the third specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at the specific timing in the third specific gaming state. be.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving game state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state) are characterized in that the mode of the specific control may be different.

The gaming machine (10) is configured so that the mode of specific control differs between the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. As a result, the variation of the game increases, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The specific game state control means
When the transition condition to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game state) and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the first specific gaming state. When the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied in
The larger of the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the first end condition is satisfied and the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state overlap, the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed until the first end condition is satisfied and the second end condition are Of the variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until it is established, it is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the larger variable display number.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The specific game state control means
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving game state) and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the third specific gaming state. When the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied in
The larger of the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied and the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the third end condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state overlap, the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied and the third end condition are Of the variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until it is established, it is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the larger variable display number.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (11), and (12) above.
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol is provided.
The counting means
When the transition condition to the other specific gaming state is satisfied in any one of the at least two specific gaming states, or the transition condition to the one specific gaming state and the other specific gaming state. If the transition conditions to
The variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the one specific game state is satisfied, and the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific game state is satisfied. It is characterized in that both of them can be counted.

In the gaming machine of (13) above, when the transition condition to the other specific gaming state is satisfied in any one specific gaming state, or the transition condition to one specific gaming state and the transition to the other specific gaming state are satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of one specific gaming state is satisfied, and the variable number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific gaming state is satisfied. Both the number of impressions and the number of impressions can be counted.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
When the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the end condition setting means (for example, S235, S237, S238) capable of setting the variable display number of the special symbol is processed as the end condition of the corresponding specific game state. Equipped with a main CPU 201)
The end condition setting means
The case where the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, the C time reduction game state) is satisfied and the case where the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, the B time reduction game state) are satisfied, the above. It is characterized in that a different number of times can be set as the variable display number of special symbols (for example, the number of time reductions).

The gaming machine of the above (14) has a different number of times as the variable display number of the special symbol depending on whether the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is configurable.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above.
In the first specific gaming state,
It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the stop mode per normal symbol is higher than that of both the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

In the first specific gaming state, the gaming machine according to (15) has a higher probability of deriving the normal symbol hit stop mode than in either the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state. As a result, the first specific gaming state can be positioned as a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving game state) and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) are satisfied, the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized by being controllable.

The gaming machine according to (16) can be controlled to the third specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time reduction counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied.

When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the gaming machine of the above (17) can shift to the second specific gaming state even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is a thing.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means
In the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol at the number of ceilings) in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied (for example, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. do.

The gaming machine of the above (18) shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the transition condition of is not satisfied.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time reduction counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means
In the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol at the number of ceilings) in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied (for example, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state after confirming that the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. do.

The gaming machine of the above (19) shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. After confirming that the transition conditions of the above are not satisfied, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), (15), and (16) above.
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time reduction) or the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time reduction) is satisfied, the transition to the specific gaming state is established. Equipped with a means of establishing a flag
The specific game state control means
When the shift flag is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of the above (20) shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition of the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and shifts to the third specific gaming state when the transition condition of the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is intended to be migrated.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above
The means for establishing the transition flag is
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time reduction) is satisfied, the second transition flag is established, and when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time reduction) is satisfied, the transition condition is satisfied. It establishes the third flag,
The specific game state control means
When the second transition flag is established, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state, and when the third transition flag is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of the above (21) establishes the second transition flag when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and sets the third transition flag when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is established, that is, a separate flag is established.

(22) In the gaming machine of (21) above
A counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 of FIG. 44) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied (for example, when S233 in FIG. 41 is a YES determination), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state). It is characterized by being.

In the gaming machine (22), when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied, the transition to the third specific gaming state is prioritized.

(23) In the gaming machine of (21) above
A counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 of FIG. 44) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied (for example, when S236 in FIG. 45 is a YES determination), it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state). It is characterized by being.

In the gaming machine (23), when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied, the transition to the second specific gaming state is prioritized.

(24) In the gaming machine of (20) above
The means for establishing the transition flag is
It is used when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving game state) is satisfied and when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) is satisfied. It is characterized in that a common transition flag (for example, a time saving transition flag) is established.

The gaming machine (24) is designed to establish a common transition flag that is commonly used when the transition condition for the second specific gaming state and the transition condition for the third specific gaming state are satisfied. be.

(25) In the gaming machine of (24) above
A counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 of FIG. 44) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the third specific gaming state is satisfied even if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized by being able to migrate to.

When the common transition flag is established, the gaming machine according to (25) will move to the third specific gaming state rather than to the second specific gaming state if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is intended to give priority to the transition of.

(26) In the gaming machine of (24) above
A counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 of FIG. 44) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the second specific gaming state is satisfied even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized by being able to migrate to.

When the common transition flag is established, the gaming machine according to (26) will move to the second specific gaming state rather than to the third specific gaming state if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied. It is intended to give priority to the transition of.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-6. Appendix 6]
The pachinko machine of Appendix 6 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 201 for performing a special symbol variable display start process (S93)).
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the lottery is derived.
When the special stop mode is derived by the special symbol control means, the special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can control the special game state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of times of the special symbol when not in the special gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the ceiling counter update process).
A game state control means that can control the game state in which the special symbol is variably displayed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process) and
(For example, main control circuit 200)
The game state control means
As a gaming state in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed,
Normal game state and
A plurality of games including a specific game state (for example, a C time saving game state) that can be controlled as a transition condition that the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times and is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is characterized by being able to control any of the states.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is not in the special gaming state, it is possible to count the variable display number of the special symbol and control it to the specific gaming state with the transition condition that the counted number reaches the specified number of times. It will be possible to provide a gaming machine with new game features that have never been seen before.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of gaming states controlled by the gaming state control means include
A gaming state in which the variable display count of the special symbol is counted by the counting means (for example, a gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) and a gaming state in which the variable display count of the special symbol is not counted by the counting means (for example, probability variation). The game state in which the flag is on) and is included.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a gaming state counted by the counting means and a gaming state not counted are included. As a result, the range of games can be expanded, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of gaming states controlled by the gaming state control means include
As the game state in which the variable display number of the special symbol is counted by the counting means, the normal game state, the specific game state (for example, the B time reduction game state), and the probability that the special stop mode is derived are said. A normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state higher than the specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability gaming state) are included.
The game state control means
When the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times when the advantageous gaming state is not controlled, the specific gaming state can be controlled.
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is possible not to control to the specific gaming state even if the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, counting is performed by the counting means in any of the normal gaming state, the specific gaming state, and the advantageous gaming state. However, if it is not controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it can be controlled to the specific gaming state when the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, but if it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the variable display number of the special symbol is the specified number of times. It is possible not to control to a specific gaming state even if it reaches.

The above-mentioned "case not controlled by the advantageous gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a case where the variable display number of special symbols reaches a predetermined number without being controlled by the advantageous gaming state even once. Further, the above-mentioned "when controlled to the advantageous gaming state" means, for example, a case where the ST machine or a specification for performing a probabilistic fall lottery is controlled to the normal gaming state after the advantageous gaming state is completed. Equivalent to.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
As information related to the progress of the game, a storage means (for example, main RAM 203) that can store information including the number of times information counted by the counting means, and
An information erasing operation means (for example, backup clear switch 176) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage means, and
The number of times counted by the counting means stored in the storage means separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or when the special gaming state ends and when the information erasing operation means is operated. A counting initialization operation means capable of initializing information (for example, a setting key 174 as a switch different from the backup clear switch 176, a dedicated switch, etc.) and
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the above (4) initially inputs the number of times information counted by the counting means separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or the special gaming state ends and when the information erasing operation means is operated. It is provided with a counting initialization operation means that can be converted.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the counting initialization operation means (for example, the setting key 1174 for changing the setting) is operated, the information erasing means (for example, S361) capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means is mainly processed. It is characterized by having a CPU201).

The gaming machine of the above (5) is capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means when the counting initialization operation means is operated.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When a special stop mode (for example, a small hit display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (for example, a special game state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed) is performed as a game state different from the special game state. , A special game state control means that can be controlled to a small hit game state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145), and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) that controls the effect so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area.
With
The effect control means
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the special stop mode is derived rather than the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived. It is characterized in that it is possible to control so that the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition of is satisfied is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to the specific gaming state, the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived is better than the special effect. It is controlled so that the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied is given priority.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When a special stop mode (for example, a small hit display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (for example, a special game state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed) is performed as a game state different from the special game state. , A special game state control means that can be controlled to a small hit game state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145), and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) that controls the effect so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area.
With
The effect control means
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the special effect is more than the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a special effect suggesting that a stop mode is derived is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied. Rather, it is controlled so that the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived is given priority.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The counting means can count the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and can also count the variable display number of the special symbol.
The special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol.
The lottery means
A first special symbol lottery means for performing a first special symbol lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special start area (for example, the first start port switch 121).
A second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special start area (for example, the second start port switches 141A and 141B).
Have,
The special symbol control means
The main CPU 201 that performs the variable display of the first special symbol and performs the first special symbol control means (for example, the first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. )When,
The main CPU 201 that performs the variable display of the second special symbol and performs the second special symbol control means (for example, the second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. )When,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time and the unit time. It is configured so that the expected value of one of the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per unit is larger than the expected value of the other.
The game state control means
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), when the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached is started, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state. It is characterized by being.

The gaming machine of (8) above can perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and also has an expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time. In a gaming machine configured so that the expected value of one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the other, the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached is started, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the timing of transition to the specific gaming state from being delayed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When a special stop mode (for example, a small hit display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (for example, a special game state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed) is performed as a game state different from the special game state. , A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to the small hit game state) is provided.
The game state control means
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached until the result of the lottery is derived. While it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state during
Even if the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, if the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached, after the end of the special gaming state. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.

When the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times, the gaming machine of the above (9) can shift to the specific gaming state by the time the result of the lottery is derived, while the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol at the time, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
The game state control means
As a gaming state in which the special symbol is variablely displayed, an advantageous game in which the probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol is variablely displayed is higher than in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. It can be controlled to a state (for example, a high-probability gaming state), and
The gaming machine
In the advantageous gaming state, a fall lottery means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of performing a fall lottery as to whether or not to end the advantageous gaming state is provided.
The counting means
When the advantageous game state ends as a result of the fall lottery without counting the variable display number of the special symbol in the advantageous game state, it is possible to start counting the variable display number of the special symbol. It is characterized by.

The gaming machine of (10) above does not count the variable display number of special symbols in the advantageous gaming state, and starts counting the variable display number of special symbols when the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of the fall lottery. It is possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6), and the probability corresponding to the set set value is set. A gaming machine in which the lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived.
The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability (for example, within a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times) by the denominator of the probability.
The specified value is characterized in that it differs depending on the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which of the plurality of set values is set. do.

The gaming machine of (11) above can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities for deriving the special stop mode, and the special stop mode is derived with a probability corresponding to the set set value. This is a gaming machine where lottery is held. The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived by the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived. The specified value differs depending on the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which of the set value is set among the plurality of set values. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the set value to be detected based on the specified number of times, which is the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-7. Appendix 7]
The pachinko machine of Appendix 7 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a special symbol lottery means capable of performing a special symbol lottery (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) and
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special gaming state control capable of controlling the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) and
A game state control means that can control the game state in which the special symbol is variably displayed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process) and
An effect control means that can control the display effect in a predetermined display effect area (for example, a sub CPU 301 that performs an effect mode determination process (S504)).
With
The game state control means
Normal game state and
A plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a B time saving gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and requires that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times as a transition condition. Can be controlled by any of
The effect control means
In the variable display (for example, ceiling final fluctuation) before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times, the game progress effect (for example, shutter closing effect, right-handed navigation effect, night mode display effect) related to the progress of the game is performed. It is characterized by being controllable to be initiated.

The above-mentioned gaming machine (1) has a new game property that has never been seen before, such as allowing a game progress effect related to the progress of a game to be performed in a variable display before the variable display of a special symbol for a specified number of times. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine to be equipped.

In addition, "in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times, the game progress effect related to the progress of the game is started" means that the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is started. In addition to the game progress effect being performed in, the game progress effect is also performed after that (for example, the variable display of the special symbol at the specified number of times).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol includes one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) and another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol).
The special symbol lottery means
One special symbol lottery means for performing a special symbol lottery for the one special symbol (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing the hit determination process (S104) for the first special symbol) and the special symbol lottery for the other special symbol. It has another special symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol hit determination process (S104)).
The special symbol control means
With one special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process of the first special symbol) that variablely displays the one special symbol and controls so that the result of the one special symbol lottery is derived. ,
With other special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process of the second special symbol) that variablely displays the other special symbol and controls so that the result of the other special symbol lottery is derived. ,
And even if one of the one special symbol and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the other can be variably displayed.
The gaming machine
When another condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ordinary symbol lottery means for performing the ordinary symbol lottery (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing the variable display start processing (S293) of the ordinary symbol).
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display end process (S294) of a normal symbol) that performs variable display of a normal symbol and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived.
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, a normal electric motor) that makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol lottery. Main CPU201) that performs object release processing (S296) and
With more
The effect control means
It is possible to perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the one special symbol or the second display effect associated with the variable display of the other special symbol.
Before the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display effect is prioritized over the second display effect, while the first display effect is prioritized.
After the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display effect can be performed so that the execution frequency is lower than that before the transition to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine (2) described above is a gaming machine in which one special symbol and another special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times before the transition to the specific gaming state. Until then, the first display effect is displayed along with the variable display of one special symbol, and after the transition to the specific gaming state, the display frequency of the first display effect is reduced.

After the transition to the specific gaming state, it is preferable that the second display effect (for example, the night mode display effect) associated with the variable display of other special symbols is displayed with priority over the first display effect.

Further, "the first display effect is performed so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific game state" means that the execution frequency of the first display effect is lower than that before the transition to the specific game state. The purpose is to include not only the case where the value is lowered, but also the mode in which the first display effect is not displayed at all after the transition to the specific game state.

Further, the special symbol lottery facilitation means makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of other special symbol lottery, but a plurality of other special symbol lottery execution triggers are provided (for example, a second starting port is provided). (Providing a plurality of them), the frequency of executing the other special symbol lottery may be increased by the special symbol lottery facilitation means for only one of them.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The effect control means
When the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is the variable display of the one special symbol, the first display effect can be performed until the second display effect is started. (For example, the second normal pattern)
It is characterized by that.

When the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of one special symbol, the gaming machine of the above (3) performs the first display effect until the second display effect is started. It made it possible.

As a mode in which the first display effect is performed until the second display effect is started, for example, a mode in which the first display effect is loop-displayed corresponds.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means
It is possible to control the specific gaming state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The effect control means
When the first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect for displaying the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state). Is possible to do
If the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after the transition to the specific gaming state are completed. It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by that.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3) above.
The game state control means
It is possible to control the specific gaming state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The effect control means
When the first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect for displaying the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state). Is possible to do
If the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after the transition to the specific gaming state are completed. It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by that.

The gaming machines (4) and (5) above can perform a third display effect related to the end condition of the specific gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed. It is the one that was made. In such a gaming machine, if the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The third display effect is performed when the variable display of the special symbol of is finished or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

The above (4) can also be paraphrased as follows in the gaming machine described in the above (1). Similarly, the above (5) can be paraphrased as follows in the gaming machine according to the above (2) or (3).
The game state control means
It is possible to control the specific gaming state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The effect control means
When the first variable display of the other special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up for displaying the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state) It is possible to perform (directing),
The first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is the variable display of the one special symbol, and at the end of the variable display of the one special symbol, the other special symbol is being variably displayed. In some cases, or when the variable display of the other special symbol is not performed, when the variable display of the other special symbol after the variable display of the other special symbol is completed, or when the variable display of the other special symbol is completed, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. It may be characterized in that the third display effect can be performed when it is not displayed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to (2), (3) or (5) above.
The effect control means
The first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the one special symbol ends, the first display effect can be performed when the variable display of the one special symbol ends (for example, the first irregular pattern).
It is characterized by that.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, the first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of one special symbol ends during the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to perform the first display effect when the variable display of one special symbol ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The effect control means
The game progress effect can be displayed at the start of the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific game state. (For example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by that.

The gaming machine of the above (7) is a game at the start of the variable display of another special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state. It is possible to display the progress effect.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above,
The effect control means
During the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific game state, the variable display of the one special symbol is displayed. Even when the reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, right-handed small navigation effect) can be displayed (for example). , 1st irregular pattern)
It is characterized by that.

The gaming machine of the above (8) is one special during the variable display of other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols, which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state. When the variable display of the symbol is performed and the reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, the right-handed small navigation effect) can be displayed.

Note that "the game progress effect can be displayed" is not limited to displaying all of the game progress effects described in (1) above, and only a part of the game progress effects described in (1) above. Is also included.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (2) or 3 above.
The effect control means
The first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the above-mentioned one special symbol is not performed, it is possible not to perform a part of the game progress effect (for example, a third irregular pattern).
It is characterized by that.

In the gaming machine of (9) above, the first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of one special symbol is not performed during the variable display of the special symbol, the second display effect is performed without performing the first display effect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (9) above.
The ordinary symbol control means
The variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed with a short-term symbol variable display mode (for example, the ordinary symbol variation pattern “02H” in FIG. 239) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the ordinary symbol performed per unit time is relatively large. , A plurality of normal symbols including at least a long-normal symbol variable display mode (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern “05H” in FIG. 239) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the normal symbols performed per unit time is relatively small. It is possible to perform in any of the variable display modes in the figure.
Before the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving flag = 0 shown in FIG. 239), the variable display of the normal symbol in the long-normal diagram variable display mode is displayed after the transition to the specific gaming state (for example,). , The time saving flag = 1) shown in FIG. 239 can be performed at a different frequency.

The gaming machine (10) described above makes it possible to perform variable display of the normal symbol in the long-form diagram variable display mode at a different frequency than after the transition to the specific gaming state before the transition to the specific gaming state. It is a thing.

The "frequency different from that after the transition to the specific gaming state" may be performed at a higher frequency than after the transition to the specific gaming state, or a lower frequency (probability) than after the transition to the specific gaming state. (Including 0) may be used.

In addition, "Before the transition to the specific game state, the variable display of the normal symbol in the long-form diagram variable display mode is performed at a different frequency than after the transition to the specific game state" means before the transition to the specific game state. Also includes a mode in which a variable display of a normal symbol is not performed at all in a variable display mode of a long-form figure. Here, "do not perform at all" may be either a case where the probability of the lottery being performed is 0 or a case where the lottery result of the lottery is discarded.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (10) above.
The other special symbol control means
The variable display of the other special symbol is performed in a short special symbol variable display mode (for example, variation of the special symbol for high start) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the other special symbol performed per unit time is relatively large. (Pattern) and a long special symbol variable display mode (for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol for low start) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the other special symbols performed per unit time is relatively small. It can be performed in any of a plurality of variable display modes including the special figure.
The probability that the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, but before the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is reached. It is possible to perform the variable display of the other special symbol in the long special symbol variable display mode with a higher frequency than after the transition of (for example, the second irregular pattern).
It is characterized by that.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, but before the transition to the specific gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state occurs. This makes it possible to perform variable display of other special symbols in a long special symbol variable display mode with a higher frequency than later.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The effect control means
It is possible to perform a normal effect that can be displayed in the normal game state and a specific effect that can be displayed in the specific game state.
It has a count effect control means capable of performing a count effect capable of grasping the variable display number of the special symbol performed from the normal effect to the specific effect.
The count effect control means
When shifting from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the variable display number of the special symbol performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect can be reset and displayed.

In the gaming machine (12), when the normal gaming state is changed to the specific gaming state, the variable display number of special symbols performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect can be reset and displayed.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[7-8. Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221523).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(A-1) An effect execution means capable of executing an effect,
An icon display means capable of displaying an icon (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, etc.) in the effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The icon display means are of the same system as each other when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed by the effect execution means and when the second effect (second notice effect) is executed. It is possible to display an icon ("bell" icon),
The effect executing means differs from each other after the icon is displayed depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect or the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform the production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed, the icons of the same system are used for each other. ("Bell" icon) can be displayed. Then, when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), and the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system in the second effect (second notice effect). ) Is displayed, and after the icon (“bell” icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. As a result, while giving variations to the effects performed before and after the icons are displayed, by making the icons displayed between those effects the same system, it is easy for the player to understand the development of the effects. can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

As described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as the icon in the present invention, an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof and the like can be appropriately adopted. "Icons of the same type" means that at least a part of characters, figures, symbols, and colors is the same in one icon and another icon. For example, when the “X” icon confirmed image 9051 (see FIG. 170 (b)) is adopted as an icon, the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, and the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed. ) Is being executed, the exact same "X" icon confirmation image 9051 may be displayed, and when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, "X" may be displayed. When the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 in which the character is the first color (for example, blue) is displayed and the second effect (second notice effect) is executed, the character "X" is displayed. The “X” icon confirmed image 9051, which is the second color (for example, red), may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed, the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 in which the character "X" is a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed, and the second effect is displayed. When the effect of (second notice effect) is being executed, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052 (FIG. 170 (FIG. 170)) in which the character “Y” is the same color as the character “X” (for example, yellow). c) See) may be displayed.

In the fifth pachinko machine, various icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, first specific icon, second specific icon, and third specific icon) are various. In the jackpot notice production (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect), they are displayed as "icons of the same system". For example, the various icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) are, respectively. With various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second production (second notice production) and "same system" be.

(A-2) The gaming machine according to (A-1).
The effect executing means is common to the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect (FIG. 152). After executing the effect number "91" or "92" corresponding to the icon stop notice), it is possible to execute the different effects.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) and the same in the second effect (second notice effect). It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) when the system icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. It is configured in. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the effect through a common effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). It can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the data for the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect) Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, the effect control can be simplified.

(A-3) The gaming machine according to (A-1) or (A-2).
In the effect executing means, a first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system, and a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon is displayed. It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152).
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko machine, the case where the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system and the second icon (“bell” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) It is configured so that a common effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) can be executed when the "watermelon" icon) is displayed. There is. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the effect through a common effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). It can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon is displayed, both the data for the first icon (“bell” icon) and the data for the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are stored. Since it is not necessary to keep it, the effect control can be simplified.

Note that "common" is a concept that can be paraphrased as "same type" as in the case of "same system" described above, and one effect and the other effect do not have to be exactly the same. As long as the same element is included in at least a part of one production and the other production, these productions can be said to be common productions. For example, if the basic landscape is the same in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in the other effect, even if a part of the landscape is slightly different, these background images May be considered "common".

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3).
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect shown in FIG. 168) is expected to perform the advantageous control throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when an icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed, it suggests the degree of expectation that control that is advantageous to the player will be performed throughout the operating time of the movable member. It is configured to be possible. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the same type of icon (“bell” icon), and from the display of the same type of icon (“bell” icon) to the operation of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the production.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4).
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
Notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) performed when the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system. ), While it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed through the operating time of the movable member, a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon. In the second specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" shown in FIG. 152), which is performed when is displayed, the control to operate the movable member is not performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "91" shown in FIG. 152) is performed when the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to "92"), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed through the operation time of the movable member. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the same type of icon (“bell” icon), and from the display of the same type of icon (“bell” icon) to the operation of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the production. On the other hand, it corresponds to the second specific effect (effect number "93" shown in FIG. 152) performed when a third icon ("cherry" icon) different from the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. In the notice after the icon is stopped), the control for operating the movable member is not performed. In this way, by making the presence or absence of the movement of the movable member different depending on the type of the displayed icon, it is possible to associate the type of the displayed icon with the effect mode after the icon is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the development of the effect after the icon is displayed.

The operation of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is completed, or the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) may be started while the operation of the movable member is being performed. The display of the "bell" icon) may be continued.

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5).
The effect executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , The specific effect can be executed even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, the effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 143 suggests that the icon of the same system is displayed before the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to execute (display of icon suggestion items),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 152 or the effect number “91” or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (notice after stopping the icon), it is also specified when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured so that the effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) can be executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152), so that the development of the effect is further enhanced. It can be made easy to understand. Further, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is suggested that the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed before the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed. It is configured so that the pre-effect to be performed (display of the icon suggestion type item in the effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 143) can be executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6).
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , The specific effect can be executed even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (roulette effect) is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first suggestion means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 143) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed, and
It is provided with a second suggestion means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number “15” shown in FIG. 143) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the advantageous control is performed.
The effect executing means is
When it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed by the first suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation degree is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 152 or the effect number “91” or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (notice after stopping the icon), it is also specified when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured so that the effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) can be executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152), so that the development of the effect is further enhanced. It can be made easy to understand. Further, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (roulette effect), and in the predetermined effect (roulette effect), an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. There are cases where it is suggested that it is displayed, and there are cases where it is suggested that the control is favorable to the player. Then, when it is suggested that the same type of icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect), the same type of icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. After that, it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152), while the above expectation level in the second effect (second notice effect). Is suggested, the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead. On the other hand, when the above expectation level is suggested, it is possible to create a player's expectation without developing the effect, so that the attractiveness of the second effect (second notice effect) should be improved. Can be done.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7).
The effect executing means is
A common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. ), Then it is possible to execute the different effects.
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the third effect different from the second effect (third notice effect), the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first effect). It is possible to execute 1 connecting effect (dedicated),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same system of icons (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) and the same in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured so that a common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) can be executed when the system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the common specific effect (first joint effect (common)), so that the development of the effect can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the data for the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect) Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, the effect control can be simplified. Further, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the specific effect is different from the above-mentioned common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)). It is configured so that the effect (first connecting effect (dedicated)) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate specific effect according to the content of the third effect (third notice effect) different from the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect). Can be done.

In the present invention, an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect) for the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)). It may appear only when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the production other than the third production (third notice production). It may be. Further, in the present invention, even when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the above-mentioned common specific effect (first connection effect (common)). ) May be performed.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8).
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 54) capable of accepting operations by the player
The icon display means is
A first icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the effect button 54 is operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 146). When,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operating means is not operated (when the effect button 54 is not operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 146). With display means,
The effect executing means executes a specific effect (connecting effect) in either case where the icon is displayed by the first icon display means or when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the icon is displayed when the operating means (effect button 54) is operated, and when the icon is displayed even when the operating means (effect button 54) is not operated. There is. Then, it is configured so that a specific effect (connecting effect) can be executed regardless of the situation in which the icon is displayed. As a result, the situation in which the specific effect (connecting effect) is executed when the operating means (effect button 54) is operated and the specific effect (connecting effect) are executed even if the operating means (effect button 54) is not operated. It is possible to create various situations, and through such situations, it is possible to provide variations in the development of the production.

A specific effect (connecting effect) executed when the operating means (effect button 54) is operated, and a specific effect (connecting effect) executed when the operating means (effect button 54) is not operated. May be a common effect (partially different effect) or may be exactly the same effect.

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9).
The effect executing means is
A symbol effect execution means capable of executing a symbol effect on which a symbol is displayed, and a symbol effect execution means.
When a specific symbol display (image display related to 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (normal background is displayed), the first effect state is changed to the first. It is equipped with an effect state switching means that can switch to 2 effect states (a state in which the background is displayed after the success of 4 symbol tempai).
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, it is possible to display the first icon (“bell” icon) as the icon of the same system.
A second icon (“watermelon”) different from the first icon when the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect after being switched to the second effect state by the effect state switching means. Icon) can be displayed,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific symbol display (image display related to 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (normal background is displayed). , It is possible to switch from the first effect state (normal background is displayed) to the second effect state (the background is displayed after the success of the 4 symbol tempai), and the icon of the same system is the first. It is possible to display one icon (“bell” icon). Then, after switching to the second effect state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4 symbol tempai), when a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect, It is configured so that a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) can be displayed. In this way, the first icon (“bell” icon) and the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are displayed step by step, and a specific symbol display (image display related to the four symbol tempai fanning) and the effect state are displayed. By associating the switching of, it is possible to create an attractive production development.

The first effect state and the second effect state may be in a state in which different backgrounds are displayed, and the frequency of appearance of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed) is high. They may be in different states. For example, in the first effect state, the probability that the first effect is performed is higher than that in the second effect, while in the second effect state, the probability that the second effect is performed is higher than that in the first effect. It may be configured to be. Further, in the first effect state, the probability of the first character appearing is higher than that of the second character, while in the second effect state, the probability of the second character appearing is higher than that of the first character. It may be configured to be.

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10).
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying variable and stop symbols
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is used when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. In the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the variable display of the above is resumed, it is possible to execute the different effects.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same type of icon (“bell” icon) is used in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. ) Is displayed, it is configured so that the above-mentioned different effects can be executed in the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the variable display of the symbol is restarted. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) with the display of the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system as a mark. Therefore, the development of the production can be made easier to understand.

In the present invention, one unit game (special symbol variation game) is configured from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the final stop display of the symbol. One unit game (special symbol fluctuation game) corresponds to one special symbol start prize (one reserved ball), and the number of reserved balls does not decrease even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It can be configured as follows.

[7-9. Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221523).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(B-1) An effect mode control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of effect modes (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage) is provided.
In the plurality of effect modes, the rate of occurrence of each effect is different from each other.
The effect mode control means is one effect mode when a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from to another production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the generation ratio of each production is different from each other, and specific conditions (1st production stage, 2nd production stage, and 3rd production stage) are specified. When the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)), one production mode (production stage) is changed to another production mode (production). It is configured so that it can be transitioned to the stage). As a result, as the game progresses, by gradually transitioning between the production modes (production stages) in which the production tendencies are different from each other, which production mode (production stage) is currently staying and which production mode (production stage) is next. It can be interesting to the player as to whether to move to. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting development of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in each of a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), a lottery is performed based on a random number value, based on the production lottery table. , The content of the production to be generated is determined. In each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), different production lottery tables are used. In the production lottery table used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each production Some are different. As a result, when a predetermined effect that can occur in any of the effect modes (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage) is provided, the effect mode (first effect stage, first effect stage, third effect stage) is provided. The occurrence probability (frequency) of the production is different for each of the two production stages and the third production stage, or the production that can occur in one production mode (for example, the first production stage) is another production mode (for example). , 2nd production stage and 3rd production stage). That is, in each effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage), the tendency (system) of the effect is different from each other. For example, in the first production stage, a pseudo continuous production is more likely to occur as compared with the second production stage and the third production stage. In addition, the time stock notice can occur only in the second production stage. Further, the meter UP notice can be generated only in the third production stage.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery. Explained as being done. In the present invention, the method for determining the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) of the transition destination is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the production mode (first production stage) is performed in a predetermined order (for example, first production stage → second production stage → third production stage). , The second production stage, or the third production stage) may be sequentially shifted. In addition, a mode (random mode) in which the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery, and a production mode (first production) in a predetermined order. It is configured so that the player can select one of the modes (order mode) in which the stage, the second production stage, or the third production stage shifts (order mode) by operating a button or the like. You may. Further, the player can select to play the game in any one production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) by operating a button or the like. It may be configured as. For example, a random mode, an order mode, a first production stage fixed mode (a mode in which a game is played only in the first production stage), a second production stage fixed mode (a mode in which a game is played only in the second production stage), and a third production stage. One of the fixed modes (modes in which the game is played only in the third effect stage) may be configured so that the player can select one of them by operating a button or the like. At this time, even when the first effect stage fixed mode, the second effect stage fixed mode, or the third effect stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, The stage change notice effect may be generated.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition), the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times). Further, an example in which the condition that the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177 is selected is adopted has been described. The specific conditions (conditions for generating stage changes) in the present invention are not particularly limited, and any conditions can be appropriately adopted. For example, the predetermined number of times may be a numerical value selected by lottery from a plurality of numerical values (for example, 0 to 99) instead of a predetermined numerical value. For example, at the start of one special symbol change (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 186), one numerical value is selected by lottery, and the special symbol change is performed as many times as the number of times corresponding to the numerical value. (A specific condition according to the lottery result is satisfied), the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) may be changed. At this time, if 0 is selected by the lottery, the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is once changed in one special symbol variation, and then the special symbol is concerned. The effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) may be changed again in the fluctuation. Alternatively, when a specific condition is satisfied according to a predetermined winning (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting port 120), the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect). The stage) may be changed.

When the RAM clear is executed, it may be allowed to stay in a predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). Further, at this time, "0" may be set in the fluctuation number counter after the stage shift (see step S9261 in FIG. 188). The RAM clear is a process of clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203 as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is stored in the work area of the main RAM. It is a process to clear the existing information. When the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed is sent as a command from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. By receiving the command, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed. As explained in the first pachinko gaming machine, in RAM clear (backup clear processing), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is in principle. Not cleared.

Further, when the power is turned on, the effect stage managed by the sub control circuit 300 may be allowed to stay in a predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). As a result, regardless of the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200, the display device 7 displays the image corresponding to the effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). Further, at this time, "0" may be set in the fluctuation number counter after the stage shift.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state and a probability-changing gaming state (high-probability gaming state) are provided as gaming states managed by the main control circuit 200, and the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (high-probability gaming state) in the probability-changing gaming state. It was explained that when it is performed (50 times), it shifts from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state. Here, when shifting from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state, another gaming state (intervening gaming state) may be passed through. For example, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state shifts to the intervening game state, and the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the intervening game state. Once done, it can be configured to transition from the intervening gaming state to the normal gaming state. In the intervening game state, the lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables (for example, the variable pattern table of the special symbol) used in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state.

Further, as the effect mode managed by the sub control circuit 300, an effect mode (intervene mode) corresponding to the intervening game state may be provided. For example, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probabilistic mode, the mode shifts from the probabilistic mode to the intervening mode, and when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the intervening mode, It can be configured to transition from the intervening mode to the normal mode. For example, when the probability variation mode ends, a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode) may be displayed. It is conceivable that the display of the result screen may be continued even in the intervention mode.

When shifting from such an intervention mode to the normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to the production stage determined by lottery). Further, when irregularity (electricity interruption, etc.) occurs or RAM clear is executed, the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200 is the intervening gaming state, while the effect mode managed by the sub control circuit 300. May be configured so that a situation such as a predetermined effect mode (for example, an image display corresponding to the first effect stage is performed) can occur. In this case, the player may stay in the predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage) until the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (20 times).

(B-2)
The gaming machine of (B-1) described above.
A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
A set value suggesting means capable of suggesting the set value is provided.
The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (first effect stage) and a second effect mode (second effect stage).
The effect mode control means can transition from the first effect mode to the second effect mode when the specific condition is satisfied.
The set value suggesting means can suggest the set value by a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied, the fifth pachinko game machine is used. It is possible to transition from the 1st effect mode (1st effect stage) to the 2nd effect mode (2nd effect stage), and a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs). It is configured so that the setting value can be suggested by. In this way, since the display indicating the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is performed, the first effect mode (first effect stage) to the second effect mode (second effect stage) are performed. It is possible to make the player interested in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, it is possible to make the player predict the set value through the display (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs), so that the player's interest in the condition can be increased.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, while the image showing the name of the effect mode (effect stage) after the transition is displayed, the content of the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) is displayed. It was explained as being reset (recovered). As described above, in the present invention, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, it corresponds to the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) of the transition destination. It is possible to configure the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) to be changed during the display of the image (background, name, etc.) to be displayed.

In the present invention, as a display indicating a specific condition, it is possible to adopt the display of a counter image when a stage change occurs. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in a stage change game (a special symbol change in which a stage change is performed), or a game before the stage change game (for example, 1 of a special symbol change in which a stage change is performed). It may be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, in the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the effect of changing the color of the counter image to the color corresponding to the set value may be performed.

(B-3)
The gaming machine according to (B-1) or (B-2).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means is
The first production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174). It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including.
It is possible to display the symbols in different patterns depending on whether the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode or the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode. be,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second effect mode (effect number "104" shown in FIG. 174). It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the effect mode corresponding to "106"), and a specific effect (sixth effect mode) can be executed. The case where the advance notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174), and the case where the specific effect (sixth advance notice effect) is the second effect. It is configured so that the symbols can be displayed in different patterns depending on the mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174). As a result, it is possible to display the symbols in a pattern according to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3).
Identification information display means (display device 7) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (first effect stage) and a second effect mode (second effect stage).
A first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the first effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. Has been
A second effect (eighth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the second effect mode among the plurality of effect modes.
A third effect (sixth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
The effect executing means is
The first production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174). It is possible to execute the third effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the above.
Identification is performed after the variable display of the identification information is started depending on whether the third effect is executed in the first effect mode or the third effect is executed in the second effect mode. It is possible to display the identification information in different fluctuation patterns as the fluctuation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second effect mode (effect number "104" shown in FIG. 174). It is possible to execute the third effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the effect mode corresponding to "106", and the third effect (third effect mode). The sixth effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174), and the third effect (sixth notice effect) is the third. Identification in the case of being executed in the effect mode 2 (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174) from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information. As the fluctuation pattern of the information, the identification information can be displayed in the fluctuation patterns different from each other. As a result, it is possible to display the identification information in a variation pattern according to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. In addition, the first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) and the second effect (eighth notice effect) are each in the first effect mode (first effect). The third production (sixth notice production) is the first production mode (first production stage), whereas the production can be performed only in the production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage). It is an effect that can be executed in both the second effect mode (second effect stage) and the second effect mode. Therefore, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, for example, a transition from the first effect mode (first effect stage) to the second effect mode (second effect stage) occurs. , The first production (1st notice production, 2nd notice production, 3rd notice production, and 4th notice production) will not be performed, while the 2nd production (8th notice production) will be performed. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the third production (sixth notice production) is continued. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in each effect mode (effect stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" to "106" is performed, the decorative design is changed by a dedicated variation pattern as shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c). Explained as letting. On the other hand, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default fluctuation patterns as shown in FIGS. 171 (d) (FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c)). It is possible to change the decorative symbol in a variable pattern in which the timing at which the decorative symbol stops is earlier than that of the shown variation pattern).

(B-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4).
The specific condition can be satisfied according to the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), but cannot be satisfied according to the variation display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation). ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) can be satisfied according to the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), while the variation of the second symbol. It is configured so that it cannot be established according to the display (second special symbol variation). As a result, in the situation where the variation display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation) is performed, the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) does not occur, but the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation) In the situation where is performed, a transition of the production mode (production stage) will occur. As a result, in contrast to the situation where the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed, the situation where the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed is set to the effect mode (effect stage). ) Can be characterized as a situation in which the transition occurs, and the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed can be made interesting.

(B-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5).
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 163) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
When a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120) is satisfied, a lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and a lottery means.
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
It is provided with a suggestion means capable of giving a suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery.
The suggestion means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the display control is to change the display of the identification information based on the establishment of one of the predetermined conditions (stage change section, the reserved ball). When the effect mode transition is performed by the effect mode control means in response to the effect performed by the means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery performed in response to the above, while suggesting the result of the lottery, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the event, no suggestion regarding the result of the lottery can be made.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120) is satisfied a plurality of times, the predetermined condition (first starting port 120) of the plurality of times is satisfied. When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of one of the predetermined conditions (stage change section, the reserved ball). , Corresponding to the fact that the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition (stage change section, the reserved ball) is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) performed in Regarding the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) before the display is started, the suggestion regarding the result of the lottery ( It is configured so that pre-reading production) cannot be performed. As a result, depending on the context of the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) and the timing of the variable display in which the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed. The number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) that can be suggested (look-ahead effect) regarding the result will change. Therefore, the number of predetermined lottery where the suggestion (look-ahead effect) can be performed as compared with the case where the number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) for which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) cannot be performed regarding the result is predetermined. There is a possibility that (big hit determination) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to give suggestions (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6).
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment),
Suggestion means capable of giving suggestions (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery, and
A transition destination effect mode determining means (sub CPU 301 for executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 186) capable of determining the effect mode of the transition destination is provided.
When the specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode control means can transition from one effect mode to the transition destination effect mode determined by the transition destination effect mode determining means.
The suggestion means
When the predetermined lottery is performed a plurality of times, among the plurality of predetermined lottery, the predetermined lottery performed after the transition destination effect mode is determined by the transition destination effect mode determining means , The result of the lottery can be suggested, while the predetermined lottery performed before the transition destination production mode is determined by the transition destination production mode determining means can be suggested regarding the result of the lottery. No,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed a plurality of times, the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination among the plurality of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is set. Regarding the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) performed after the determination, while suggesting the result of the lottery (look-ahead effect), the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination was determined. The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is configured so that no suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of the lottery can be made. As a result, suggestions regarding the result (pre-reading effect) can be performed according to the context of the timing at which each predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed and the timing at which the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination is determined. The number of lottery (big hit judgment) will change. Therefore, as compared with the case where the number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) cannot be performed regarding the result is predetermined, the predetermined lottery (big hit) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) can be performed is compared with the case where the number is predetermined. There is a possibility that the number of determinations) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to give suggestions (look-ahead effects) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect mode control means satisfies the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) as the specific condition. In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
The effect executing means is
When the effect mode transition is performed by the effect mode control means in response to the first condition being satisfied, the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is executed. The first production execution means that can be done,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a fifth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) different from the fourth effect is provided.
The effect mode control means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9281 in FIG. 189) has a second condition (effect shown in FIG. 177) relating to the fifth effect even if the first condition is not satisfied. When the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one effect mode to another effect mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage) When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed according to the establishment of the predetermined number of times (20 times)), the production corresponding to the fourth production (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178). ) Can be executed. Further, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is not satisfied, the fourth production (figure). The second condition (the effect shown in FIG. 177) regarding the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177), which is different from the effect number "131" shown in 178). When the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), the transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage) can be performed. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (the effect number shown in FIG. 177 ". The main variation pattern corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected), and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) and the fifth effect (shown in FIG. 177). Regarding the effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"), it is possible to make the player interested in which condition is satisfied and which effect is generated. As a result, the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (production stage) can be made more interesting.

(B-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
The effect selection means capable of selecting the effect to be executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The effect mode control means can be changed from one effect mode to another when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) is selected by the effect selection means. It is possible to transition to the production mode of
The effect executing means is at any timing of a plurality of timings including the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)). , It is possible to carry out the predetermined effect,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) is selected, one effect mode (effect stage). It is possible to shift from to another effect mode (effect stage), the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)). It is configured so that a predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) can be executed at any of a plurality of timings including the above. ing. As a result, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) related to the condition for transitioning the effect mode (effect stage) is the first timing (FIG. 177). Since it occurs at the timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)), there are many variations related to the transition of the production mode (production stage). However, it is possible to create a development of production.

The execution timing of the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) is the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) and the first timing. In addition to the timing of 2 (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)), one or more timings may be provided. For example, the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b)), and further. A predetermined effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) at a predetermined timing (for example, 6 seconds) later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)). It may be configured so that the effect corresponding to the above) can be executed.

(B-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9).
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment),
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
An effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) according to the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect pattern selection means.
The effect pattern replacing means (sub CPU 301 for executing the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186) capable of replacing the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means with another effect pattern is provided.
The effect executing means includes a suggestion effect executing means capable of performing a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery.
When the suggestion effect is performed by the suggestion effect execution means, the effect pattern replacement means has a first effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 190) by the effect pattern selection means. When is selected, the effect pattern is replaced, while when the second effect pattern (sub-variation patterns “21” to “30” shown in FIG. 190) is selected by the effect pattern selection means. Does not replace the production pattern,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed, the first effect pattern (sub-variation pattern "1" shown in FIG. 190 is performed. When "20") is selected, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced, while the second effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 190) is selected. If so, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is not replaced. In this way, as the first step for determining the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern), one effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed. Then, as the second step, when the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced as necessary to obtain an appropriate effect pattern according to the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect). In determining (sub-variation pattern), processing efficiency can be improved.

(B-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect mode control means
When the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied as the specific condition, the first production mode is started. A first effect mode control means capable of transitioning to another effect mode,
When the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, one effect mode is changed to another effect mode. A second effect mode control means capable of transitioning to
The effect executing means is
When the transition of the effect mode is performed by the first effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the first condition, the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is performed. The first effect execution means that can be executed,
Corresponds to the fifth effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) when the effect mode is changed by the second effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the second condition. It is equipped with a second production execution means capable of executing the production).
When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the second effect executing means does not execute the fourth effect, but the second effect executing means does not execute the fourth effect. It is possible to perform 5 productions,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage) When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed according to the establishment of the predetermined number of times (20 times)), the production corresponding to the fourth production (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178). ) Can be executed. Further, when the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied, one effect mode (effect stage) is selected for another effect. It is possible to transition to the mode (effect stage), and the second condition (the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied. When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number "121" shown in FIG. 177). "Or the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to" 122 "is selected), the execution of the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number" 131 "shown in FIG. 178) is executed. It is configured so that the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) can be executed without doing so. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number shown in FIG. 177). When both conditions of "121" or "the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to" 122 "is selected), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number" 131 "shown in FIG. 178) is satisfied. By preferentially executing the fifth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177), the effect corresponding to the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178). ) Is not generated, which gives the player unexpectedness, and can increase the player's interest in the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177).

The fifth pachinko gaming machine corresponds to the fifth effect (the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) rather than the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178). It was explained that the production) can be performed preferentially. On the other hand, in a situation where the predetermined effect and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) can be performed, the fourth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 178) is higher than the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be preferentially executed. Examples of the predetermined effect include an effect (for example, a symbol action notice effect) performed when the special symbol change starts. The symbol action notice effect is an effect that generates a predetermined effect on the decorative symbol at the start of the special symbol variation. Even if it is decided to generate a symbol action notice effect at the start of one special symbol change, if a stage change is performed in the special symbol change, the symbol action notice effect is not performed. It is possible to do.

(B-12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-11).
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable symbol and a stop display, and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 194).
As an effect pattern executed by the effect execution means, an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of effect patterns is provided.
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is one of the plurality of effect patterns in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. In the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the effect is executed in, and after the variable display of the symbol is restarted, it is possible to execute the effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns. can be,
The effect pattern selection means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9363 of FIG. 198 and the process of step S9743 of FIG. 202) selects the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game, and then is based on the pattern. , It is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo game.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol, a plurality of effect patterns (see FIG. 194). The second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the effect is executed with one of the effect patterns (the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “161” to “163”) and the variable display of the symbol is resumed. In the above, it is possible to execute the effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 194). Then, after selecting the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”), it is possible to select the pattern of the effect to be performed in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) based on the pattern. It is configured to be possible. This makes it easier to design the development of the effect performed from the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”).

[7-10. Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), A player is provided so as to shift to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-110576).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying the above-mentioned gaming machines, it may be possible to improve the interest of the gaming by devising the fluctuation time of the identification information. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(C-1) The first lottery means capable of performing the first lottery (ordinary lottery) and
A second lottery means capable of conducting a second lottery (second special lottery) and
Based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) capable of variablely displaying the identification information and then stopping the display,
Based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means, the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164) capable of variablely displaying the identification information and then stopping and displaying the identification information. Prepare,
When the result of the first lottery is the first result (per ordinary symbol), the first display means can variably display the identification information over the first time (500 ms). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result (normal loss), the identification information is variablely displayed over a second time (600,000 ms) longer than the first time. Is possible,
When the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small hit), the second display means fluctuates the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time. It is possible to let
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol), the identification information is changed over the first time (500 ms). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the second time (600,000 ms) longer than the first time (500 ms) can be displayed. ), It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner. Further, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the identification information is provided over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time (600,000 ms). It is configured so that it can be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the second lottery is performed while the variation display of the identification information (first variation display) is performed when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss). It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit). Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property by using the time from the end of the second variation display to the end of the first variation display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine according to (C-1).
The first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) in which a game ball can be entered, and
A second winning means (small hit large winning opening 151) that allows a game ball to enter,
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, it is possible to control the first winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the first winning means. 1 Control means and
When the identification information is variablely displayed over the second time by at least the first display means, and the result of the second lottery is the specific result, the second winning means is used. A second control means capable of controlling the second winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the ball is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol), the game is played in the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145). It is possible to control the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) so that the ball can easily enter the ball, and at least the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) provides a second. When the identification information is fluctuated over time (600,000 ms) and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the second winning means (small) It is configured so that the second winning means (small winning large winning opening 151) can be controlled so that the game ball can easily enter the winning large winning opening 151). As a result, a second result (ordinary) different from the first result (per ordinary symbol) that triggers control to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145). When a loss occurs, the second winning means (small hit large winning opening) is performed while the variation display (first variation display) of the identification information based on the second result (normal loss) is performed. It is possible to control the game ball to easily enter 151), and the time until the end of the first variation display is used to enter the second winning means (small hit large winning opening 151). It is possible to create a situation in which a game ball is easy to enter.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, while the variation display of the identification information (ordinary symbol loss length variation) based on the second result (ordinary loss) is being performed, the second winning means (small hit large winning opening) is performed. It was explained in 151) that a situation in which a game ball can easily enter is created. The second result in the present invention is not limited to loss (ordinary loss), but may be hit (ordinary symbol hit). The second time can be about 10 to 100,000 times (or 100 to 10000 times, 500 to 5000 times, 1000 to 2000 times, etc.) of the first time. The time can be about 5 to 10000 times (or 100 to 5000 times, 500 times to 1000 times, etc.) of the third time. Further, the time for which the game ball is easily controlled to enter the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 time to 1 times) the above-mentioned first time. The time can be about 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). In addition, the time for which the game ball is easily controlled to enter the second winning means (small hit large winning opening 151) is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 time) of the third time. It is possible to set the time to about 50 times, 2 times, 10 times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine according to (C-1) or (C-2).
A symbol display means (display device 7) capable of displaying a symbol, and
The symbol display means includes a symbol effect executing means capable of executing a symbol effect (drum variation effect) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed.
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, the symbol effect executing means is such that one of the plurality of symbols is different from at least one of the remaining symbols. On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the symbol effect is executed so that the plurality of symbols are all the same symbol. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol), one of the plurality of symbols is the remaining symbol. When the symbol effect (drum fluctuation effect) can be executed differently from at least one of the symbols, while the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss). Is configured so that it is possible to execute a symbol effect (drum variation effect) so that a plurality of symbols all have the same symbol. As a result, the player is made to understand that the variable display of the identification information is performed over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)) by displaying the same symbol as a plurality of symbols. Can be done.

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3).
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means,
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variation mode) is provided.
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means, and the image display control means. , Right drum symbol 9202R) can be displayed on the image display means, but when the first state is controlled, the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when controlled to the second state (probability variation mode), a predetermined image corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161). (Left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) can be displayed, but when controlled to the first state (normal mode), the predetermined image ( The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. As a result, the effect (predetermined image) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) is performed in the second state (probability variation mode) as compared with the first state (normal mode). The player can be made aware of the state in which (the effect using the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variation mode) is provided.
The state control means can end the second state when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state.
When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the effect executing means has a predetermined effect (drum according to a hit pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases where the variable effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state (probability change mode), the second state (probability change mode) can be terminated. be. Further, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), a predetermined effect is determined according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode). (Drum variation effect by hit pattern) may be executed, or the predetermined effect (drum variation effect by hit pattern) may not be executed. In this regard, when the number of remaining unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (probability variation mode) is the first. In the case where the result of the lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variation display time of the identification information (the situation where it is relatively shorter than the second time (600,000 ms))). There is a possibility that the significance that the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss) is diminished. According to the invention of (5), it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect (drum variation effect due to a hit pattern) from being generated in such a case, so that an effect according to the situation of the game can be appropriately realized. Can be done.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is a specific number (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first. It was explained that a predetermined effect (drum variation effect according to the hit pattern) is performed based on the result of 2 (normal symbol loss length variation). Here, as the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, And 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be changed according to the determined fluctuation time. For example, in the probabilistic game state, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is lost, the variation display time of the identification information is 5 seconds, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is It is assumed that the total time of the variation display time of the identification information in the case of a small hit and the opening time of the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small hits) is 5 seconds. In such a form, when 60 seconds is determined as the fluctuation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12 If it is more than once, the variation display can be almost completed during the second state (probability variation mode). In this case, the specific number of times can be set to 12 times. A value obtained by dividing the determined normal symbol fluctuation time by the expected value of the special symbol fluctuation time (for small hits, the total time of the special symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the small hit winning opening). The number of times according to the above may be defined as the specific number of times.

Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is the specific number (10 times) or more. It was explained that it is performed when the gate passage that triggered the lottery (ordinary lottery) of 1 occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the gate starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the gate passes occurs is the specified number (10 times) or more, the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation starts is specified. If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined effect (drum variation effect according to the hit pattern) may not be performed.

As described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) based on the hit pattern are identification information based on the second result (normal loss). It is possible to configure the variable display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) to be stopped before the start. After the stop display of the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) is completed, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 207 (k)) is performed. The hit notification effect should end at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to classify the effect mode, such as the probability variation mode while the hit notification effect is being performed, and the first bonus mode after the hit notification effect is being performed. In the probabilistic mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 224 and 225 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 218 to 221 are performed. When the hit notification effect is being performed, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164) in a manner corresponding to the big hit (for example, 10R big hit) (big hit game). When the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined jackpot effect is performed. As a result, the mode shifts to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot effect can be the same effect as that performed when the start condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied at other timings in the probability variation mode (when the hit notification effect is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the start condition of the big hit game state is satisfied in the first bonus mode, an effect different from the predetermined big hit effect may be performed.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5).
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means is provided.
The image display control means displays the identification information in the first display means according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the image display means, and changes the mode of the display over time so that the display gradually becomes thinner. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) displays the identification information according to the fluctuation time, and the display mode is changed over time so that the display gradually becomes thinner. It is configured so that it can be changed to. As a result, the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) can be imprinted on the player's mind, and the player can be strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6).
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means is provided.
The image display control means
A first image capable of causing the image display means to display predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means. Display control means and
The image display means is provided with a second image display control means capable of displaying a time according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (displaying an image of the remaining time of a normal symbol loss length fluctuation).
The first image display control means does not display the predetermined image on the image display means when the time display is performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161). ) Can be displayed, and the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) can be performed. It is possible. Then, when the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the time display (display of the image of the remaining time with the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary symbol loss length fluctuation), the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is displayed. Described as being done (see FIG. 210). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at the time when one normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts (that is, the fluctuation time itself of the normal symbol fluctuation related to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). , It may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length change at the time when one normal symbol loss length change is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol). Even if there is a case, or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (loss or big hit), the time display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image display) is performed. good. For example, in a situation where the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), all the reserved fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol fluctuation correspond to the first result (per normal symbol). A configuration in which the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed when the fluctuation pattern is used or when the result of the jackpot determination related to all the reserved special symbol fluctuations is lost. It is possible to adopt. As a result, the player can be made aware that the remaining time for the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length has decreased.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
A state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode) is provided.
When the specific state ends and a part or all of the second time has elapsed, the effect executing means has the remaining time of the second time (ordinary symbol loss length variation). It is possible to perform the production according to the remaining time),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends and a part or all of the second time (600,000 ms) has elapsed, the second It is configured so that it is possible to perform an effect according to the remaining time of the time (the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). As a result, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variable display of the identification information (first variable display) and the specific state (second bonus mode) are displayed. In a situation where they occur in an overlapping manner, the content of the effect is different depending on how much time (second time) of the fluctuation display remains at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode). be able to. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the remaining time of the second time (the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) continues at the end of a specific state (second bonus mode), the remaining time of the second time (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) It was explained that the production is performed according to (the remaining time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may be terminated at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) is terminated. That is, when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends and the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) ends (when the remaining time of the second time is 0). When the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0), different effects may be performed.

If the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) continues at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode), the first lottery (normal) in the second state (probability change mode) The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (ordinary lottery) occurs, and the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) occurs. While the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the transition to a specific state (second bonus mode) is performed, and even when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first fluctuation display (normal) is performed. When the symbol loss length fluctuation) continues, and in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), and the first lottery When the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (ordinary lottery) occurs and the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) Can be assumed to continue. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (ordinary lottery). When the display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss) in the second state (probability variation mode), and the first lottery is concerned. An effect (special effect) different from the effect performed when the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the (ordinary lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is provided.
The state control means can end the second state when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state.
The effect executing means executes an effect according to the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over the second time. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is set. It is possible to terminate it. Further, when the identification information is variablely displayed over the second time (600,000 ms), it depends on the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode). It is configured so that it is possible to perform various effects. As a result, when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is large (the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) continues for the time being). ) Or when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching. In such a situation), it is possible to appropriately realize the effect according to the situation of the game.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the predetermined number (5 times) or more, and the predetermined number (5 times). ), It was explained that the production content may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) can be divided into a plurality of periods, and the content of the effect performed in each period can be different. The plurality of periods include, for example, a period in which the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number (for example, 30 times) (for example, 30 times). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (first period) and the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) or more and the first predetermined number (for example). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the period (second period) less than 30 times (30 times) and the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the third predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during the period (third period) less than the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) is the fourth. The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in a period (fourth period) that is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) and less than a third predetermined number of times (for example, five times) and in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode). A period (fifth period) or the like in which the (remaining ST number of times) is the fifth predetermined number of times (for example, one time) can be set.

(C-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means may suggest that the result of the first lottery is the second result while the identification information is variablely displayed in the second display means (pre-reading a normal figure). It is possible to perform production),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result while the identification information is variablely displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164). It is configured so that it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (normal map look-ahead effect) that can suggest that the game has become (normally lost). As a result, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) is performed through the suggestion effect (normal symbol look-ahead effect) performed while the identification information is variablely displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164). It is possible to expect the player to perform the variable display of the identification information over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)).

201, 1201, 201 Main CPU
301, 1301, 301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120 1st starting port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 2nd starting port

Claims (1)

A winning random number acquisition means capable of acquiring a special lottery random number based on the game ball launched toward the game area passing through the special start area, and
Using the special lottery random number acquired by the winning random number acquisition means, a special lottery means capable of executing a special lottery related to control of a special game state that can give a profit to the player, and a special lottery means.
A special symbol random number acquisition means capable of acquiring a special symbol random number based on the game ball launched toward the game area passing through the special start area, and a special symbol random number acquisition means.
A special symbol variable control means capable of executing variable display of a special symbol based on the result of the special lottery and the special symbol random number acquired by the special symbol random number acquisition means, and
When the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the special result is derived, the special game state control means that can control the special game state and the special game state control means.
When the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the small hit result is derived, the expected value of the amount to which the game value as a prize can be given is smaller than the special game state. Game state control means and
The first specific control that can shorten the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the normal game state, and the frequency with which the game ball can or easily pass through the special starting area are increased as compared with the normal game state. Of the second specific control that can be obtained, a specific control execution means capable of executing at least one specific control, and a specific control execution means.
With
One game is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the derivation of the result of the special lottery.
The specific control execution means is
Even if the special result is not derived in the game, the specification is made until the result of the special lottery in the game is derived, or based on the result of the special lottery in the game being derived. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the execution of control can be started.

Images